diff options
Diffstat (limited to '646-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-0.txt | 10128 |
1 files changed, 10128 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/646-0.txt b/646-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d906ed6 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10128 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Coral Island, by R. M. Ballantyne + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at +www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you +will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before +using this eBook. + +Title: The Coral Island + a Tale of the Pacific Ocean + +Author: R. M. Ballantyne + +Release Date: September, 1996 [eBook #646] +[Most recently updated: September 27, 2021] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +Produced by: David Price + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND *** + +{Book cover: cover.jpg} + + + + + +The Coral Island: +A Tale of the Pacific Ocean + + +{A coral island: p0.jpg} + +BY + +ROBERT MICHAEL BALLANTYNE, +AUTHOR OF "HUDSON'S BAY; OR, EVERY-DAY LIFE IN THE WILDS OF NORTH +AMERICA; +"SNOW-FLAKES AND SUN-BEAMS; OR, THE YOUNG FUR-TRADERS;" +"UNGAVA: A TALE OF THE ESQUIMAUX," ETC., ETC. + +WITH ILLUSTRATIONS BY DALZIEL. + +London: +THOMAS NELSON AND SONS, PATERNOSTER ROW. +EDINBURGH; AND NEW YORK. +1884. + + + + +Preface + + +I was a boy when I went through the wonderful adventures herein set down. +With the memory of my boyish feelings strong upon me, I present my book +specially to boys, in the earnest hope that they may derive valuable +information, much pleasure, great profit, and unbounded amusement from +its pages. + +One word more. If there is any boy or man who loves to be melancholy and +morose, and who cannot enter with kindly sympathy into the regions of +fun, let me seriously advise him to shut my book and put it away. It is +not meant for him. + +RALPH ROVER + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +The beginning--My early life and character--I thirst for adventure in +foreign lands and go to sea. + +Roving has always been, and still is, my ruling passion, the joy of my +heart, the very sunshine of my existence. In childhood, in boyhood, and +in man's estate, I have been a rover; not a mere rambler among the woody +glens and upon the hill-tops of my own native land, but an enthusiastic +rover throughout the length and breadth of the wide wide world. + +It was a wild, black night of howling storm, the night in which I was +born on the foaming bosom of the broad Atlantic Ocean. My father was a +sea-captain; my grandfather was a sea-captain; my great-grandfather had +been a marine. Nobody could tell positively what occupation _his_ father +had followed; but my dear mother used to assert that he had been a +midshipman, whose grandfather, on the mother's side, had been an admiral +in the royal navy. At anyrate we knew that, as far back as our family +could be traced, it had been intimately connected with the great watery +waste. Indeed this was the case on both sides of the house; for my +mother always went to sea with my father on his long voyages, and so +spent the greater part of her life upon the water. + +Thus it was, I suppose, that I came to inherit a roving disposition. Soon +after I was born, my father, being old, retired from a seafaring life, +purchased a small cottage in a fishing village on the west coast of +England, and settled down to spend the evening of his life on the shores +of that sea which had for so many years been his home. It was not long +after this that I began to show the roving spirit that dwelt within me. +For some time past my infant legs had been gaining strength, so that I +came to be dissatisfied with rubbing the skin off my chubby knees by +walking on them, and made many attempts to stand up and walk like a man; +all of which attempts, however, resulted in my sitting down violently and +in sudden surprise. One day I took advantage of my dear mother's absence +to make another effort; and, to my joy, I actually succeeded in reaching +the doorstep, over which I tumbled into a pool of muddy water that lay +before my father's cottage door. Ah, how vividly I remember the horror +of my poor mother when she found me sweltering in the mud amongst a group +of cackling ducks, and the tenderness with which she stripped off my +dripping clothes and washed my dirty little body! From this time forth +my rambles became more frequent, and, as I grew older, more distant, +until at last I had wandered far and near on the shore and in the woods +around our humble dwelling, and did not rest content until my father +bound me apprentice to a coasting vessel, and let me go to sea. + +For some years I was happy in visiting the sea-ports, and in coasting +along the shores of my native land. My Christian name was Ralph, and my +comrades added to this the name of Rover, in consequence of the passion +which I always evinced for travelling. Rover was not my real name, but +as I never received any other I came at last to answer to it as naturally +as to my proper name; and, as it is not a bad one, I see no good reason +why I should not introduce myself to the reader as Ralph Rover. My +shipmates were kind, good-natured fellows, and they and I got on very +well together. They did, indeed, very frequently make game of and banter +me, but not unkindly; and I overheard them sometimes saying that Ralph +Rover was a "queer, old-fashioned fellow." This, I must confess, +surprised me much, and I pondered the saying long, but could come at no +satisfactory conclusion as to that wherein my old-fashionedness lay. It +is true I was a quiet lad, and seldom spoke except when spoken to. +Moreover, I never could understand the jokes of my companions even when +they were explained to me: which dulness in apprehension occasioned me +much grief; however, I tried to make up for it by smiling and looking +pleased when I observed that they were laughing at some witticism which I +had failed to detect. I was also very fond of inquiring into the nature +of things and their causes, and often fell into fits of abstraction while +thus engaged in my mind. But in all this I saw nothing that did not seem +to be exceedingly natural, and could by no means understand why my +comrades should call me "an old-fashioned fellow." + +Now, while engaged in the coasting trade, I fell in with many seamen who +had travelled to almost every quarter of the globe; and I freely confess +that my heart glowed ardently within me as they recounted their wild +adventures in foreign lands,--the dreadful storms they had weathered, the +appalling dangers they had escaped, the wonderful creatures they had seen +both on the land and in the sea, and the interesting lands and strange +people they had visited. But of all the places of which they told me, +none captivated and charmed my imagination so much as the Coral Islands +of the Southern Seas. They told me of thousands of beautiful fertile +islands that had been formed by a small creature called the coral insect, +where summer reigned nearly all the year round,--where the trees were +laden with a constant harvest of luxuriant fruit,--where the climate was +almost perpetually delightful,--yet where, strange to say, men were wild, +bloodthirsty savages, excepting in those favoured isles to which the +gospel of our Saviour had been conveyed. These exciting accounts had so +great an effect upon my mind, that, when I reached the age of fifteen, I +resolved to make a voyage to the South Seas. + +I had no little difficulty at first in prevailing on my dear parents to +let me go; but when I urged on my father that he would never have become +a great captain had he remained in the coasting trade, he saw the truth +of what I said, and gave his consent. My dear mother, seeing that my +father had made up his mind, no longer offered opposition to my wishes. +"But oh, Ralph," she said, on the day I bade her adieu, "come back soon +to us, my dear boy, for we are getting old now, Ralph, and may not have +many years to live." + +I will not take up my reader's time with a minute account of all that +occurred before I took my final leave of my dear parents. Suffice it to +say, that my father placed me under the charge of an old mess-mate of his +own, a merchant captain, who was on the point of sailing to the South +Seas in his own ship, the Arrow. My mother gave me her blessing and a +small Bible; and her last request was, that I would never forget to read +a chapter every day, and say my prayers; which I promised, with tears in +my eyes, that I would certainly do. + +Soon afterwards I went on board the Arrow, which was a fine large ship, +and set sail for the islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +The departure--The sea--My companions--Some account of the wonderful +sights we saw on the great deep--A dreadful storm and a frightful wreck. + +It was a bright, beautiful, warm day when our ship spread her canvass to +the breeze, and sailed for the regions of the south. Oh, how my heart +bounded with delight as I listened to the merry chorus of the sailors, +while they hauled at the ropes and got in the anchor! The captain +shouted--the men ran to obey--the noble ship bent over to the breeze, and +the shore gradually faded from my view, while I stood looking on with a +kind of feeling that the whole was a delightful dream. + +The first thing that struck me as being different from anything I had yet +seen during my short career on the sea, was the hoisting of the anchor on +deck, and lashing it firmly down with ropes, as if we had now bid adieu +to the land for ever, and would require its services no more. + +"There, lass," cried a broad-shouldered jack-tar, giving the fluke of the +anchor a hearty slap with his hand after the housing was +completed--"there, lass, take a good nap now, for we shan't ask you to +kiss the mud again for many a long day to come!" + +And so it was. That anchor did not "kiss the mud" for many long days +afterwards; and when at last it did, it was for the last time! + +There were a number of boys in the ship, but two of them were my special +favourites. Jack Martin was a tall, strapping, broad-shouldered youth of +eighteen, with a handsome, good-humoured, firm face. He had had a good +education, was clever and hearty and lion-like in his actions, but mild +and quiet in disposition. Jack was a general favourite, and had a +peculiar fondness for me. My other companion was Peterkin Gay. He was +little, quick, funny, decidedly mischievous, and about fourteen years +old. But Peterkin's mischief was almost always harmless, else he could +not have been so much beloved as he was. + +"Hallo! youngster," cried Jack Martin, giving me a slap on the shoulder, +the day I joined the ship, "come below and I'll show you your berth. You +and I are to be mess-mates, and I think we shall be good friends, for I +like the look o' you." + +Jack was right. He and I and Peterkin afterwards became the best and +stanchest friends that ever tossed together on the stormy waves. + +I shall say little about the first part of our voyage. We had the usual +amount of rough weather and calm; also we saw many strange fish rolling +in the sea, and I was greatly delighted one day by seeing a shoal of +flying fish dart out of the water and skim through the air about a foot +above the surface. They were pursued by dolphins, which feed on them, +and one flying-fish in its terror flew over the ship, struck on the +rigging, and fell upon the deck. Its wings were just fins elongated, and +we found that they could never fly far at a time, and never mounted into +the air like birds, but skimmed along the surface of the sea. Jack and I +had it for dinner, and found it remarkably good. + +When we approached Cape Horn, at the southern extremity of America, the +weather became very cold and stormy, and the sailors began to tell +stories about the furious gales and the dangers of that terrible cape. + +"Cape Horn," said one, "is the most horrible headland I ever doubled. +I've sailed round it twice already, and both times the ship was a'most +blow'd out o' the water." + +"An' I've been round it once," said another, "an' that time the sails +were split, and the ropes frozen in the blocks, so that they wouldn't +work, and we wos all but lost." + +"An' I've been round it five times," cried a third, "an' every time wos +wuss than another, the gales wos so tree-mendous!" + +"And I've been round it no times at all," cried Peterkin, with an +impudent wink of his eye, "an' _that_ time I wos blow'd inside out!" + +Nevertheless, we passed the dreaded cape without much rough weather, and, +in the course of a few weeks afterwards, were sailing gently, before a +warm tropical breeze, over the Pacific Ocean. Thus we proceeded on our +voyage, sometimes bounding merrily before a fair breeze, at other times +floating calmly on the glassy wave and fishing for the curious +inhabitants of the deep,--all of which, although the sailors thought +little of them, were strange, and interesting, and very wonderful to me. + +At last we came among the Coral Islands of the Pacific, and I shall never +forget the delight with which I gazed,--when we chanced to pass one,--at +the pure, white, dazzling shores, and the verdant palm-trees, which +looked bright and beautiful in the sunshine. And often did we three long +to be landed on one, imagining that we should certainly find perfect +happiness there! Our wish was granted sooner than we expected. + +One night, soon after we entered the tropics, an awful storm burst upon +our ship. The first squall of wind carried away two of our masts; and +left only the foremast standing. Even this, however, was more than +enough, for we did not dare to hoist a rag of sail on it. For five days +the tempest raged in all its fury. Everything was swept off the decks +except one small boat. The steersman was lashed to the wheel, lest he +should be washed away, and we all gave ourselves up for lost. The +captain said that he had no idea where we were, as we had been blown far +out of our course; and we feared much that we might get among the +dangerous coral reefs which are so numerous in the Pacific. At day-break +on the sixth morning of the gale we saw land ahead. It was an island +encircled by a reef of coral on which the waves broke in fury. There was +calm water within this reef, but we could only see one narrow opening +into it. For this opening we steered, but, ere we reached it, a +tremendous wave broke on our stern, tore the rudder completely off, and +left us at the mercy of the winds and waves. + +"It's all over with us now, lads," said the captain to the men; "get the +boat ready to launch; we shall be on the rocks in less than half an +hour." + +The men obeyed in gloomy silence, for they felt that there was little +hope of so small a boat living in such a sea. + +"Come boys," said Jack Martin, in a grave tone, to me and Peterkin, as we +stood on the quarterdeck awaiting our fate;--"Come boys, we three shall +stick together. You see it is impossible that the little boat can reach +the shore, crowded with men. It will be sure to upset, so I mean rather +to trust myself to a large oar. I see through the telescope that the ship +will strike at the tail of the reef, where the waves break into the quiet +water inside; so, if we manage to cling to the oar till it is driven over +the breakers, we may perhaps gain the shore. What say you; will you join +me?" + +We gladly agreed to follow Jack, for he inspired us with confidence, +although I could perceive, by the sad tone of his voice, that he had +little hope; and, indeed, when I looked at the white waves that lashed +the reef and boiled against the rocks as if in fury, I felt that there +was but a step between us and death. My heart sank within me; but at +that moment my thoughts turned to my beloved mother, and I remembered +those words, which were among the last that she said to me--"Ralph, my +dearest child, always remember in the hour of danger to look to your Lord +and Saviour Jesus Christ. He alone is both able and willing to save your +body and your soul." So I felt much comforted when I thought thereon. + +The ship was now very near the rocks. The men were ready with the boat, +and the captain beside them giving orders, when a tremendous wave came +towards us. We three ran towards the bow to lay hold of our oar, and had +barely reached it when the wave fell on the deck with a crash like +thunder. At the same moment the ship struck, the foremast broke off +close to the deck and went over the side, carrying the boat and men along +with it. Our oar got entangled with the wreck, and Jack seized an axe to +cut it free, but, owing to the motion of the ship, he missed the cordage +and struck the axe deep into the oar. Another wave, however, washed it +clear of the wreck. We all seized hold of it, and the next instant we +were struggling in the wild sea. The last thing I saw was the boat +whirling in the surf, and all the sailors tossed into the foaming waves. +Then I became insensible. + +On recovering from my swoon, I found myself lying on a bank of soft +grass, under the shelter of an overhanging rock, with Peterkin on his +knees by my side, tenderly bathing my temples with water, and +endeavouring to stop the blood that flowed from a wound in my forehead. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +The Coral Island--Our first cogitations after landing, and the result of +them--We conclude that the island is uninhabited. + +There is a strange and peculiar sensation experienced in recovering from +a state of insensibility, which is almost indescribable; a sort of +dreamy, confused consciousness; a half-waking half-sleeping condition, +accompanied with a feeling of weariness, which, however, is by no means +disagreeable. As I slowly recovered and heard the voice of Peterkin +inquiring whether I felt better, I thought that I must have overslept +myself, and should be sent to the mast-head for being lazy; but before I +could leap up in haste, the thought seemed to vanish suddenly away, and I +fancied that I must have been ill. Then a balmy breeze fanned my cheek, +and I thought of home, and the garden at the back of my father's cottage, +with its luxuriant flowers, and the sweet-scented honey-suckle that my +dear mother trained so carefully upon the trellised porch. But the +roaring of the surf put these delightful thoughts to flight, and I was +back again at sea, watching the dolphins and the flying-fish, and reefing +topsails off the wild and stormy Cape Horn. Gradually the roar of the +surf became louder and more distinct. I thought of being wrecked far far +away from my native land, and slowly opened my eyes to meet those of my +companion Jack, who, with a look of intense anxiety, was gazing into my +face. + +"Speak to us, my dear Ralph," whispered Jack, tenderly, "are you better +now?" + +I smiled and looked up, saying, "Better; why, what do you mean, Jack? I'm +quite well." + +"Then what are you shamming for, and frightening us in this way?" said +Peterkin, smiling through his tears; for the poor boy had been really +under the impression that I was dying. + +I now raised myself on my elbow, and putting my hand to my forehead, +found that it had been cut pretty severely, and that I had lost a good +deal of blood. + +"Come, come, Ralph," said Jack, pressing me gently backward, "lie down, +my boy; you're not right yet. Wet your lips with this water, it's cool +and clear as crystal. I got it from a spring close at hand. There now, +don't say a word, hold your tongue," said he, seeing me about to speak. +"I'll tell you all about it, but you must not utter a syllable till you +have rested well." + +"Oh! don't stop him from speaking, Jack," said Peterkin, who, now that +his fears for my safety were removed, busied himself in erecting a +shelter of broken branches in order to protect me from the wind; which, +however, was almost unnecessary, for the rock beside which I had been +laid completely broke the force of the gale. "Let him speak, Jack; it's +a comfort to hear that he's alive, after lying there stiff and white and +sulky for a whole hour, just like an Egyptian mummy. Never saw such a +fellow as you are, Ralph; always up to mischief. You've almost knocked +out all my teeth and more than half choked me, and now you go shamming +dead! It's very wicked of you, indeed it is." + +While Peterkin ran on in this style, my faculties became quite clear +again, and I began to understand my position. "What do you mean by +saying I half choked you, Peterkin?" said I. + +"What do I mean? Is English not your mother tongue, or do you want me to +repeat it in French, by way of making it clearer? Don't you remember--" + +"I remember nothing," said I, interrupting him, "after we were thrown +into the sea." + +{Slowly recovering: p24.jpg} + +"Hush, Peterkin," said Jack, "you're exciting Ralph with your nonsense. +I'll explain it to you. You recollect that after the ship struck, we +three sprang over the bow into the sea; well, I noticed that the oar +struck your head and gave you that cut on the brow, which nearly stunned +you, so that you grasped Peterkin round the neck without knowing +apparently what you were about. In doing so you pushed the +telescope,--which you clung to as if it had been your life,--against +Peterkin's mouth--" + +"Pushed it against his mouth!" interrupted Peterkin, "say crammed it down +his throat. Why, there's a distinct mark of the brass rim on the back of +my gullet at this moment!" + +"Well, well, be that as it may," continued Jack, "you clung to him, +Ralph, till I feared you really would choke him; but I saw that he had a +good hold of the oar, so I exerted myself to the utmost to push you +towards the shore, which we luckily reached without much trouble, for the +water inside the reef is quite calm." + +"But the captain and crew, what of them?" I inquired anxiously. + +Jack shook his head. + +"Are they lost?" + +"No, they are not lost, I hope, but I fear there is not much chance of +their being saved. The ship struck at the very tail of the island on +which we are cast. When the boat was tossed into the sea it fortunately +did not upset, although it shipped a good deal of water, and all the men +managed to scramble into it; but before they could get the oars out the +gale carried them past the point and away to leeward of the island. After +we landed I saw them endeavouring to pull towards us, but as they had +only one pair of oars out of the eight that belong to the boat, and as +the wind was blowing right in their teeth, they gradually lost ground. +Then I saw them put about and hoist some sort of sail,--a blanket, I +fancy, for it was too small for the boat,--and in half an hour they were +out of sight." + +"Poor fellows," I murmured sorrowfully. + +"But the more I think about it, I've better hope of them," continued +Jack, in a more cheerful tone. "You see, Ralph, I've read a great deal +about these South Sea Islands, and I know that in many places they are +scattered about in thousands over the sea, so they're almost sure to fall +in with one of them before long." + +"I'm sure I hope so," said Peterkin, earnestly. "But what has become of +the wreck, Jack? I saw you clambering up the rocks there while I was +watching Ralph. Did you say she had gone to pieces?" + +"No, she has not gone to pieces, but she has gone to the bottom," replied +Jack. "As I said before, she struck on the tail of the island and stove +in her bow, but the next breaker swung her clear, and she floated away to +leeward. The poor fellows in the boat made a hard struggle to reach her, +but long before they came near her she filled and went down. It was +after she foundered that I saw them trying to pull to the island." + +There was a long silence after Jack ceased speaking, and I have no doubt +that each was revolving in his mind our extraordinary position. For my +part I cannot say that my reflections were very agreeable. I knew that +we were on an island, for Jack had said so, but whether it was inhabited +or not I did not know. If it should be inhabited, I felt certain, from +all I had heard of South Sea Islanders, that we should be roasted alive +and eaten. If it should turn out to be uninhabited, I fancied that we +should be starved to death. "Oh!" thought I, "if the ship had only stuck +on the rocks we might have done pretty well, for we could have obtained +provisions from her, and tools to enable us to build a shelter, but +now--alas! alas! we are lost!" These last words I uttered aloud in my +distress. + +"Lost! Ralph?" exclaimed Jack, while a smile overspread his hearty +countenance. "Saved, you should have said. Your cogitations seem to have +taken a wrong road, and led you to a wrong conclusion." + +"Do you know what conclusion _I_ have come to?" said Peterkin. "I have +made up my mind that it's capital,--first rate,--the best thing that ever +happened to us, and the most splendid prospect that ever lay before three +jolly young tars. We've got an island all to ourselves. We'll take +possession in the name of the king; we'll go and enter the service of its +black inhabitants. Of course we'll rise, naturally, to the top of +affairs. White men always do in savage countries. You shall be king, +Jack; Ralph, prime minister, and I shall be--" + +"The court jester," interrupted Jack. + +"No," retorted Peterkin, "I'll have no title at all. I shall merely +accept a highly responsible situation under government, for you see, +Jack, I'm fond of having an enormous salary and nothing to do." + +"But suppose there are no natives?" + +"Then we'll build a charming villa, and plant a lovely garden round it, +stuck all full of the most splendiferous tropical flowers, and we'll farm +the land, plant, sow, reap, eat, sleep, and be merry." + +"But to be serious," said Jack, assuming a grave expression of +countenance, which I observed always had the effect of checking +Peterkin's disposition to make fun of everything, "we are really in +rather an uncomfortable position. If this is a desert island, we shall +have to live very much like the wild beasts, for we have not a tool of +any kind, not even a knife." + +"Yes, we have _that_," said Peterkin, fumbling in his trousers pocket, +from which he drew forth a small penknife with only one blade, and that +was broken. + +"Well, that's better than nothing; but come," said Jack, rising, "we are +wasting our time in _talking_ instead of _doing_. You seem well enough +to walk now, Ralph, let us see what we have got in our pockets, and then +let us climb some hill and ascertain what sort of island we have been +cast upon, for, whether good or bad, it seems likely to be our home for +some time to come." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +We examine into our personal property, and make a happy discovery--Our +island described--Jack proves himself to be learned and sagacious above +his fellows--Curious discoveries--Natural lemonade! + +We now seated ourselves upon a rock and began to examine into our +personal property. When we reached the shore, after being wrecked, my +companions had taken off part of their clothes and spread them out in the +sun to dry, for, although the gale was raging fiercely, there was not a +single cloud in the bright sky. They had also stripped off most part of +my wet clothes and spread them also on the rocks. Having resumed our +garments, we now searched all our pockets with the utmost care, and laid +their contents out on a flat stone before us; and, now that our minds +were fully alive to our condition, it was with no little anxiety that we +turned our several pockets inside out, in order that nothing might escape +us. When all was collected together we found that our worldly goods +consisted of the following articles:-- + +First, A small penknife with a single blade broken off about the middle +and very rusty, besides having two or three notches on its edge. +(Peterkin said of this, with his usual pleasantry, that it would do for a +saw as well as a knife, which was a great advantage.) Second, An old +German-silver pencil-case without any lead in it. Third, A piece of whip- +cord about six yards long. Fourth, A sailmaker's needle of a small size. +Fifth, A ship's telescope, which I happened to have in my hand at the +time the ship struck, and which I had clung to firmly all the time I was +in the water. Indeed it was with difficulty that Jack got it out of my +grasp when I was lying insensible on the shore. I cannot understand why +I kept such a firm hold of this telescope. They say that a drowning man +will clutch at a straw. Perhaps it may have been some such feeling in +me, for I did not know that it was in my hand at the time we were +wrecked. However, we felt some pleasure in having it with us now, +although we did not see that it could be of much use to us, as the glass +at the small end was broken to pieces. Our sixth article was a brass +ring which Jack always wore on his little finger. I never understood why +he wore it, for Jack was not vain of his appearance, and did not seem to +care for ornaments of any kind. Peterkin said "it was in memory of the +girl he left behind him!" But as he never spoke of this girl to either +of us, I am inclined to think that Peterkin was either jesting or +mistaken. In addition to these articles we had a little bit of tinder, +and the clothes on our backs. These last were as follows:-- + +Each of us had on a pair of stout canvass trousers, and a pair of +sailors' thick shoes. Jack wore a red flannel shirt, a blue jacket, and +a red Kilmarnock bonnet or night-cap, besides a pair of worsted socks, +and a cotton pocket-handkerchief, with sixteen portraits of Lord Nelson +printed on it, and a union Jack in the middle. Peterkin had on a striped +flannel shirt,--which he wore outside his trousers, and belted round his +waist, after the manner of a tunic,--and a round black straw hat. He had +no jacket, having thrown it off just before we were cast into the sea; +but this was not of much consequence, as the climate of the island proved +to be extremely mild; so much so, indeed, that Jack and I often preferred +to go about without our jackets. Peterkin had also a pair of white +cotton socks, and a blue handkerchief with white spots all over it. My +own costume consisted of a blue flannel shirt, a blue jacket, a black +cap, and a pair of worsted socks, besides the shoes and canvass trousers +already mentioned. This was all we had, and besides these things we had +nothing else; but, when we thought of the danger from which we had +escaped, and how much worse off we might have been had the ship struck on +the reef during the night, we felt very thankful that we were possessed +of so much, although, I must confess, we sometimes wished that we had had +a little more. + +While we were examining these things, and talking about them, Jack +suddenly started and exclaimed-- + +"The oar! we have forgotten the oar." + +"What good will that do us?" said Peterkin; "there's wood enough on the +island to make a thousand oars." + +"Ay, lad," replied Jack, "but there's a bit of hoop iron at the end of +it, and that may be of much use to us." + +"Very true," said I, "let us go fetch it;" and with that we all three +rose and hastened down to the beach. I still felt a little weak from +loss of blood, so that my companions soon began to leave me behind; but +Jack perceived this, and, with his usual considerate good nature, turned +back to help me. This was now the first time that I had looked well +about me since landing, as the spot where I had been laid was covered +with thick bushes which almost hid the country from our view. As we now +emerged from among these and walked down the sandy beach together, I cast +my eyes about, and, truly, my heart glowed within me and my spirits rose +at the beautiful prospect which I beheld on every side. The gale had +suddenly died away, just as if it had blown furiously till it dashed our +ship upon the rocks, and had nothing more to do after accomplishing that. +The island on which we stood was hilly, and covered almost everywhere +with the most beautiful and richly coloured trees, bushes, and shrubs, +none of which I knew the names of at that time, except, indeed, the cocoa- +nut palms, which I recognised at once from the many pictures that I had +seen of them before I left home. A sandy beach of dazzling whiteness +lined this bright green shore, and upon it there fell a gentle ripple of +the sea. This last astonished me much, for I recollected that at home +the sea used to fall in huge billows on the shore long after a storm had +subsided. But on casting my glance out to sea the cause became apparent. +About a mile distant from the shore I saw the great billows of the ocean +rolling like a green wall, and falling with a long, loud roar, upon a low +coral reef, where they were dashed into white foam and flung up in clouds +of spray. This spray sometimes flew exceedingly high, and, every here +and there, a beautiful rainbow was formed for a moment among the falling +drops. We afterwards found that this coral reef extended quite round the +island, and formed a natural breakwater to it. Beyond this the sea rose +and tossed violently from the effects of the storm; but between the reef +and the shore it was as calm and as smooth as a pond. + +My heart was filled with more delight than I can express at sight of so +many glorious objects, and my thoughts turned suddenly to the +contemplation of the Creator of them all. I mention this the more +gladly, because at that time, I am ashamed to say, I very seldom thought +of my Creator, although I was constantly surrounded by the most beautiful +and wonderful of His works. I observed from the expression of my +companion's countenance that he too derived much joy from the splendid +scenery, which was all the more agreeable to us after our long voyage on +the salt sea. There, the breeze was fresh and cold, but here it was +delightfully mild; and, when a puff blew off the land, it came laden with +the most exquisite perfume that can be imagined. While we thus gazed, we +were startled by a loud "Huzza!" from Peterkin, and, on looking towards +the edge of the sea, we saw him capering and jumping about like a monkey, +and ever and anon tugging with all his might at something that lay upon +the shore. + +"What an odd fellow he is, to be sure," said Jack, taking me by the arm +and hurrying forward; "come, let us hasten to see what it is." + +"Here it is, boys, hurrah! come along. Just what we want," cried +Peterkin, as we drew near, still tugging with all his power. "First +rate; just the very ticket!" + +I need scarcely say to my readers that my companion Peterkin was in the +habit of using very remarkable and peculiar phrases. And I am free to +confess that I did not well understand the meaning of some of them,--such, +for instance, as "the very ticket;" but I think it my duty to recount +everything relating to my adventures with a strict regard to truthfulness +in as far as my memory serves me; so I write, as nearly as possible, the +exact words that my companions spoke. I often asked Peterkin to explain +what he meant by "ticket," but he always answered me by going into fits +of laughter. However, by observing the occasions on which he used it, I +came to understand that it meant to show that something was remarkably +good, or fortunate. + +On coming up we found that Peterkin was vainly endeavouring to pull the +axe out of the oar, into which, it will be remembered, Jack struck it +while endeavouring to cut away the cordage among which it had become +entangled at the bow of the ship. Fortunately for us the axe had +remained fast in the oar, and even now, all Peterkin's strength could not +draw it out of the cut. + +"Ah! that is capital indeed," cried Jack, at the same time giving the axe +a wrench that plucked it out of the tough wood. "How fortunate this is! +It will be of more value to us than a hundred knives, and the edge is +quite new and sharp." + +"I'll answer for the toughness of the handle at any rate," cried +Peterkin; "my arms are nearly pulled out of the sockets. But see here, +our luck is great. There is iron on the blade." He pointed to a piece +of hoop iron, as he spoke, which had been nailed round the blade of the +oar to prevent it from splitting. + +This also was a fortunate discovery. Jack went down on his knees, and +with the edge of the axe began carefully to force out the nails. But as +they were firmly fixed in, and the operation blunted our axe, we carried +the oar up with us to the place where we had left the rest of our things, +intending to burn the wood away from the iron at a more convenient time. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, after we had laid it on the stone which contained +our little all, "I propose that we should go to the tail of the island, +where the ship struck, which is only a quarter of a mile off, and see if +anything else has been thrown ashore. I don't expect anything, but it is +well to see. When we get back here it will be time to have our supper +and prepare our beds." + +"Agreed!" cried Peterkin and I together, as, indeed, we would have agreed +to any proposal that Jack made; for, besides his being older and much +stronger and taller than either of us, he was a very clever fellow, and I +think would have induced people much older than himself to choose him for +their leader, especially if they required to be led on a bold enterprise. + +Now, as we hastened along the white beach, which shone so brightly in the +rays of the setting sun that our eyes were quite dazzled by its glare, it +suddenly came into Peterkin's head that we had nothing to eat except the +wild berries which grew in profusion at our feet. + +"What shall we do, Jack?" said he, with a rueful look; "perhaps they may +be poisonous!" + +"No fear," replied Jack, confidently; "I have observed that a few of them +are not unlike some of the berries that grow wild on our own native +hills. Besides, I saw one or two strange birds eating them just a few +minutes ago, and what won't kill the birds won't kill us. But look up +there, Peterkin," continued Jack, pointing to the branched head of a +cocoa-nut palm. "There are nuts for us in all stages." + +"So there are!" cried Peterkin, who being of a very unobservant nature +had been too much taken up with other things to notice anything so high +above his head as the fruit of a palm tree. But, whatever faults my +young comrade had, he could not be blamed for want of activity or animal +spirits. Indeed, the nuts had scarcely been pointed out to him when he +bounded up the tall stem of the tree like a squirrel, and, in a few +minutes, returned with three nuts, each as large as a man's fist. + +"You had better keep them till we return," said Jack. "Let us finish our +work before eating." + +"So be it, captain, go ahead," cried Peterkin, thrusting the nuts into +his trousers pocket. "In fact I don't want to eat just now, but I would +give a good deal for a drink. Oh that I could find a spring! but I don't +see the smallest sign of one hereabouts. I say, Jack, how does it happen +that you seem to be up to everything? You have told us the names of half- +a-dozen trees already, and yet you say that you were never in the South +Seas before." + +"I'm not up to _everything_, Peterkin, as you'll find out ere long," +replied Jack, with a smile; "but I have been a great reader of books of +travel and adventure all my life, and that has put me up to a good many +things that you are, perhaps, not acquainted with." + +"Oh, Jack, that's all humbug. If you begin to lay everything to the +credit of books, I'll quite lose my opinion of you," cried Peterkin, with +a look of contempt. "I've seen a lot o' fellows that were _always_ +poring over books, and when they came to try to _do_ anything, they were +no better than baboons!" + +"You are quite right," retorted Jack; "and I have seen a lot of fellows +who never looked into books at all, who knew nothing about anything +except the things they had actually seen, and very little they knew even +about these. Indeed, some were so ignorant that they did not know that +cocoa-nuts grew on cocoa-nut trees!" + +I could not refrain from laughing at this rebuke, for there was much +truth in it, as to Peterkin's ignorance. + +"Humph! maybe you're right," answered Peterkin; "but I would not give +_tuppence_ for a man of books, if he had nothing else in him." + +"Neither would I," said Jack; "but that's no reason why you should run +books down, or think less of me for having read them. Suppose, now, +Peterkin, that you wanted to build a ship, and I were to give you a long +and particular account of the way to do it, would not that be very +useful?" + +"No doubt of it," said Peterkin, laughing. + +"And suppose I were to write the account in a letter instead of telling +you in words, would that be less useful?" + +"Well--no, perhaps not." + +"Well, suppose I were to print it, and send it to you in the form of a +book, would it not be as good and useful as ever?" + +"Oh, bother! Jack, you're a philosopher, and that's worse than anything!" +cried Peterkin, with a look of pretended horror. + +"Very well, Peterkin, we shall see," returned Jack, halting under the +shade of a cocoa-nut tree. "You said you were thirsty just a minute ago; +now, jump up that tree and bring down a nut,--not a ripe one, bring a +green, unripe one." + +Peterkin looked surprised, but, seeing that Jack was in earnest, he +obeyed. + +"Now, cut a hole in it with your penknife, and clap it to your mouth, old +fellow," said Jack. + +Peterkin did as he was directed, and we both burst into uncontrollable +laughter at the changes that instantly passed over his expressive +countenance. No sooner had he put the nut to his mouth, and thrown back +his head in order to catch what came out of it, than his eyes opened to +twice their ordinary size with astonishment, while his throat moved +vigorously in the act of swallowing. Then a smile and look of intense +delight overspread his face, except, indeed, the mouth, which, being +firmly fixed to the hole in the nut, could not take part in the +expression; but he endeavoured to make up for this by winking at us +excessively with his right eye. At length he stopped, and, drawing a +long breath, exclaimed-- + +"Nectar! perfect nectar! I say, Jack, you're a Briton--the best fellow I +ever met in my life. Only taste that!" said he, turning to me and +holding the nut to my mouth. I immediately drank, and certainly I was +much surprised at the delightful liquid that flowed copiously down my +throat. It was extremely cool, and had a sweet taste, mingled with acid; +in fact, it was the likest thing to lemonade I ever tasted, and was most +grateful and refreshing. I handed the nut to Jack, who, after tasting +it, said, "Now, Peterkin, you unbeliever, I never saw or tasted a cocoa +nut in my life before, except those sold in shops at home; but I once +read that the green nuts contain that stuff, and you see it is true!" + +"And pray," asked Peterkin, "what sort of 'stuff' does the ripe nut +contain?" + +"A hollow kernel," answered Jack, "with a liquid like milk in it; but it +does not satisfy thirst so well as hunger. It is very wholesome food I +believe." + +"Meat and drink on the same tree!" cried Peterkin; "washing in the sea, +lodging on the ground,--and all for nothing! My dear boys, we're set up +for life; it must be the ancient Paradise,--hurrah!" and Peterkin tossed +his straw hat in the air, and ran along the beach hallooing like a madman +with delight. + +We afterwards found, however, that these lovely islands were very unlike +Paradise in many things. But more of this in its proper place. + +We had now come to the point of rocks on which the ship had struck, but +did not find a single article, although we searched carefully among the +coral rocks, which at this place jutted out so far as nearly to join the +reef that encircled the island. Just as we were about to return, +however, we saw something black floating in a little cove that had +escaped our observation. Running forward, we drew it from the water, and +found it to be a long thick leather boot, such as fishermen at home wear; +and a few paces farther on we picked up its fellow. We at once +recognised these as having belonged to our captain, for he had worn them +during the whole of the storm, in order to guard his legs from the waves +and spray that constantly washed over our decks. My first thought on +seeing them was that our dear captain had been drowned; but Jack soon put +my mind more at rest on that point, by saying that if the captain had +been drowned with the boots on, he would certainly have been washed +ashore along with them, and that he had no doubt whatever he had kicked +them off while in the sea, that he might swim more easily. + +Peterkin immediately put them on, but they were so large that, as Jack +said, they would have done for boots, trousers, and vest too. I also +tried them, but, although I was long enough in the legs for them, they +were much too large in the feet for me; so we handed them to Jack, who +was anxious to make me keep them, but as they fitted his large limbs and +feet as if they had been made for him, I would not hear of it, so he +consented at last to use them. I may remark, however, that Jack did not +use them often, as they were extremely heavy. + +It was beginning to grow dark when we returned to our encampment; so we +put off our visit to the top of a hill till next day, and employed the +light that yet remained to us in cutting down a quantity of boughs and +the broad leaves of a tree, of which none of us knew the name. With +these we erected a sort of rustic bower, in which we meant to pass the +night. There was no absolute necessity for this, because the air of our +island was so genial and balmy that we could have slept quite well +without any shelter; but we were so little used to sleeping in the open +air, that we did not quite relish the idea of lying down without any +covering over us: besides, our bower would shelter us from the night dews +or rain, if any should happen to fall. Having strewed the floor with +leaves and dry grass, we bethought ourselves of supper. + +But it now occurred to us, for the first time, that we had no means of +making a fire. + +"Now, there's a fix!--what shall we do?" said Peterkin, while we both +turned our eyes to Jack, to whom we always looked in our difficulties. +Jack seemed not a little perplexed. + +"There are flints enough, no doubt, on the beach," said he, "but they are +of no use at all without a steel. However, we must try." So saying, he +went to the beach, and soon returned with two flints. On one of these he +placed the tinder, and endeavoured to ignite it; but it was with great +difficulty that a very small spark was struck out of the flints, and the +tinder, being a bad, hard piece, would not catch. He then tried the bit +of hoop iron, which would not strike fire at all; and after that the back +of the axe, with no better success. During all these trials Peterkin sat +with his hands in his pockets, gazing with a most melancholy visage at +our comrade, his face growing longer and more miserable at each +successive failure. + +"Oh dear!" he sighed, "I would not care a button for the cooking of our +victuals,--perhaps they don't need it,--but it's so dismal to eat one's +supper in the dark, and we have had such a capital day, that it's a pity +to finish off in this glum style. Oh, I have it!" he cried, starting up; +"the spy-glass,--the big glass at the end is a burning-glass!" + +"You forget that we have no sun," said I. + +Peterkin was silent. In his sudden recollection of the telescope he had +quite overlooked the absence of the sun. + +"Ah, boys, I've got it now!" exclaimed Jack, rising and cutting a branch +from a neighbouring bush, which be stripped of its leaves. "I recollect +seeing this done once at home. Hand me the bit of whip-cord." With the +cord and branch Jack soon formed a bow. Then he cut a piece, about three +inches long, off the end of a dead branch, which he pointed at the two +ends. Round this he passed the cord of the bow, and placed one end +against his chest, which was protected from its point by a chip of wood; +the other point he placed against the bit of tinder, and then began to +saw vigorously with the bow, just as a blacksmith does with his drill +while boring a hole in a piece of iron. In a few seconds the tinder +began to smoke; in less than a minute it caught fire; and in less than a +quarter of an hour we were drinking our lemonade and eating cocoa nuts +round a fire that would have roasted an entire sheep, while the smoke, +flames, and sparks, flew up among the broad leaves of the overhanging +palm trees, and cast a warm glow upon our leafy bower. + +That night the starry sky looked down through the gently rustling trees +upon our slumbers, and the distant roaring of the surf upon the coral +reef was our lullaby. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +Morning, and cogitations connected therewith--We luxuriate in the sea, +try our diving powers, and make enchanting excursions among the coral +groves at the bottom of the ocean--The wonders of the deep enlarged upon. + +What a joyful thing it is to awaken, on a fresh glorious morning, and +find the rising sun staring into your face with dazzling brilliancy!--to +see the birds twittering in the bushes, and to hear the murmuring of a +rill, or the soft hissing ripples as they fall upon the sea-shore! At +any time and in any place such sights and sounds are most charming, but +more especially are they so when one awakens to them, for the first time, +in a novel and romantic situation, with the soft sweet air of a tropical +climate mingling with the fresh smell of the sea, and stirring the +strange leaves that flutter overhead and around one, or ruffling the +plumage of the stranger birds that fly inquiringly around, as if to +demand what business we have to intrude uninvited on their domains. When +I awoke on the morning after the shipwreck, I found myself in this most +delightful condition; and, as I lay on my back upon my bed of leaves, +gazing up through the branches of the cocoa-nut trees into the clear blue +sky, and watched the few fleecy clouds that passed slowly across it, my +heart expanded more and more with an exulting gladness, the like of which +I had never felt before. While I meditated, my thoughts again turned to +the great and kind Creator of this beautiful world, as they had done on +the previous day, when I first beheld the sea and the coral reef, with +the mighty waves dashing over it into the calm waters of the lagoon. + +While thus meditating, I naturally bethought me of my Bible, for I had +faithfully kept the promise, which I gave at parting to my beloved +mother, that I would read it every morning; and it was with a feeling of +dismay that I remembered I had left it in the ship. I was much troubled +about this. However, I consoled myself with reflecting that I could keep +the second part of my promise to her, namely, that I should never omit to +say my prayers. So I rose quietly, lest I should disturb my companions, +who were still asleep, and stepped aside into the bushes for this +purpose. + +On my return I found them still slumbering, so I again lay down to think +over our situation. Just at that moment I was attracted by the sight of +a very small parrot, which Jack afterwards told me was called a paroquet. +It was seated on a twig that overhung Peterkin's head, and I was speedily +lost in admiration of its bright green plumage, which was mingled with +other gay colours. While I looked I observed that the bird turned its +head slowly from side to side and looked downwards, first with the one +eye, and then with the other. On glancing downwards I observed that +Peterkin's mouth was wide open, and that this remarkable bird was looking +into it. Peterkin used to say that I had not an atom of fun in my +composition, and that I never could understand a joke. In regard to the +latter, perhaps he was right; yet I think that, when they were explained +to me, I understood jokes as well as most people: but in regard to the +former he must certainly have been wrong, for this bird seemed to me to +be extremely funny; and I could not help thinking that, if it should +happen to faint, or slip its foot, and fall off the twig into Peterkin's +mouth, he would perhaps think it funny too! Suddenly the paroquet bent +down its head and uttered a loud scream in his face. This awoke him, +and, with a cry of surprise, he started up, while the foolish bird flew +precipitately away. + +"Oh you monster!" cried Peterkin, shaking his fist at the bird. Then he +yawned and rubbed his eyes, and asked what o'clock it was. + +I smiled at this question, and answered that, as our watches were at the +bottom of the sea, I could not tell, but it was a little past sunrise. + +Peterkin now began to remember where we were. As he looked up into the +bright sky, and snuffed the scented air, his eyes glistened with delight, +and he uttered a faint "hurrah!" and yawned again. Then he gazed slowly +round, till, observing the calm sea through an opening in the bushes, he +started suddenly up as if he had received an electric shock, uttered a +vehement shout, flung off his garments, and, rushing over the white +sands, plunged into the water. The cry awoke Jack, who rose on his elbow +with a look of grave surprise; but this was followed by a quiet smile of +intelligence on seeing Peterkin in the water. With an energy that he +only gave way to in moments of excitement, Jack bounded to his feet, +threw off his clothes, shook back his hair, and with a lion-like spring, +dashed over the sands and plunged into the sea with such force as quite +to envelop Peterkin in a shower of spray. Jack was a remarkably good +swimmer and diver, so that after his plunge we saw no sign of him for +nearly a minute; after which he suddenly emerged, with a cry of joy, a +good many yards out from the shore. My spirits were so much raised by +seeing all this that I, too, hastily threw off my garments and +endeavoured to imitate Jack's vigorous bound; but I was so awkward that +my foot caught on a stump, and I fell to the ground; then I slipped on a +stone while running over the mud, and nearly fell again, much to the +amusement of Peterkin, who laughed heartily, and called me a "slow +coach," while Jack cried out, "Come along, Ralph, and I'll help you." +However, when I got into the water I managed very well, for I was really +a good swimmer, and diver too. I could not, indeed, equal Jack, who was +superior to any Englishman I ever saw, but I infinitely surpassed +Peterkin, who could only swim a little, and could not dive at all. + +While Peterkin enjoyed himself in the shallow water and in running along +the beach, Jack and I swam out into the deep water, and occasionally +dived for stones. I shall never forget my surprise and delight on first +beholding the bottom of the sea. As I have before stated, the water +within the reef was as calm as a pond; and, as there was no wind, it was +quite clear, from the surface to the bottom, so that we could see down +easily even at a depth of twenty or thirty yards. When Jack and I dived +in shallower water, we expected to have found sand and stones, instead of +which we found ourselves in what appeared really to be an enchanted +garden. The whole of the bottom of the lagoon, as we called the calm +water within the reef, was covered with coral of every shape, size, and +hue. Some portions were formed like large mushrooms; others appeared +like the brain of a man, having stalks or necks attached to them; but the +most common kind was a species of branching coral, and some portions were +of a lovely pale pink colour, others pure white. Among this there grew +large quantities of sea-weed of the richest hues imaginable, and of the +most graceful forms; while innumerable fishes--blue, red, yellow, green, +and striped--sported in and out amongst the flower-beds of this submarine +garden, and did not appear to be at all afraid of our approaching them. + +On darting to the surface for breath, after our first dive, Jack and I +rose close to each other. + +"Did you ever in your life, Ralph, see anything so lovely?" said Jack, as +he flung the spray from his hair. + +"Never," I replied. "It appears to me like fairy realms. I can scarcely +believe that we are not dreaming." + +"Dreaming!" cried Jack, "do you know, Ralph, I'm half tempted to think +that we really are dreaming. But if so, I am resolved to make the most +of it, and dream another dive; so here goes,--down again, my boy!" + +We took the second dive together, and kept beside each other while under +water; and I was greatly surprised to find that we could keep down much +longer than I ever recollect having done in our own seas at home. I +believe that this was owing to the heat of the water, which was so warm +that we afterwards found we could remain in it for two and three hours at +a time without feeling any unpleasant effects such as we used to +experience in the sea at home. When Jack reached the bottom, he grasped +the coral stems, and crept along on his hands and knees, peeping under +the sea-weed and among the rocks. I observed him also pick up one or two +large oysters, and retain them in his grasp, as if he meant to take them +up with him, so I also gathered a few. Suddenly he made a grasp at a +fish with blue and yellow stripes on its back, and actually touched its +tail, but did not catch it. At this he turned towards me and attempted +to smile; but no sooner had he done so than he sprang like an arrow to +the surface, where, on following him, I found him gasping and coughing, +and spitting water from his mouth. In a few minutes he recovered, and we +both turned to swim ashore. + +"I declare, Ralph," said he, "that I actually tried to laugh under +water." + +"So I saw," I replied; "and I observed that you very nearly caught that +fish by the tail. It would have done capitally for breakfast if you +had." + +"Breakfast enough here," said he, holding up the oysters, as we landed +and ran up the beach. "Hallo! Peterkin, here you are, boy. Split open +these fellows while Ralph and I put on our clothes. They'll agree with +the cocoa nuts excellently, I have no doubt." + +Peterkin, who was already dressed, took the oysters, and opened them with +the edge of our axe, exclaiming, "Now, that _is_ capital. There's +nothing I'm so fond of." + +"Ah! that's lucky," remarked Jack. "I'll be able to keep you in good +order now, Master Peterkin. You know you can't dive any better than a +cat. So, sir, whenever you behave ill, you shall have no oysters for +breakfast." + +"I'm very glad that our prospect of breakfast is so good," said I, "for +I'm very hungry." + +"Here, then, stop your mouth with that, Ralph," said Peterkin, holding a +large oyster to my lips. I opened my mouth and swallowed it in silence, +and really it was remarkably good. + +We now set ourselves earnestly about our preparations for spending the +day. We had no difficulty with the fire this morning, as our burning- +glass was an admirable one; and while we roasted a few oysters and ate +our cocoa nuts, we held a long, animated conversation about our plans for +the future. What those plans were, and how we carried them into effect, +the reader shall see hereafter. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +An excursion into the interior, in which we make many valuable and +interesting discoveries--We get a dreadful fright--The bread-fruit +tree--Wonderful peculiarity of some of the fruit trees--Signs of former +inhabitants. + +Our first care, after breakfast, was to place the few articles we +possessed in the crevice of a rock at the farther end of a small cave +which we discovered near our encampment. This cave, we hoped, might be +useful to us afterwards as a store-house. Then we cut two large clubs +off a species of very hard tree which grew near at hand. One of these +was given to Peterkin, the other to me, and Jack armed himself with the +axe. We took these precautions because we purposed to make an excursion +to the top of the mountains of the interior, in order to obtain a better +view of our island. Of course we knew not what dangers might befall us +by the way, so thought it best to be prepared. + +Having completed our arrangements and carefully extinguished our fire, we +sallied forth and walked a short distance along the sea-beach, till we +came to the entrance of a valley, through which flowed the rivulet before +mentioned. Here we turned our backs on the sea and struck into the +interior. + +The prospect that burst upon our view on entering the valley was truly +splendid. On either side of us there was a gentle rise in the land, +which thus formed two ridges about a mile apart on each side of the +valley. These ridges,--which, as well as the low grounds between them, +were covered with trees and shrubs of the most luxuriant kind--continued +to recede inland for about two miles, when they joined the foot of a +small mountain. This hill rose rather abruptly from the head of the +valley, and was likewise entirely covered even to the top with trees, +except on one particular spot near the left shoulder, where was a bare +and rocky place of a broken and savage character. Beyond this hill we +could not see, and we therefore directed our course up the banks of the +rivulet towards the foot of it, intending to climb to the top, should +that be possible, as, indeed, we had no doubt it was. + +Jack, being the wisest and boldest among us, took the lead, carrying the +axe on his shoulder. Peterkin, with his enormous club, came second, as +he said he should like to be in a position to defend me if any danger +should threaten. I brought up the rear, but, having been more taken up +with the wonderful and curious things I saw at starting than with +thoughts of possible danger, I had very foolishly left my club behind me. +Although, as I have said the trees and bushes were very luxuriant, they +were not so thickly crowded together as to hinder our progress among +them. We were able to wind in and out, and to follow the banks of the +stream quite easily, although, it is true, the height and thickness of +the foliage prevented us from seeing far ahead. But sometimes a jutting- +out rock on the hill sides afforded us a position whence we could enjoy +the romantic view and mark our progress towards the foot of the hill. I +was particularly struck, during the walk, with the richness of the +undergrowth in most places, and recognised many berries and plants that +resembled those of my native land, especially a tall, elegantly-formed +fern, which emitted an agreeable perfume. There were several kinds of +flowers, too, but I did not see so many of these as I should have +expected in such a climate. We also saw a great variety of small birds +of bright plumage, and many paroquets similar to the one that awoke +Peterkin so rudely in the morning. + +Thus we advanced to the foot of the hill without encountering anything to +alarm us, except, indeed, once, when we were passing close under a part +of the hill which was hidden from our view by the broad leaves of the +banana trees, which grew in great luxuriance in that part. Jack was just +preparing to force his way through this thicket, when we were startled +and arrested by a strange pattering or rumbling sound, which appeared to +us quite different from any of the sounds we had heard during the +previous part of our walk. + +"Hallo!" cried Peterkin, stopping short and grasping his club with both +hands, "what's that?" + +Neither of us replied; but Jack seized his axe in his right hand, while +with the other he pushed aside the broad leaves and endeavoured to peer +amongst them. + +"I can see nothing," he said, after a short pause. + +"I think it--" + +Again the rumbling sound came, louder than before, and we all sprang back +and stood on the defensive. For myself, having forgotten my club, and +not having taken the precaution to cut another, I buttoned my jacket, +doubled my fists, and threw myself into a boxing attitude. I must say, +however, that I felt somewhat uneasy; and my companions afterwards +confessed that their thoughts at this moment had been instantly filled +with all they had ever heard or read of wild beasts and savages, +torturings at the stake, roastings alive, and such like horrible things. +Suddenly the pattering noise increased with tenfold violence. It was +followed by a fearful crash among the bushes, which was rapidly repeated, +as if some gigantic animal were bounding towards us. In another moment +an enormous rock came crashing through the shrubbery, followed by a cloud +of dust and small stones, flew close past the spot where we stood, +carrying bushes and young trees along with it. + +"Pooh! is that all?" exclaimed Peterkin, wiping the perspiration off his +forehead. "Why, I thought it was all the wild men and beasts in the +South Sea Islands galloping on in one grand charge to sweep us off the +face of the earth, instead of a mere stone tumbling down the mountain +side." + +"Nevertheless," remarked Jack, "if that same stone had hit any of us, it +would have rendered the charge you speak of quite unnecessary, Peterkin." + +This was true, and I felt very thankful for our escape. On examining the +spot more narrowly, we found that it lay close to the foot of a very +rugged precipice, from which stones of various sizes were always tumbling +at intervals. Indeed, the numerous fragments lying scattered all around +might have suggested the cause of the sound, had we not been too suddenly +alarmed to think of anything. + +We now resumed our journey, resolving that, in our future excursions into +the interior, we would be careful to avoid this dangerous precipice. + +Soon afterwards we arrived at the foot of the hill and prepared to ascend +it. Here Jack made a discovery which caused us all very great joy. This +was a tree of a remarkably beautiful appearance, which Jack confidently +declared to be the celebrated bread-fruit tree. + +"Is it celebrated?" inquired Peterkin, with a look of great simplicity. + +"It is," replied Jack + +"That's odd, now," rejoined Peterkin; "never heard of it before." + +"Then it's not so celebrated as I thought it was," returned Jack, quietly +squeezing Peterkin's hat over his eyes; "but listen, you ignorant boobie! +and hear of it now." + +Peterkin re-adjusted his hat, and was soon listening with as much +interest as myself, while Jack told us that this tree is one of the most +valuable in the islands of the south; that it bears two, sometimes three, +crops of fruit in the year; that the fruit is very like wheaten bread in +appearance, and that it constitutes the principal food of many of the +islanders. + +"So," said Peterkin, "we seem to have everything ready prepared to our +hands in this wonderful island,--lemonade ready bottled in nuts, and loaf- +bread growing on the trees!" + +Peterkin, as usual, was jesting; nevertheless, it is a curious fact that +he spoke almost the literal truth. "Moreover," continued Jack, "the +bread-fruit tree affords a capital gum, which serves the natives for +pitching their canoes; the bark of the young branches is made by them +into cloth; and of the wood, which is durable and of a good colour, they +build their houses. So you see, lads, that we have no lack of material +here to make us comfortable, if we are only clever enough to use it." + +"But are you sure that that's it?" asked Peterkin. + +"Quite sure," replied Jack; "for I was particularly interested in the +account I once read of it, and I remember the description well. I am +sorry, however, that I have forgotten the descriptions of many other +trees which I am sure we have seen to-day, if we could but recognise +them. So you see, Peterkin, I'm not up to everything yet." + +"Never mind, Jack," said Peterkin, with a grave, patronizing expression +of countenance, patting his tall companion on the shoulder,--"never mind, +Jack; you know a good deal for your age. You're a clever boy, sir,--a +promising young man; and if you only go on as you have begun, sir, you +will--" + +The end of this speech was suddenly cut short by Jack tripping up +Peterkin's heels and tumbling him into a mass of thick shrubs, where, +finding himself comfortable, he lay still basking in the sunshine, while +Jack and I examined the bread-tree. + +We were much struck with the deep, rich green colour of its broad leaves, +which were twelve or eighteen inches long, deeply indented, and of a +glossy smoothness, like the laurel. The fruit, with which it was loaded, +was nearly round, and appeared to be about six inches in diameter, with a +rough rind, marked with lozenge-shaped divisions. It was of various +colours, from light pea-green to brown and rich yellow. Jack said that +the yellow was the ripe fruit. We afterwards found that most of the +fruit-trees on the island were evergreens, and that we might, when we +wished, pluck the blossom and the ripe fruit from the same tree. Such a +wonderful difference from the trees of our own country surprised us not a +little. The bark of the tree was rough and light-coloured; the trunk was +about two feet in diameter, and it appeared to be twenty feet high, being +quite destitute of branches up to that height, where it branched off into +a beautiful and umbrageous head. We noticed that the fruit hung in +clusters of twos and threes on the branches; but as we were anxious to +get to the top of the hill, we refrained from attempting to pluck any at +that time. + +Our hearts were now very much cheered by our good fortune, and it was +with light and active steps that we clambered up the steep sides of the +hill. On reaching the summit, a new, and if possible a grander, prospect +met our gaze. We found that this was not the highest part of the island, +but that another hill lay beyond, with a wide valley between it and the +one on which we stood. This valley, like the first, was also full of +rich trees, some dark and some light green, some heavy and thick in +foliage, and others light, feathery, and graceful, while the beautiful +blossoms on many of them threw a sort of rainbow tint over all, and gave +to the valley the appearance of a garden of flowers. Among these we +recognised many of the bread-fruit trees, laden with yellow fruit, and +also a great many cocoa-nut palms. After gazing our fill we pushed down +the hill side, crossed the valley, and soon began to ascend the second +mountain. It was clothed with trees nearly to the top, but the summit +was bare, and in some places broken. + +While on our way up we came to an object which filled us with much +interest. This was the stump of a tree that had evidently been cut down +with an axe! So, then, we were not the first who had viewed this +beautiful isle. The hand of man had been at work there before us. It +now began to recur to us again that perhaps the island was inhabited, +although we had not seen any traces of man until now; but a second glance +at the stump convinced us that we had not more reason to think so now +than formerly; for the surface of the wood was quite decayed, and partly +covered with fungus and green matter, so that it must have been cut many +years ago. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "some ship or other has touched here long ago +for wood, and only taken one tree." + +We did not think this likely, however, because, in such circumstances, +the crew of a ship would cut wood of small size, and near the shore, +whereas this was a large tree and stood near the top of the mountain. In +fact it was the highest large tree on the mountain, all above it being +wood of very recent growth. + +"I can't understand it," said Jack, scratching the surface of the stump +with his axe. "I can only suppose that the savages have been here and +cut it for some purpose known only to themselves. But, hallo! what have +we here?" + +As he spoke, Jack began carefully to scrape away the moss and fungus from +the stump, and soon laid bare three distinct traces of marks, as if some +inscription or initials had been cut thereon. But although the traces +were distinct, beyond all doubt, the exact form of the letters could not +be made out. Jack thought they looked like J. S. but we could not be +certain. They had apparently been carelessly cut, and long exposure to +the weather had so broken them up that we could not make out what they +were. We were exceedingly perplexed at this discovery, and stayed a long +time at the place conjecturing what these marks could have been, but +without avail; so, as the day was advancing, we left it and quickly +reached the top of the mountain. + +We found this to be the highest point of the island, and from it we saw +our kingdom lying, as it were, like a map around us. As I have always +thought it impossible to get a thing properly into one's understanding +without comprehending it, I shall beg the reader's patience for a little +while I describe our island, thus, shortly:-- + +It consisted of two mountains; the one we guessed at 500 feet; the other, +on which we stood, at 1000. Between these lay a rich, beautiful valley, +as already said. This valley crossed the island from one end to the +other, being high in the middle and sloping on each side towards the sea. +The large mountain sloped, on the side farthest from where we had been +wrecked, gradually towards the sea; but although, when viewed at a +glance, it had thus a regular sloping appearance, a more careful +observation showed that it was broken up into a multitude of very small +vales, or rather dells and glens, intermingled with little rugged spots +and small but abrupt precipices here and there, with rivulets tumbling +over their edges and wandering down the slopes in little white streams, +sometimes glistening among the broad leaves of the bread-fruit and cocoa- +nut trees, or hid altogether beneath the rich underwood. At the base of +this mountain lay a narrow bright green plain or meadow, which terminated +abruptly at the shore. On the other side of the island, whence we had +come, stood the smaller hill, at the foot of which diverged three +valleys; one being that which we had ascended, with a smaller vale on +each side of it, and separated from it by the two ridges before +mentioned. In these smaller valleys there were no streams, but they were +clothed with the same luxuriant vegetation. + +The diameter of the island seemed to be about ten miles, and, as it was +almost circular in form, its circumference must have been thirty +miles;--perhaps a little more, if allowance be made for the numerous bays +and indentations of the shore. The entire island was belted by a beach +of pure white sand, on which laved the gentle ripples of the lagoon. We +now also observed that the coral reef completely encircled the island; +but it varied its distance from it here and there, in some places being a +mile from the beach, in others, a few hundred yards, but the average +distance was half a mile. The reef lay very low, and the spray of the +surf broke quite over it in many places. This surf never ceased its +roar, for, however calm the weather might be, there is always a gentle +swaying motion in the great Pacific, which, although scarce noticeable +out at sea, reaches the shore at last in a huge billow. The water within +the lagoon, as before said, was perfectly still. There were three narrow +openings in the reef; one opposite each end of the valley which I have +described as crossing the island; the other opposite our own valley, +which we afterwards named the Valley of the Wreck. At each of these +openings the reef rose into two small green islets, covered with bushes +and having one or two cocoa-nut palms on each. These islets were very +singular, and appeared as if planted expressly for the purpose of marking +the channel into the lagoon. Our captain was making for one of these +openings the day we were wrecked, and would have reached it too, I doubt +not, had not the rudder been torn away. Within the lagoon were several +pretty, low coral islands, just opposite our encampment; and, immediately +beyond these, out at sea, lay about a dozen other islands, at various +distances, from half a mile to ten miles; all of them, as far as we could +discern, smaller than ours and apparently uninhabited. They seemed to be +low coral islands, raised but little above the sea, yet covered with +cocoa-nut trees. + +All this we noted, and a great deal more, while we sat on the top of the +mountain. After we had satisfied ourselves we prepared to return; but +here again we discovered traces of the presence of man. These were a +pole or staff and one or two pieces of wood which had been squared with +an axe. All of these were, however, very much decayed, and they had +evidently not been touched for many years. + +Full of these discoveries we returned to our encampment. On the way we +fell in with the traces of some four-footed animal, but whether old or of +recent date none of us were able to guess. This also tended to raise our +hopes of obtaining some animal food on the island, so we reached home in +good spirits, quite prepared for supper, and highly satisfied with our +excursion. + +After much discussion, in which Peterkin took the lead, we came to the +conclusion that the island was uninhabited, and went to bed. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +Jack's ingenuity--We get into difficulties about fishing, and get out of +them by a method which gives us a cold bath--Horrible encounter with a +shark. + +For several days after the excursion related in the last chapter we did +not wander far from our encampment, but gave ourselves up to forming +plans for the future and making our present abode comfortable. + +There were various causes that induced this state of comparative +inaction. In the first place, although everything around us was so +delightful, and we could without difficulty obtain all that we required +for our bodily comfort, we did not quite like the idea of settling down +here for the rest of our lives, far away from our friends and our native +land. To set energetically about preparations for a permanent residence +seemed so like making up our minds to saying adieu to home and friends +for ever, that we tacitly shrank from it and put off our preparations, +for one reason and another, as long as we could. Then there was a little +uncertainty still as to there being natives on the island, and we +entertained a kind of faint hope that a ship might come and take us off. +But as day after day passed, and neither savages nor ships appeared, we +gave up all hope of an early deliverance and set diligently to work at +our homestead. + +During this time, however, we had not been altogether idle. We made +several experiments in cooking the cocoa-nut, most of which did not +improve it. Then we removed our goods, and took up our abode in the +cave, but found the change so bad that we returned gladly to the bower. +Besides this we bathed very frequently, and talked a great deal; at least +Jack and Peterkin did,--I listened. Among other useful things, Jack, who +was ever the most active and diligent, converted about three inches of +the hoop-iron into an excellent knife. First he beat it quite flat with +the axe. Then he made a rude handle, and tied the hoop-iron to it with +our piece of whip-cord, and ground it to an edge on a piece of +sand-stone. When it was finished he used it to shape a better handle, to +which he fixed it with a strip of his cotton handkerchief;--in which +operation he had, as Peterkin pointed out, torn off one of Lord Nelson's +noses. However, the whip-cord, thus set free, was used by Peterkin as a +fishing line. He merely tied a piece of oyster to the end of it. This +the fish were allowed to swallow, and then they were pulled quickly +ashore. But as the line was very short and we had no boat, the fish we +caught were exceedingly small. + +One day Peterkin came up from the beach, where he had been angling, and +said in a very cross tone, "I'll tell you what, Jack, I'm not going to be +humbugged with catching such contemptible things any longer. I want you +to swim out with me on your back, and let me fish in deep water!" + +"Dear me, Peterkin," replied Jack, "I had no idea you were taking the +thing so much to heart, else I would have got you out of that difficulty +long ago. Let me see,"--and Jack looked down at a piece of timber on +which he had been labouring, with a peculiar gaze of abstraction, which +he always assumed when trying to invent or discover anything. + +"What say you to building a boat?" he inquired, looking up hastily. + +"Take far too long," was the reply; "can't be bothered waiting. I want +to begin at once!" + +Again Jack considered. "I have it!" he cried. "We'll fell a large tree +and launch the trunk of it in the water, so that when you want to fish +you've nothing to do but to swim out to it." + +"Would not a small raft do better?" said I. + +"Much better; but we have no ropes to bind it together with. Perhaps we +may find something hereafter that will do as well, but, in the meantime, +let us try the tree." + +This was agreed on, so we started off to a spot not far distant, where we +knew of a tree that would suit us, which grew near the water's edge. As +soon as we reached it Jack threw off his coat, and, wielding the axe with +his sturdy arms, hacked and hewed at it for a quarter of an hour without +stopping. Then he paused, and, while he sat down to rest, I continued +the work. Then Peterkin made a vigorous attack on it, so that when Jack +renewed his powerful blows, a few minutes cutting brought it down with a +terrible crash. + +"Hurrah! now for it," cried Jack; "let us off with its head." + +So saying he began to cut through the stem again, at about six yards from +the thick end. This done, he cut three strong, short poles or levers +from the stout branches, with which to roll the log down the beach into +the sea; for, as it was nearly two feet thick at the large end, we could +not move it without such helps. With the levers, however, we rolled it +slowly into the sea. + +Having been thus successful in launching our vessel, we next shaped the +levers into rude oars or paddles, and then attempted to embark. This was +easy enough to do; but, after seating ourselves astride the log, it was +with the utmost difficulty we kept it from rolling round and plunging us +into the water. Not that we minded that much; but we preferred, if +possible, to fish in dry clothes. To be sure, our trousers were +necessarily wet, as our legs were dangling in the water on each side of +the log; but, as they could be easily dried, we did not care. After half +an hour's practice, we became expert enough to keep our balance pretty +steadily. Then Peterkin laid down his paddle, and having baited his line +with a whole oyster, dropt it into deep water. + +"Now, then, Jack," said he, "be cautious; steer clear o' that sea-weed. +There; that's it; gently, now, gently. I see a fellow at least a foot +long down there, coming to--ha! that's it! Oh! bother, he's off." + +"Did he bite?" said Jack, urging the log onwards a little with his +paddle. + +"Bite? ay! He took it into his mouth, but the moment I began to haul he +opened his jaws and let it out again." + +"Let him swallow it next time," said Jack, laughing at the melancholy +expression of Peterkin's visage. + +"There he's again," cried Peterkin, his eyes flashing with excitement. +"Look out! Now then! No! Yes! No! Why, the brute _won't_ swallow +it!" + +"Try to haul him up by the mouth, then," cried Jack. "Do it gently." + +A heavy sigh and a look of blank despair showed that poor Peterkin had +tried and failed again. + +"Never mind, lad," said Jack, in a voice of sympathy; "we'll move on, and +offer it to some other fish." So saying, Jack plied his paddle; but +scarcely had he moved from the spot, when a fish with an enormous head +and a little body darted from under a rock and swallowed the bait at +once. + +"Got him this time,--that's a fact!" cried Peterkin, hauling in the line. +"He's swallowed the bait right down to his tail, I declare. Oh what a +thumper!" + +As the fish came struggling to the surface, we leaned forward to see it, +and overbalanced the log. Peterkin threw his arms round the fish's neck; +and, in another instant, we were all floundering in the water! + +A shout of laughter burst from us as we rose to the surface like three +drowned rats, and seized hold of the log. We soon recovered our +position, and sat more warily, while Peterkin secured the fish, which had +well-nigh escaped in the midst of our struggles. It was little worth +having, however; but, as Peterkin remarked, it was better than the smouts +he had been catching for the last two or three days; so we laid it on the +log before us, and having re-baited the line, dropt it in again for +another. + +Now, while we were thus intent upon our sport, our attention was suddenly +attracted by a ripple on the sea, just a few yards away from us. Peterkin +shouted to us to paddle in that direction, as he thought it was a big +fish, and we might have a chance of catching it. But Jack, instead of +complying, said, in a deep, earnest tone of voice, which I never before +heard him use,-- + +"Haul up your line, Peterkin; seize your paddle; quick,--it's a shark!" + +The horror with which we heard this may well be imagined, for it must be +remembered that our legs were hanging down in the water, and we could not +venture to pull them up without upsetting the log. Peterkin instantly +hauled up the line; and, grasping his paddle, exerted himself to the +utmost, while we also did our best to make for shore. But we were a good +way off, and the log being, as I have before said, very heavy, moved but +slowly through the water. We now saw the shark quite distinctly swimming +round and round us, its sharp fin every now and then protruding above the +water. From its active and unsteady motions, Jack knew it was making up +its mind to attack us, so he urged us vehemently to paddle for our lives, +while he himself set us the example. Suddenly he shouted "Look +out!--there he comes!" and in a second we saw the monstrous fish dive +close under us, and turn half over on his side. But we all made a great +commotion with our paddles, which no doubt frightened it away for that +time, as we saw it immediately after circling round us as before. + +"Throw the fish to him," cried Jack, in a quick, suppressed voice; "we'll +make the shore in time yet if we can keep him off for a few minutes." + +Peterkin stopped one instant to obey the command, and then plied his +paddle again with all his might. No sooner had the fish fallen on the +water than we observed the shark to sink. In another second we saw its +white breast rising; for sharks always turn over on their sides when +about to seize their prey, their mouths being not at the point of their +heads like those of other fish, but, as it were, under their chins. In +another moment his snout rose above the water,--his wide jaws, armed with +a terrific double row of teeth, appeared. The dead fish was engulfed, +and the shark sank out of sight. But Jack was mistaken in supposing that +it would be satisfied. In a very few minutes it returned to us, and its +quick motions led us to fear that it would attack us at once. + +"Stop paddling," cried Jack suddenly. "I see it coming up behind us. +Now, obey my orders quickly. Our lives may depend on it Ralph. Peterkin, +do your best to _balance the log_. Don't look out for the shark. Don't +glance behind you. Do nothing but balance the log." + +{A dreadful adventure: p77.jpg} + +Peterkin and I instantly did as we were ordered, being only too glad to +do anything that afforded us a chance or a hope of escape, for we had +implicit confidence in Jack's courage and wisdom. For a few seconds, +that seemed long minutes to my mind, we sat thus silently; but I could +not resist glancing backward, despite the orders to the contrary. On +doing so, I saw Jack sitting rigid like a statue, with his paddle raised, +his lips compressed, and his eye-brows bent over his eyes, which glared +savagely from beneath them down into the water. I also saw the shark, to +my horror, quite close under the log, in the act of darting towards +Jack's foot. I could scarce suppress a cry on beholding this. In +another moment the shark rose. Jack drew his leg suddenly from the +water, and threw it over the log. The monster's snout rubbed against the +log as it passed, and revealed its hideous jaws, into which Jack +instantly plunged the paddle, and thrust it down its throat. So violent +was the act that Jack rose to his feet in performing it; the log was +thereby rolled completely over, and we were once more plunged into the +water. We all rose, spluttering and gasping, in a moment. + +"Now then, strike out for shore," cried Jack. "Here, Peterkin, catch +hold of my collar, and kick out with a will." + +Peterkin did as he was desired, and Jack struck out with such force that +he cut through the water like a boat; while I, being free from all +encumbrance, succeeded in keeping up with him. As we had by this time +drawn pretty near to the shore, a few minutes more sufficed to carry us +into shallow water; and, finally, we landed in safety, though very much +exhausted, and not a little frightened by our terrible adventure. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +The beauties of the bottom of the sea tempt Peterkin to dive--How he did +it--More difficulties overcome--The water garden--Curious creatures of +the sea--The tank--Candles missed very much, and the candle-nut tree +discovered--Wonderful account of Peterkin's first voyage--Cloth found +growing on a tree--A plan projected, and arms prepared for offence and +defence--A dreadful cry. + +Our encounter with the shark was the first great danger that had befallen +us since landing on this island, and we felt very seriously affected by +it, especially when we considered that we had so often unwittingly +incurred the same danger before while bathing. We were now forced to +take to fishing again in the shallow water, until we should succeed in +constructing a raft. What troubled us most, however, was, that we were +compelled to forego our morning swimming excursions. We did, indeed, +continue to enjoy our bathe in the shallow water, but Jack and I found +that one great source of our enjoyment was gone, when we could no longer +dive down among the beautiful coral groves at the bottom of the lagoon. +We had come to be so fond of this exercise, and to take such an interest +in watching the formations of coral and the gambols of the many beautiful +fish amongst the forests of red and green sea-weeds, that we had become +quite familiar with the appearance of the fish and the localities that +they chiefly haunted. We had also become expert divers. But we made it +a rule never to stay long under water at a time. Jack told me that to do +so often was bad for the lungs, and, instead of affording us enjoyment, +would ere long do us a serious injury. So we never stayed at the bottom +as long as we might have done, but came up frequently to the top for +fresh air, and dived down again immediately. Sometimes, when Jack +happened to be in a humorous frame, he would seat himself at the bottom +of the sea on one of the brain corals, as if he were seated on a large +paddock-stool, and then make faces at me, in order, if possible, to make +me laugh under water. At first, when he took me unawares, he nearly +succeeded, and I had to shoot to the surface in order to laugh; but +afterwards I became aware of his intentions, and, being naturally of a +grave disposition, I had no difficulty in restraining myself. I used +often to wonder how poor Peterkin would have liked to be with us; and he +sometimes expressed much regret at being unable to join us. I used to do +my best to gratify him, poor fellow, by relating all the wonders that we +saw; but this, instead of satisfying, seemed only to whet his curiosity +the more, so one day we prevailed on him to try to go down with us. But, +although a brave boy in every other way, Peterkin was very nervous in the +water, and it was with difficulty we got him to consent to be taken down, +for he could never have managed to push himself down to the bottom +without assistance. But no sooner had we pulled him down a yard or so +into the deep clear water, than he began to struggle and kick violently, +so we were forced to let him go, when he rose out of the water like a +cork, gave a loud gasp and a frightful roar, and struck out for the land +with the utmost possible haste. + +Now, all this pleasure we were to forego, and when we thought thereon, +Jack and I felt very much depressed in our spirits. I could see, also, +that Peterkin grieved and sympathized with us, for, when talking about +this matter, he refrained from jesting and bantering us upon it. + +As, however, a man's difficulties usually set him upon devising methods +to overcome them, whereby he often discovers better things than those he +may have lost, so this our difficulty induced us to think of searching +for a large pool among the rocks, where the water should be deep enough +for diving yet so surrounded by rocks as to prevent sharks from getting +at us. And such a pool we afterwards found, which proved to be very much +better than our most sanguine hopes anticipated. It was situated not +more than ten minutes' walk from our camp, and was in the form of a small +deep bay or basin, the entrance to which, besides being narrow, was so +shallow that no fish so large as a shark could get in, at least not +unless he should be a remarkably thin one. + +Inside of this basin, which we called our Water Garden, the coral +formations were much more wonderful, and the sea-weed plants far more +lovely and vividly coloured, than in the lagoon itself. And the water +was so clear and still, that, although very deep, you could see the +minutest object at the bottom. Besides this, there was a ledge of rock +which overhung the basin at its deepest part, from which we could dive +pleasantly and whereon Peterkin could sit and see not only all the +wonders I had described to him, but also see Jack and me creeping amongst +the marine shrubbery at the bottom, like, as--he expressed it,--"two +great white sea-monsters." During these excursions of ours to the bottom +of the sea, we began to get an insight into the manners and customs of +its inhabitants, and to make discoveries of wonderful things, the like of +which we never before conceived. Among other things, we were deeply +interested with the operations of the little coral insect which, I was +informed by Jack, is supposed to have entirely constructed many of the +numerous islands in Pacific Ocean. And, certainly, when we considered +the great reef which these insects had formed round the island on which +we were cast, and observed their ceaseless activity in building their +myriad cells, it did at first seem as if this might be true; but then, +again, when I looked at the mountains of the island, and reflected that +there were thousands of such, many of them much higher, in the South +Seas, I doubted that there must be some mistake here. But more of this +hereafter. + +I also became much taken up with the manners and appearance of the +anemones, and star-fish, and crabs, and sea-urchins, and such-like +creatures; and was not content with watching those I saw during my dives +in the Water Garden, but I must needs scoop out a hole in the coral rock +close to it, which I filled with salt water, and stocked with sundry +specimens of anemones and shell-fish, in order to watch more closely how +they were in the habit of passing their time. Our burning-glass also now +became a great treasure to me, as it enabled me to magnify, and so to +perceive more clearly the forms and actions of these curious creatures of +the deep. + +Having now got ourselves into a very comfortable condition, we began to +talk of a project which we had long had in contemplation,--namely, to +travel entirely round the island; in order, first, to ascertain whether +it contained any other productions which might be useful to us; and, +second, to see whether there might be any place more convenient and +suitable for our permanent residence than that on which we were now +encamped. Not that we were in any degree dissatisfied with it; on the +contrary, we entertained quite a home-feeling to our bower and its +neighbourhood; but if a better place did exist, there was no reason why +we should not make use of it. At any rate, it would be well to know of +its existence. + +We had much earnest talk over this matter. But Jack proposed that, +before undertaking such an excursion, we should supply ourselves with +good defensive arms, for, as we intended not only to go round all the +shore, but to ascend most of the valleys, before returning home, we +should be likely to meet in with, he would not say dangers, but, at +least, with everything that existed on the island, whatever that might +be. + +"Besides," said Jack, "it won't do for us to live on cocoa-nuts and +oysters always. No doubt they are very excellent in their way, but I +think a little animal food, now and then, would be agreeable as well as +good for us; and as there are many small birds among the trees, some of +which are probably very good to eat, I think it would be a capital plan +to make bows and arrows, with which we could easily knock them over." + +"First rate!" cried Peterkin. "You will make the bows, Jack, and I'll +try my hand at the arrows. The fact is, I'm quite tired of throwing +stones at the birds. I began the very day we landed, I think, and have +persevered up to the present time, but I've never hit anything yet." + +"You forget," said I, "you hit me one day on the shin." + +"Ah, true," replied Peterkin, "and a precious shindy you kicked up in +consequence. But you were at least four yards away from the impudent +paroquet I aimed at; so you see what a horribly bad shot I am." + +"But," said I, "Jack, you cannot make three bows and arrows before to- +morrow, and would it not be a pity to waste time, now that we have made +up our minds to go on this expedition? Suppose that you make one bow and +arrow for yourself, and we can take our clubs?" + +"That's true, Ralph. The day is pretty far advanced, and I doubt if I +can make even one bow before dark. To be sure I might work by +fire-light, after the sun goes down." + +We had, up to this time, been in the habit of going to bed with the sun, +as we had no pressing call to work o' nights; and, indeed, our work +during the day was usually hard enough,--what between fishing, and +improving our bower, and diving in the Water Garden, and rambling in the +woods; so that, when night came, we were usually very glad to retire to +our beds. But now that we had a desire to work at night, we felt a wish +for candles. + +"Won't a good blazing fire give you light enough?" inquired Peterkin. + +"Yes," replied Jack, "quite enough; but then it will give us a great deal +more than enough of heat in this warm climate of ours." + +"True," said Peterkin; "I forgot that. It would roast us." + +"Well, as you're always doing that at any rate," remarked Jack, "we could +scarcely call it a change. But the fact is, I've been thinking over this +subject before. There is a certain nut growing in these islands which is +called the candle-nut, because the natives use it instead of candles, and +I know all about it, and how to prepare it for burning--" + +"Then why don't you do it?" interrupted Peterkin. "Why have you kept us +in the dark so long, you vile philosopher?" + +"Because," said Jack, "I have not seen the tree yet, and I'm not sure +that I should know either the tree or the nuts if I did see them. You +see, I forget the description." + +"Ah! that's just the way with me," said Peterkin with a deep sigh. "I +never could keep in my mind for half an hour the few descriptions I ever +attempted to remember. The very first voyage I ever made was caused by +my mistaking a description, or forgetting it, which is the same thing. +And a horrible voyage it was. I had to fight with the captain the whole +way out, and made the homeward voyage by swimming!" + +"Come, Peterkin," said I, "you can't get even _me_ to believe that." + +"Perhaps not, but it's true, notwithstanding," returned Peterkin, +pretending to be hurt at my doubting his word. + +"Let us hear how it happened," said Jack, while a good-natured smile +overspread his face. + +"Well, you must know," began Peterkin, "that the very day before I went +to sea, I was greatly taken up with a game at hockey, which I was playing +with my old school-fellows for the last time before leaving them. You +see I was young then, Ralph." Peterkin gazed, in an abstracted and +melancholy manner, out to sea! "Well, in the midst of the game, my +uncle, who had taken all the bother and trouble of getting me bound +'prentice and rigged out, came and took me aside, and told me that he was +called suddenly away from home, and would not be able to see me aboard, +as he had intended. 'However,' said he, 'the captain knows you are +coming, so that's not of much consequence; but as you'll have to find the +ship yourself, you must remember her name and description. D'ye hear, +boy?' I certainly did hear, but I'm afraid I did not understand, for my +mind was so taken up with the game, which I saw my side was losing, that +I began to grow impatient, and the moment my uncle finished his +description of the ship, and bade me good-bye, I bolted back to my game, +with only a confused idea of three masts, and a green painted tafferel, +and a gilt figure-head of Hercules with his club at the bow. Next day I +was so much cast down with everybody saying good-bye, and a lot o' my +female friends cryin' horribly over me, that I did not start for the +harbour, where the ship was lying among a thousand others, till it was +almost too late. So I had to run the whole way. When I reached the +pier, there were so many masts, and so much confusion, that I felt quite +humblebumbled in my faculties. 'Now,' said I to myself, 'Peterkin, +you're in a fix.' Then I fancied I saw a gilt figure-head and three +masts, belonging to a ship just about to start; so I darted on board, but +speedily jumped on shore again, when I found that two of the masts +belonged to another vessel, and the figurehead to a third! At last I +caught sight of what I made sure was it,--a fine large vessel just +casting off her moorings. The tafferel was green. Three masts,--yes, +that must be it,--and the gilt figure-head of Hercules. To be sure it +had a three-pronged pitchfork in its hand instead of a club; but that +might be my uncle's mistake; or perhaps Hercules sometimes varied his +weapons. 'Cast off!' roared a voice from the quarter-deck. 'Hold on!' +cried I, rushing frantically through the crowd. 'Hold on! hold on!' +repeated some of the bystanders, while the men at the ropes delayed for a +minute. This threw the captain into a frightful rage; for some of his +friends had come down to see him off, and having his orders contradicted +so flatly was too much for him. However, the delay was sufficient. I +took a race and a good leap; the ropes were cast off; the steam-tug gave +a puff, and we started. Suddenly the captain was up to me: 'Where did +you come from, you scamp, and what do you want here?' + +"'Please, sir,' said I, touching my cap, 'I'm you're new 'prentice come +aboard.' + +"'New 'Prentice,' said he, stamping, 'I've got no new 'prentice. My boys +are all aboard already. This is a trick, you young blackguard. You've +run away, you have;' and the captain stamped about the deck and swore +dreadfully; for, you see, the thought of having to stop the ship and +lower a boat and lose half an hour, all for the slake of sending a small +boy ashore, seemed to make him very angry. Besides, it was blowin' fresh +outside the harbour, so that, to have let the steamer alongside to put me +into it was no easy job. Just as we were passing the pier-head, where +several boats were rowing into harbour, the captain came up to me,-- + +"'You've run away, you blackguard,' he said, giving me a box on the ear. + +"'No I haven't,' said I, angrily; for the box was by no means a light +one. + +"Hark'ee, boy, can you swim?' + +"'Yes,' said I. + +"'Then do it,' and, seizing me by my trousers and the nape of my neck, he +tossed me over the side into the sea. The fellows in the boats at the +end of the pier, backed their oars on seeing this; but observing that I +could swim, they allowed me to make the best of my way to the pier-head. +So, you see, Ralph, that I really did swim my first homeward voyage." + +Jack laughed and patted Peterkin on the shoulder. "But tell us about the +candle-nut tree," said I; "you were talking about it." + +"Very true," said Jack, "but I fear I can remember little about it. I +believe the nut is about the size of a walnut; and I think that the +leaves are white, but I am not sure." + +"Eh! ha! hum!" exclaimed Peterkin, "I saw a tree answering to that +description this very day." + +"Did you?" cried Jack. "Is it far from this?" + +"No, not half a mile." + +"Then lead me to it," said Jack, seizing his axe. + +In a few minutes we were all three pushing through the underwood of the +forest, headed by Peterkin. + +We soon came to the tree in question, which, after Jack had closely +examined it, we concluded must be the candle-nut tree. Its leaves were +of a beautiful silvery white, and formed a fine contrast to the +dark-green foliage of the surrounding trees. We immediately filled our +pockets with the nuts, after which Jack said,-- + +"Now, Peterkin, climb that cocoa-nut tree and cut me one of the long +branches." + +This was soon done, but it cost some trouble, for the stem was very high, +and as Peterkin usually pulled nuts from the younger trees, he was not +much accustomed to climbing the high ones. The leaf or branch was a very +large one, and we were surprised at its size and strength. Viewed from a +little distance, the cocoa-nut tree seems to be a tall, straight stem, +without a single branch except at the top, where there is a tuft of +feathery-looking leaves, that seem to wave like soft plumes in the wind. +But when we saw one of these leaves or branches at our feet, we found it +to be a strong stalk, about fifteen feet long, with a number of narrow, +pointed leaflets ranged alternately on each side. But what seemed to us +the most wonderful thing about it was a curious substance resembling +cloth, which was wrapped round the thick end of the stalk, where it had +been cut from the tree. Peterkin told us that he had the greatest +difficulty in separating the branch from the stem, on account of this +substance, as it was wrapped quite round the tree, and, he observed, +round all the other branches, thus forming a strong support to the large +leaves while exposed to high winds. When I call this substance cloth I +do not exaggerate. Indeed, with regard to all the things I saw during my +eventful career in the South Seas, I have been exceedingly careful not to +exaggerate, or in any way to mislead or deceive my readers. This cloth, +I say, was remarkably like to coarse brown cotton cloth. It had a seam +or fibre down the centre of it, from which diverged other fibres, about +the size of a bristle. There were two layers of these fibres, very long +and tough, the one layer crossing the other obliquely, and the whole was +cemented together with a still finer fibrous and adhesive substance. When +we regarded it attentively, we could with difficulty believe that it had +not been woven by human hands. This remarkable piece of cloth we +stripped carefully off, and found it to be above two feet long, by a foot +broad, and we carried it home with us as a great prize. + +Jack now took one of the leaflets, and, cutting out the central spine or +stalk, hurried back with it to our camp. Having made a small fire, he +baked the nuts slightly, and then pealed off the husks. After this he +wished to bore a hole in them, which, not having anything better at hand +at the time, he did with the point of our useless pencil-case. Then he +strung them on the cocoa-nut spine, and on putting a light to the topmost +nut, we found to our joy that it burned with a clear, beautiful flame; +upon seeing which, Peterkin sprang up and danced round the fire for at +least five minutes in the excess of his satisfaction. + +"Now lads," said Jack, extinguishing our candle, the sun will set in an +hour, so we have no time to lose. "I shall go and cut a young tree to +make my bow out of, and you had better each of you go and select good +strong sticks for clubs, and we'll set to work at them after dark." + +So saying he shouldered his axe and went off, followed by Peterkin, while +I took up the piece of newly discovered cloth, and fell to examining its +structure. So engrossed was I in this that I was still sitting in the +same attitude and occupation when my companions returned. + +"I told you so!" cried Peterkin, with a loud laugh. "Oh, Ralph, you're +incorrigible. See, there's a club for you. I was sure, when we left you +looking at that bit of stuff, that we would find you poring over it when +we came back, so I just cut a club for you as well as for myself." + +"Thank you, Peterkin," said I. "It was kind of you to do that, instead +of scolding me for a lazy fellow, as I confess I deserve." + +"Oh! as to that," returned Peterkin, "I'll blow you up yet, if you wish +it--only it would be of no use if I did, for you're a perfect mule!" + +As it was now getting dark we lighted our candle, and placing it in a +holder made of two crossing branches, inside of our bower, we seated +ourselves on our leafy beds and began to work. + +"I intend to appropriate the bow for my own use," said Jack, chipping the +piece of wood he had brought with his axe. "I used to be a pretty fair +shot once. But what's that you're doing?" he added, looking at Peterkin, +who had drawn the end of a long pole into the tent, and was endeavouring +to fit a small piece of the hoop-iron to the end of it. + +"I'm going to enlist into the Lancers," answered Peterkin. "You see, +Jack, I find the club rather an unwieldy instrument for my delicately- +formed muscles, and I flatter myself I shall do more execution with a +spear." + +"Well, if length constitutes power," said Jack, "you'll certainly be +invincible." + +The pole which Peterkin had cut was full twelve feet long, being a very +strong but light and tough young tree, which merely required thinning at +the butt to be a serviceable weapon. + +"That's a very good idea," said I. + +"Which--this?" inquired Peterkin, pointing to the spear. + +"Yes;" I replied. + +"Humph!" said he; "you'd find it a pretty tough and matter-of-fact idea, +if you had it stuck through your gizzard, old boy!" + +"I mean the idea of making it is a good one," said I, laughing. "And, +now I think of it, I'll change my plan, too. I don't think much of a +club, so I'll make me a sling out of this piece of cloth. I used to be +very fond of slinging, ever since I read of David slaying Goliath the +Philistine, and I was once thought to be expert at it." + +So I set to work to manufacture a sling. For a long time we all worked +very busily without speaking. At length Peterkin looked up: "I say, +Jack, I'm sorry to say I must apply to you for another strip of your +handkerchief, to tie on this rascally head with. It's pretty well torn +at any rate, so you won't miss it." + +Jack proceeded to comply with this request when Peterkin suddenly laid +his hand on his arm and arrested him. + +"Hist, man," said he, "be tender; you should never be needlessly cruel if +you can help it. Do try to shave past Lord Nelson's mouth without +tearing it, if possible! Thanks. There are plenty more handkerchiefs on +the cocoa-nut trees." + +Poor Peterkin! with what pleasant feelings I recall and record his jests +and humorous sayings now! + +While we were thus engaged, we were startled by a distant but most +strange and horrible cry. It seemed to come from the sea, but was so far +away that we could not clearly distinguish its precise direction. Rushing +out of our bower, we hastened down to the beach and stayed to listen. +Again it came quite loud and distinct on the night air,--a prolonged, +hideous cry, something like the braying of an ass. The moon had risen, +and we could see the islands in and beyond the lagoon quite plainly, but +there was no object visible to account for such a cry. A strong gust of +wind was blowing from the point whence the sound came, but this died away +while we were gazing out to sea. + +"What can it be?" said Peterkin, in a low whisper, while we all +involuntarily crept closer to each other. + +"Do you know," said Jack, "I have heard that mysterious sound twice +before, but never so loud as to-night. Indeed it was so faint that I +thought I must have merely fancied it, so, as I did not wish to alarm +you, I said nothing about it." + +We listened for a long time for the sound again, but as it did not come, +we returned to the bower and resumed our work. + +"Very strange," said Peterkin, quite gravely. "Do you believe in ghosts, +Ralph?" + +"No," I answered, "I do not. Nevertheless I must confess that strange, +unaccountable sounds, such as we have just heard, make me feel a little +uneasy." + +"What say you to it, Jack?" + +"I neither believe in ghosts nor feel uneasy," he replied. "I never saw +a ghost myself, and I never met with any one who had; and I have +generally found that strange and unaccountable things have almost always +been accounted for, and found to be quite simple, on close examination. I +certainly can't imagine what _that_ sound is; but I'm quite sure I shall +find out before long,--and if it's a ghost I'll--" + +"Eat it," cried Peterkin. + +"Yes, I'll eat it! Now, then, my bow and two arrows are finished; so if +you're ready we had better turn in." + +By this time Peterkin had thinned down his spear and tied an iron point +very cleverly to the end of it; I had formed a sling, the lines of which +were composed of thin strips of the cocoa-nut cloth, plaited; and Jack +had made a stout bow, nearly five feet long, with two arrows, feathered +with two or three large plumes which some bird had dropt. They had no +barbs, but Jack said that if arrows were well feathered, they did not +require iron points, but would fly quite well if merely sharpened at the +point; which I did not know before. + +"A feathered arrow without a barb," said he, "is a good weapon, but a +barbed arrow without feathers is utterly useless." + +The string of the bow was formed of our piece of whip-cord, part of +which, as he did not like to cut it, was rolled round the bow. + +Although thus prepared for a start on the morrow, we thought it wise to +exercise ourselves a little in the use of our weapons before starting, so +we spent the whole of the next day in practising. And it was well we did +so, for we found that our arms were very imperfect, and that we were far +from perfect in the use of them. First, Jack found that the bow was much +too strong, and he had to thin it. Also the spear was much too heavy, +and so had to be reduced in thickness, although nothing would induce +Peterkin to have it shortened. My sling answered very well, but I had +fallen so much out of practice that my first stone knocked off Peterkin's +hat, and narrowly missed making a second Goliath of him. However, after +having spent the whole day in diligent practice, we began to find some of +our former expertness returning--at least Jack and I did. As for +Peterkin, being naturally a neat-handed boy, he soon handled his spear +well, and could run full tilt at a cocoa nut, and hit it with great +precision once out of every five times. + +But I feel satisfied that we owed much of our rapid success to the +unflagging energy of Jack, who insisted that, since we had made him +Captain, we should obey him; and he kept us at work from morning till +night, perseveringly, at the same thing. Peterkin wished very much to +run about and stick his spear into everything he passed; but Jack put up +a cocoa nut, and would not let him leave off running at that for a +moment, except when he wanted to rest. We laughed at Jack for this, but +we were both convinced that it did us much good. + +That night we examined and repaired our arms ere we lay down to rest, +although we were much fatigued, in order that we might be in readiness to +set out on our expedition at daylight on the following morning. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +Prepare for a journey round the island--Sagacious reflections--Mysterious +appearances and startling occurrences. + +Scarcely had the sun shot its first ray across the bosom of the broad +Pacific, when Jack sprang to his feet, and, hallooing in Peterkin's ear +to awaken him, ran down the beach to take his customary dip in the sea. +We did not, as was our wont, bathe that morning in our Water Garden, but, +in order to save time, refreshed ourselves in the shallow water just +opposite the bower. Our breakfast was also despatched without loss of +time, and in less than an hour afterwards all our preparations for the +journey were completed. + +In addition to his ordinary dress, Jack tied a belt of cocoa-nut cloth +round his waist, into which he thrust the axe. I was also advised to put +on a belt and carry a short cudgel or bludgeon in it; for, as Jack truly +remarked, the sling would be of little use if we should chance to come to +close quarters with any wild animal. As for Peterkin, notwithstanding +that he carried such a long, and I must add, frightful-looking spear over +his shoulder, we could not prevail on him to leave his club behind; +"for," said he, "a spear at close quarters is not worth a button." I +must say that it seemed to me that the club was, to use his own style of +language, not worth a button-hole; for it was all knotted over at the +head, something like the club which I remember to have observed in +picture-books of Jack the Giant Killer, besides being so heavy that he +required to grasp it with both hands in order to wield it at all. +However, he took it with him, and, in this manner we set out upon our +travels. + +We did not consider it necessary to carry any food with us, as we knew +that wherever we went we should be certain to fall in with cocoa-nut +trees; having which, we were amply supplied, as Peterkin said, with meat +and drink and pocket-handkerchiefs! I took the precaution, however, to +put the burning-glass into my pocket, lest we should want fire. + +The morning was exceeding lovely. It was one of that very still and +peaceful sort which made the few noises that we heard seem to be _quiet_ +noises. I know no other way of expressing this idea. Noises which so +far from interrupting the universal tranquillity of earth, sea, and +sky--rather tended to reveal to us how quiet the world around us really +was. Such sounds as I refer to were, the peculiarly melancholy--yet, it +seemed to me, cheerful--plaint of sea-birds floating on the glassy water, +or sailing in the sky, also the subdued twittering of little birds among +the bushes, the faint ripples on the beach, and the solemn boom of the +surf upon the distant coral reef. We felt very glad in our hearts as we +walked along the sands side by side. For my part, I felt so deeply +overjoyed, that I was surprised at my own sensations, and fell into a +reverie upon the causes of happiness. I came to the conclusion that a +state of profound peace and repose, both in regard to outward objects and +within the soul, is the happiest condition in which man can be placed; +for, although I had many a time been most joyful and happy when engaged +in bustling, energetic, active pursuits or amusements, I never found that +such joy or satisfaction was so deep or so pleasant to reflect upon as +that which I now experienced. And I was the more confirmed in this +opinion when I observed, and, indeed, was told by himself, that +Peterkin's happiness was also very great; yet he did not express this by +dancing, as was his wont, nor did he give so much as a single shout, but +walked quietly between us with his eye sparkling, and a joyful smile upon +his countenance. My reader must not suppose that I thought all this in +the clear and methodical manner in which I have set it down here. These +thoughts did, indeed, pass through my mind, but they did so in a very +confused and indefinite manner, for I was young at that time, and not +much given to deep reflections. Neither did I consider that the peace +whereof I write is not to be found in this world--at least in its +perfection, although I have since learned that by religion a man may +attain to a very great degree of it. + +I have said that Peterkin walked along the sands between us. We had two +ways of walking together about our island. When we travelled through the +woods, we always did so in single file, as by this method we advanced +with greater facility, the one treading in the other's footsteps. In +such cases Jack always took the lead, Peterkin followed, and I brought up +the rear. But when we travelled along the sands, which extended almost +in an unbroken line of glistening white round the island, we marched +abreast, as we found this method more sociable, and every way more +pleasant. Jack, being the tallest, walked next the sea, and Peterkin +marched between us, as by this arrangement either of us could talk to him +or he to us, while if Jack and I happened to wish to converse together, +we could conveniently do so over Peterkin's head. Peterkin used to say, +in reference to this arrangement, that had he been as tall as either of +us, our order of march might have been the same, for, as Jack often used +to scold him for letting everything we said to him pass in at one ear and +out at the other, his head could of course form no interruption to our +discourse. + +We were now fairly started. Half a mile's walk conveyed us round a bend +in the land which shut out our bower from view, and for some time we +advanced at a brisk pace without speaking, though our eyes were not idle, +but noted everything, in the woods, on the shore, or in the sea, that was +interesting. After passing the ridge of land that formed one side of our +valley--the Valley of the Wreck--we beheld another small vale lying +before us in all the luxuriant loveliness of tropical vegetation. We +had, indeed, seen it before from the mountain-top, but we had no idea +that it would turn out to be so much more lovely when we were close to +it. We were about to commence the exploration of this valley, when +Peterkin stopped us, and directed our attention to a very remarkable +appearance in advance along the shore. + +"What's yon, think you?" said he, levelling his spear, as if he expected +an immediate attack from the object in question, though it was full half +a mile distant. + +As he spoke, there appeared a white column above the rocks, as if of +steam or spray. It rose upwards to a height of several feet, and then +disappeared. Had this been near the sea, we would not have been so +greatly surprised, as it might in that case have been the surf, for at +this part of the coast the coral reef approached so near to the island +that in some parts it almost joined it. There was therefore no lagoon +between, and the heavy surf of the ocean beat almost up to the rocks. But +this white column appeared about fifty yards inland. The rocks at the +place were rugged, and they stretched across the sandy beach into the +sea. Scarce had we ceased expressing our surprise at this sight, when +another column flew upwards for a few seconds, not far from the spot +where the first had been seen, and disappeared; and so, at long irregular +intervals, these strange sights recurred. We were now quite sure that +the columns were watery or composed of spray, but what caused them we +could not guess, so we determined to go and see. + +In a few minutes we gained the spot, which was very rugged and +precipitous, and, moreover, quite damp with the falling of the spray. We +had much ado to pass over dry-shod. The ground also was full of holes +here and there. Now, while we stood anxiously waiting for the +re-appearance of these water-spouts, we heard a low, rumbling sound near +us, which quickly increased to a gargling and hissing noise, and a moment +afterwards a thick spout of water burst upwards from a hole in the rock, +and spouted into the air with much violence, and so close to where Jack +and I were standing that it nearly touched us. We sprang to one side, +but not before a cloud of spray descended, and drenched us both to the +skin. + +Peterkin, who was standing farther off, escaped with a few drops, and +burst into an uncontrollable fit of laughter on beholding our miserable +plight. + +"Mind your eye!" he shouted eagerly, "there goes another!" The words +were scarcely out of his mouth when there came up a spout from another +hole, which served us exactly in the same manner as before. + +Peterkin now shrieked with laughter; but his merriment was abruptly put a +stop to by the gurgling noise occurring close to where he stood. + +"Where'll it spout this time, I wonder?" he said, looking about with some +anxiety, and preparing to run. Suddenly there came a loud hiss or snort; +a fierce spout of water burst up between Peterkin's legs, blew him off +his feet, enveloped him in its spray, and hurled him to the ground. He +fell with so much violence that we feared he must have broken some of his +bones, and ran anxiously to his assistance; but fortunately he had fallen +on a clump of tangled herbage, in which he lay sprawling in a most +deplorable condition. + +It was now our turn to laugh; but as we were not yet quite sure that he +was unhurt, and as we knew not when or where the next spout might arise, +we assisted him hastily to jump up and hurry from the spot. + +I may here add, that although I am quite certain that the spout of water +was very strong, and that it blew Peterkin completely off his legs, I am +not quite certain of the exact height to which it lifted him, being +somewhat startled by the event, and blinded partially by the spray, so +that my power of observation was somewhat impaired for the moment. + +"What's to be done now?" inquired Peterkin ruefully. + +"Make a fire, lad, and dry ourselves," replied Jack. + +"And here is material ready to our hand," said I, picking up a dried +branch of a tree, as we hurried up to the woods. + +In about an hour after this mishap our clothes were again dried. While +they were hanging up before the fire, we walked down to the beach, and +soon observed that these curious spouts took place immediately after the +fall of a huge wave, never before it; and, moreover, that the spouts did +not take place excepting when the billow was an extremely large one. From +this we concluded that there must be a subterraneous channel in the rock +into which the water was driven by the larger waves, and finding no way +of escape except through these small holes, was thus forced up violently +through them. At any rate, we could not conceive any other reason for +these strange water-spouts, and as this seemed a very simple and probable +one, we forthwith adopted it. + +"I say, Ralph, what's that in the water? is it a shark?" said Jack, just +as we were about to quit the place. + +I immediately ran to the overhanging ledge of rock, from which he was +looking down into the sea, and bent over it. There I saw a very faint +pale object of a greenish colour, which seemed to move slightly while I +looked at it. + +"It's like a fish of some sort," said I. + +"Hallo, Peterkin!" cried Jack, "fetch your spear; here's work for it." + +But when we tried to reach the object, the spear proved to be too short. + +"There, now," said Peterkin with a sneer, "you were always telling me it +was too long." + +Jack now drove the spear forcibly towards the object, and let go his +hold; but, although it seemed to be well aimed, he must have missed, for +the handle soon rose again; and when the spear was drawn up, there was +the pale green object in exactly the same spot, slowly moving its tail. + +"Very odd," said Jack. + +But although it was undoubtedly very odd, and, although Jack and all of +us plunged the spear at it repeatedly, we could neither hit it nor drive +it away, so we were compelled to continue our journey without discovering +what it was. I was very much perplexed at this strange appearance in the +water, and could not get it out of my mind for a long time afterwards. +However, I quieted myself by resolving that I would pay a visit to it +again at some more convenient season. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + +Make discovery of many excellent roots and fruits--The resources of the +Coral Island gradually unfolded--The banian-tree--Another tree which is +supported by natural planks--Water-fowl found--A very remarkable +discovery, and a very peculiar murder--We luxuriate on the fat of the +land. + +Our examination of the little valley proved to be altogether most +satisfactory. We found in it not only similar trees to those we had +already seen in our own valley, but also one or two others of a different +species. We had also the satisfaction of discovering a peculiar +vegetable, which Jack concluded must certainly be that of which he had +read as being very common among the South Sea islanders, and which was +named _taro_. Also we found a large supply of yams, and another root +like a potato in appearance. As these were all quite new to us, we +regarded our lot as a most fortunate one, in being thus cast on an island +which was so prolific and so well stored with all the necessaries of +life. Long afterwards we found out that this island of ours was no +better in these respects than thousands of other islands in those seas. +Indeed, many of them were much richer and more productive; but that did +not render us the less grateful for our present good fortune. We each +put one of these roots in our pocket, intending to use them for our +supper; of which more hereafter. We also saw many beautiful birds here, +and traces of some four-footed animal again. Meanwhile the sun began to +descend, so we returned to the shore, and pushed on round the spouting +rocks into the next valley. This was that valley of which I have spoken +as running across the entire island. It was by far the largest and most +beautiful that we had yet looked upon. Here were trees of every shape +and size and hue which it is possible to conceive of, many of which we +had not seen in the other valleys; for, the stream in this valley being +larger, and the mould much richer than in the Valley of the Wreck, it was +clothed with a more luxuriant growth of trees and plants. Some trees +were dark glossy green, others of a rich and warm hue, contrasting well +with those of a pale light green, which were everywhere abundant. Among +these we recognised the broad dark heads of the bread-fruit, with its +golden fruit; the pure, silvery foliage of the candle-nut, and several +species which bore a strong resemblance to the pine; while here and +there, in groups and in single trees, rose the tall forms of the cocoa- +nut palms, spreading abroad, and waving their graceful plumes high above +all the rest, as if they were a superior race of stately giants keeping +guard over these luxuriant forests. Oh! it was a most enchanting scene, +and I thanked God for having created such delightful spots for the use of +man. + +Now, while we were gazing around us in silent admiration, Jack uttered an +exclamation of surprise, and, pointing to an object a little to one side +of us, said,-- + +"That's a banian-tree." + +"And what's a banian-tree?" inquired Peterkin, as we walked towards it. + +"A very curious one, as you shall see presently," replied Jack. "It is +called the _aoa_ here, if I recollect rightly, and has a wonderful +peculiarity about it. What an enormous one it is, to be sure." + +"_It_!" repeated Peterkin; "why, there are dozens of banians here! What +do you mean by talking bad grammar? Is your philosophy deserting you, +Jack?" + +"There is but one tree here of this kind," returned Jack, "as you will +perceive if you will examine it." And, sure enough, we did find that +what we had supposed was a forest of trees was in reality only one. Its +bark was of a light colour, and had a shining appearance, the leaves +being lance-shaped, small, and of a beautiful pea-green. But the +wonderful thing about it was, that the branches, which grew out from the +stem horizontally, sent down long shoots or fibres to the ground, which, +taking root, had themselves become trees, and were covered with bark like +the tree itself. Many of these fibres had descended from the branches at +various distances, and thus supported them on natural pillars, some of +which were so large and strong, that it was not easy at first to +distinguish the offspring from the parent stem. The fibres were of all +sizes and in all states of advancement, from the pillars we have just +mentioned to small cords which hung down and were about to take root, and +thin brown threads still far from the ground, which swayed about with +every motion of wind. In short, it seemed to us that, if there were only +space afforded to it, this single tree would at length cover the whole +island. + +Shortly after this we came upon another remarkable tree, which, as its +peculiar formation afterwards proved extremely useful to us, merits +description. It was a splendid chestnut, but its proper name Jack did +not know. However, there were quantities of fine nuts upon it, some of +which we put in our pockets. But its stem was the wonderful part of it. +It rose to about twelve feet without a branch, and was not of great +thickness; on the contrary, it was remarkably slender for the size of the +tree; but, to make up for this, there were four or five wonderful +projections in this stem, which I cannot better describe than by asking +the reader to suppose that five planks of two inches thick and three feet +broad had been placed round the trunk of the tree, with their _edges_ +closely fixed to it, from the ground up to the branches, and that these +planks had been covered over with the bark of the tree and incorporated +with it. In short, they were just natural buttresses, without which the +stem could not have supported its heavy and umbrageous top. We found +these chestnuts to be very numerous. They grew chiefly on the banks of +the stream, and were of all sizes. + +While we were examining a small tree of this kind, Jack chipped a piece +off a buttress with his axe, and found the wood to be firm and easily +cut. He then struck the axe into it with all his force, and very soon +split it off close to the tree, first, however, having cut it across +transversely above and below. By this means he satisfied himself that we +could now obtain short planks, as it were all ready sawn, of any size and +thickness that we desired; which was a very great discovery indeed, +perhaps the most important we had yet made. + +We now wended our way back to the coast, intending to encamp near the +beach, as we found that the mosquitoes were troublesome in the forest. On +our way we could not help admiring the birds which flew and chirped +around us. Among them we observed a pretty kind of paroquet, with a +green body, a blue head, and a red breast; also a few beautiful +turtledoves, and several flocks of wood-pigeons. The hues of many of +these birds were extremely vivid,--bright green, blue, and scarlet, being +the prevailing tints. We made several attempts throughout the day to +bring down one of these, both with the bow and the sling,--not for mere +sport, but to ascertain whether they were good for food. But we +invariably missed, although once or twice we were very near hitting. As +evening drew on, however, a flock of pigeons flew past. I slung a stone +into the midst of them at a venture, and had the good fortune to kill +one. We were startled, soon after, by a loud whistling noise above our +heads; and on looking up, saw a flock of wild ducks making for the coast. +We watched these, and, observing where they alighted, followed them up +until we came upon a most lovely blue lake, not more than two hundred +yards long, imbosomed in verdant trees. Its placid surface, which +reflected every leaf and stem, as if in a mirror, was covered with +various species of wild ducks, feeding among the sedges and broad-leaved +water-plants which floated on it, while numerous birds like water-hens +ran to and fro most busily on its margin. These all with one accord flew +tumultuously away the instant we made our appearance. While walking +along the margin we observed fish in the water, but of what sort we could +not tell. + +Now, as we neared the shore, Jack and I said we would go a little out of +our way to see if we could procure one of those ducks; so, directing +Peterkin to go straight to the shore and kindle a fire, we separated, +promising to rejoin him speedily. But we did not find the ducks, +although we made a diligent search for half an hour. We were about to +retrace our steps, when we were arrested by one of the strangest sights +that we had yet beheld. + +Just in front of us, at the distance of about ten yards, grew a superb +tree, which certainly was the largest we had yet seen on the island. Its +trunk was at least five feet in diameter, with a smooth gray bark; above +this the spreading branches were clothed with light green leaves, amid +which were clusters of bright yellow fruit, so numerous as to weigh down +the boughs with their great weight. This fruit seemed to be of the plum +species, of an oblong form, and a good deal larger than the magnum bonum +plum. The ground at the foot of this tree was thickly strewn with the +fallen fruit, in the midst of which lay sleeping, in every possible +attitude, at least twenty hogs of all ages and sizes, apparently quite +surfeited with a recent banquet. + +Jack and I could scarce restrain our laughter as we gazed at these +coarse, fat, ill-looking animals, while they lay groaning and snoring +heavily amid the remains of their supper. + +"Now, Ralph," said Jack, in a low whisper, "put a stone in your sling,--a +good big one,--and let fly at that fat fellow with his back toward you. +I'll try to put an arrow into yon little pig." + +"Don't you think we had better put them up first?" I whispered; "it seems +cruel to kill them while asleep." + +"If I wanted _sport_, Ralph, I would certainly set them up; but as we +only want _pork_, we'll let them lie. Besides, we're not sure of killing +them; so, fire away." + +Thus admonished, I slung my stone with so good aim that it went bang +against the hog's flank as if against the head of a drum; but it had no +other effect than that of causing the animal to start to its feet, with a +frightful yell of surprise, and scamper away. At the same instant Jack's +bow twanged, and the arrow pinned the little pig to the ground by the +ear. + +"I've missed, after all," cried Jack, darting forward with uplifted axe, +while the little pig uttered a loud squeal, tore the arrow from the +ground, and ran away with it, along with the whole drove, into the bushes +and disappeared, though we heard them screaming long afterwards in the +distance. + +"That's very provoking, now," said Jack, rubbing the point of his nose. + +"Very," I replied, stroking my chin. + +"Well, we must make haste and rejoin Peterkin," said Jack. "It's getting +late." And, without further remark, we threaded our way quickly through +the woods towards the shore. + +When we reached it, we found wood laid out, the fire lighted and +beginning to kindle up, with other signs of preparation for our +encampment, but Peterkin was nowhere to be found. We wondered very much +at this; but Jack suggested that he might have gone to fetch water; so he +gave a shout to let him know that we had arrived, and sat down upon a +rock, while I threw off my jacket and seized the axe, intending to split +up one or two billets of wood. But I had scarce moved from the spot +when, in the distance, we heard a most appalling shriek, which was +followed up by a chorus of yells from the hogs, and a loud "hurrah!" + +"I do believe," said I, "that Peterkin has met with the hogs." + +"When Greek meets Greek," said Jack, soliloquizing, "then comes the tug +of--" + +"Hurrah!" shouted Peterkin in the distance. + +We turned hastily towards the direction whence the sound came, and soon +descried Peterkin walking along the beach towards us with a little pig +transfixed on the end of his long spear! + +"Well done, my boy!" exclaimed Jack, slapping him on the shoulder when he +came up, "you're the best shot amongst us." + +"Look here Jack!" cried Peterkin, as he disengaged the animal from his +spear. "Do you recognise that hole?" said he, pointing to the pig's ear; +"and are you familiar with this arrow, eh?" + +"Well, I declare!" said Jack. + +"Of course you do," interrupted Peterkin; "but, pray, restrain your +declarations at this time, and let's have supper, for I'm uncommonly +hungry, I can tell you; and it's no joke to charge a whole herd of swine +with their great-grandmother bristling like a giant porcupine at the head +of them!" + +We now set about preparing supper; and, truly, a good display of viands +we made, when all was laid out on a flat rock in the light of the blazing +fire. There was, first of all, the little pig; then there was the taro- +root, and the yam, and the potato, and six plums; and, lastly, the wood- +pigeon. To these Peterkin added a bit of sugar-cane, which he had cut +from a little patch of that plant which he had found not long after +separating from us; "and," said he, "the patch was somewhat in a square +form, which convinces me it must have been planted by man." + +"Very likely," replied Jack. "From all we have seen, I'm inclined to +think that some of the savages must have dwelt here long ago." + +We found no small difficulty in making up our minds how we were to cook +the pig. None of us had ever cut up one before, and we did not know +exactly how to begin; besides, we had nothing but the axe to do it with, +our knife having been forgotten. At last Jack started up and said,-- + +"Don't let us waste more time talking about it, boys. Hold it up, +Peterkin. There, lay the hind leg on this block of wood, so;" and he cut +it off, with a large portion of the haunch, at a single blow of the axe. +"Now the other,--that's it." And having thus cut off the two hind legs, +he made several deep gashes in them, thrust a sharp-pointed stick through +each, and stuck them up before the blaze to roast. The wood-pigeon was +then split open, quite flat, washed clean in salt water, and treated in a +similar manner. While these were cooking, we scraped a hole in the sand +and ashes under the fire, into which we put our vegetables, and covered +them up. + +The taro-root was of an oval shape, about ten inches long and four or +five thick. It was of a mottled-gray colour, and had a thick rind. We +found it somewhat like an Irish potato, and exceedingly good. The yam +was roundish, and had a rough brown skin. It was very sweet and well- +flavoured. The potato, we were surprised to find, was quite sweet and +exceedingly palatable, as also were the plums; and, indeed, the pork and +pigeon too, when we came to taste them. Altogether this was decidedly +the most luxurious supper we had enjoyed for many a day; and Jack said it +was out-of-sight better than we ever got on board ship; and Peterkin said +he feared that if we should remain long on the island he would infallibly +become a glutton or an epicure: whereat Jack remarked that he need not +fear that, for he was _both_ already! And so, having eaten our fill, not +forgetting to finish off with a plum, we laid ourselves comfortably down +to sleep upon a couch of branches under the overhanging ledge of a coral +rock. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + +Effects of over-eating, and reflections thereon--Humble advice regarding +cold water--The "horrible cry" accounted for--The curious birds called +penguins--Peculiarity of the cocoa nut palm--Questions on the formation +of coral islands--Mysterious footsteps--Strange discoveries and sad +sights. + +When we awoke on the following morning, we found that the sun was already +a good way above the horizon, so I came to the conclusion that a heavy +supper is not conducive to early rising. Nevertheless, we felt +remarkably strong and well, and much disposed to have our breakfast. +First, however, we had our customary morning bathe, which refreshed us +greatly. + +I have often wondered very much in after years that the inhabitants of my +own dear land did not make more frequent use of this most charming +element, water. I mean in the way of cold bathing. Of course, I have +perceived that it is not convenient for them to go into the sea or the +rivers in winter, as we used to do on the Coral Island; but then, I knew +from experience that a large washing-tub and a sponge do form a most +pleasant substitute. The feelings of freshness, of cleanliness, of +vigour, and extreme hilarity, that always followed my bathes in the sea, +and even, when in England, my ablutions in the wash-tub, were so +delightful, that I would sooner have gone without my breakfast than +without my bathe in cold water. My readers will forgive me for asking +whether they are in the habit of bathing thus every morning; and if they +answer "No," they will pardon me for recommending them to begin at once. +Of late years, since retiring from the stirring life of adventure which I +have led so long in foreign climes, I have heard of a system called the +cold-water-cure. Now, I do not know much about that system, so I do not +mean to uphold it, neither do I intend to run it down. Perhaps, in +reference to it, I may just hint that there may be too much of a good +thing. I know not; but of this I am quite certain, that there may also +be too little of a good thing; and the great delight I have had in cold +bathing during the course of my adventurous career inclines me to think +that it is better to risk taking too much than to content one's self with +too little. Such is my opinion, derived from much experience; but I put +it before my readers with the utmost diffidence and with profound +modesty, knowing that it may possibly jar with their feelings of +confidence in their own ability to know and judge as to what is best and +fittest in reference to their own affairs. But, to return from this +digression, for which I humbly crave forgiveness. + +We had not advanced on our journey much above a mile or so, and were just +beginning to feel the pleasant glow that usually accompanies vigorous +exercise, when, on turning a point that revealed to us a new and +beautiful cluster of islands, we were suddenly arrested by the appalling +cry which had so alarmed us a few nights before. But this time we were +by no means so much alarmed as on the previous occasion, because, whereas +at that time it was night, now it was day; and I have always found, +though I am unable to account for it, that daylight banishes many of the +fears that are apt to assail us in the dark. + +On hearing the sound, Peterkin instantly threw forward his spear. + +"Now, what can it be?" said he, looking round at Jack. "I tell you what +it is, if we are to go on being pulled up in a constant state of horror +and astonishment, as we have been for the last week, the sooner we're out +o' this island the better, notwithstanding the yams and lemonade, and +pork and plums!" + +Peterkin's remark was followed by a repetition of the cry, louder than +before. + +"It comes from one of these islands," said Jack. + +"It must be the ghost of a jackass, then," said Peterkin, "for I never +heard anything so like." + +We all turned our eyes towards the cluster of islands, where, on the +largest, we observed curious objects moving on the shore. + +"Soldiers they are,--that's flat!" cried Peterkin, gazing at them in the +utmost amazement. + +And, in truth, Peterkin's remark seemed to me to be correct; for, at the +distance from which we saw them, they appeared to be an army of soldiers. +There they stood, rank and file, in lines and in squares, marching and +countermarching, with blue coats and white trousers. While we were +looking at them, the dreadful cry came again over the water, and Peterkin +suggested that it must be a regiment sent out to massacre the natives in +cold blood. At this remark Jack laughed and said,-- + +"Why, Peterkin, they are penguins!" + +"Penguins?" repeated Peterkin. + +"Ay, penguins, Peterkin, penguins,--nothing more or less than big sea- +birds, as you shall see one of these days, when we pay them a visit in +our boat, which I mean to set about building the moment we return to our +bower." + +"So, then, our dreadful yelling ghosts and our murdering army of +soldiers," remarked Peterkin, "have dwindled down to penguins,--big sea- +birds! Very good. Then I propose that we continue our journey as fast +as possible, lest our island should be converted into a dream before we +get completely round it." + +Now, as we continued on our way, I pondered much over this new discovery, +and the singular appearance of these birds, of which Jack could only give +us a very slight and vague account; and I began to long to commence to +our boat, in order that we might go and inspect them more narrowly. But +by degrees these thoughts left me, and I began to be much taken up again +with the interesting peculiarities of the country which we were passing +through. + +The second night we passed in a manner somewhat similar to the first, at +about two-thirds of the way round the island, as we calculated, and we +hoped to sleep on the night following at our bower. I will not here note +so particularly all that we said and saw during the course of this second +day, as we did not make any further discoveries of great importance. The +shore along which we travelled, and the various parts of the woods +through which we passed, were similar to those which have been already +treated of. There were one or two observations that we made, however, +and these were as follows:-- + +We saw that, while many of the large fruit-bearing trees grew only in the +valleys, and some of them only near the banks of the streams, where the +soil was peculiarly rich, the cocoa-nut palm grew in every place +whatsoever,--not only on the hill sides, but also on the sea shore, and +even, as has been already stated, on the coral reef itself, where the +soil, if we may use the name, was nothing better than loose sand mingled +with broken shells and coral rock. So near to the sea, too, did this +useful tree grow, that in many places its roots were washed by the spray +from the breakers. Yet we found the trees growing thus on the sands to +be quite as luxuriant as those growing in the valleys, and the fruit as +good and refreshing also. Besides this, I noticed that, on the summit of +the high mountain, which we once more ascended at a different point from +our first ascent, were found abundance of shells and broken coral +formations, which Jack and I agreed proved either that this island must +have once been under the sea, or that the sea must once have been above +the island. In other words, that as shells and coral could not possibly +climb to the mountain top, they must have been washed upon it while the +mountain top was on a level with the sea. We pondered this very much; +and we put to ourselves the question, "What raised the island to its +present height above the sea?" But to this we could by no means give to +ourselves a satisfactory reply. Jack thought it might have been blown up +by a volcano; and Peterkin said he thought it must have jumped up of its +own accord! We also noticed, what had escaped us before, that the solid +rocks of which the island was formed were quite different from the live +coral rocks on the shore, where the wonderful little insects were +continually working. They seemed, indeed, to be of the same material,--a +substance like limestone; but, while the coral rocks were quite full of +minute cells in which the insects lived, the other rocks inland were hard +and solid, without the appearance of cells at all. Our thoughts and +conversations on this subject were sometimes so profound that Peterkin +said we should certainly get drowned in them at last, even although we +were such good divers! Nevertheless we did not allow his pleasantry on +this and similar points to deter us from making our notes and +observations as we went along. + +We found several more droves of hogs in the woods, but abstained from +killing any of them, having more than sufficient for our present +necessities. We saw also many of their foot-prints in this +neighbourhood. Among these we also observed the footprints of a smaller +animal, which we examined with much care, but could form no certain +opinion as to them. Peterkin thought they were those of a little dog, +but Jack and I thought differently. We became very curious on this +matter, the more so that we observed these foot-prints to lie scattered +about in one locality, as if the animal which had made them was wandering +round about in a very irregular manner, and without any object in view. +Early in the forenoon of our third day we observed these footprints to be +much more numerous than ever, and in one particular spot they diverged +off into the woods in a regular beaten track, which was, however, so +closely beset with bushes, that we pushed through it with difficulty. We +had now become so anxious to find out what animal this was, and where it +went to, that we determined to follow the track, and, if possible, clear +up the mystery. Peterkin said, in a bantering tone, that he was sure it +would be cleared up as usual in some frightfully simple way, and prove to +be no mystery at all! + +The beaten track seemed much too large to have been formed by the animal +itself, and we concluded that some larger animal had made it, and that +the smaller one made use of it. But everywhere the creeping plants and +tangled bushes crossed our path, so that we forced our way along with +some difficulty. Suddenly, as we came upon an open space, we heard a +faint cry, and observed a black animal standing in the track before us. + +"A wild-cat!" cried Jack, fitting an arrow to his bow, and discharging it +so hastily that he missed the animal, and hit the earth about half a foot +to one side of it. To our surprise the wild-cat did not fly, but walked +slowly towards the arrow, and snuffed at it. + +"That's the most comical wild-cat I ever saw!" cried Jack. + +"It's a tame wild-cat, I think," said Peterkin, levelling his spear to +make a charge. + +"Stop!" cried I, laying my hand on his shoulder; "I do believe the poor +beast is blind. See, it strikes against the branches as it walks along. +It must be a very old one;" and I hastened towards it. + +"Only think," said Peterkin, with a suppressed laugh, "of a superannuated +wild-cat!" + +We now found that the poor cat was not only blind, or nearly so, but +extremely deaf, as it did not hear our footsteps until we were quite +close behind it. Then it sprang round, and, putting up its back and +tail, while the black hair stood all on end, uttered a hoarse mew and a +fuff. + +"Poor thing," said Peterkin, gently extending his hand, and endeavouring +to pat the cat's head. "Poor pussy; chee, chee, chee; puss, puss, puss; +cheetie pussy!" + +No sooner did the cat hear these sounds than all signs of anger fled, +and, advancing eagerly to Peterkin, it allowed itself to be stroked, and +rubbed itself against his legs, purring loudly all the time, and showing +every symptom of the most extreme delight. + +"It's no more a wild cat than I am!" cried Peterkin, taking it in his +arms. "It's quite tame. Poor pussy, cheetie pussy!" + +We now crowded around Peterkin, and were not a little surprised, and, to +say truth, a good deal affected, by the sight of the poor animal's +excessive joy. It rubbed its head against Peterkin's cheek, licked his +chin, and thrust its head almost violently into his neck, while it purred +more loudly than I ever heard a cat purr before, and appeared to be so +much overpowered by its feelings, that it occasionally mewed and purred +almost in the same breath. Such demonstrations of joy and affection led +us at once to conclude that this poor cat must have known man before, and +we conjectured that it had been left either accidentally or by design on +the island many years ago, and was now evincing its extreme joy at +meeting once more with human beings. While we were fondling the cat and +talking about it, Jack glanced round the open space in the midst of which +we stood. + +"Hallo!" exclaimed he; "this looks something like a clearing. The axe +has been at work here. Just look at these tree-stumps." + +We now turned to examine these, and, without doubt, we found trees that +had been cut down here and there, also stumps and broken branches; all of +which, however, were completely covered over with moss, and bore evidence +of having been in this condition for some years. No human foot-prints +were to be seen, either on the track or among the bushes; but those of +the cat were found everywhere. We now determined to follow up the track +as far as it went, and Peterkin put the cat down; but it seemed to be so +weak, and mewed so very pitifully, that he took it up again and carried +it in his arms, where, in a few minutes, it fell sound asleep. + +About ten yards farther on, the felled trees became more numerous, and +the track, diverging to the right, followed for a short space the banks +of a stream. Suddenly we came to a spot where once must have been a rude +bridge, the stones of which were scattered in the stream, and those on +each bank entirely covered over with moss. In silent surprise and +expectancy we continued to advance, and, a few yards farther on, beheld, +under the shelter of some bread-fruit trees, a small hut or cottage. I +cannot hope to convey to my readers a very correct idea of the feelings +that affected us on witnessing this unexpected sight. We stood for a +long time in silent wonder, for there was a deep and most melancholy +stillness about the place that quite overpowered us; and when we did at +length speak, it was in subdued whispers, as if we were surrounded by +some awful or supernatural influence. Even Peterkin's voice, usually so +quick and lively on all occasions, was hushed now; for there was a +dreariness about this silent, lonely, uninhabited cottage,--so strange in +its appearance, so far away from the usual dwellings of man, so old, +decayed, and deserted in its aspect,--that fell upon our spirits like a +thick cloud, and blotted out as with a pall the cheerful sunshine that +had filled us since the commencement of our tour round the island. + +The hut or cottage was rude and simple in its construction. It was not +more than twelve feet long by ten feet broad, and about seven or eight +feet high. It had one window, or rather a small frame in which a window +might, perhaps, once have been, but which was now empty. The door was +exceedingly low, and formed of rough boards, and the roof was covered +with broad cocoa-nut and plantain leaves. But every part of it was in a +state of the utmost decay. Moss and green matter grew in spots all over +it. The woodwork was quite perforated with holes; the roof had nearly +fallen in, and appeared to be prevented from doing so altogether by the +thick matting of creeping-plants and the interlaced branches which years +of neglect had allowed to cover it almost entirely; while the thick, +luxuriant branches of the bread-fruit and other trees spread above it, +and flung a deep, sombre shadow over the spot, as if to guard it from the +heat and the light of day. We conversed long and in whispers about this +strange habitation ere we ventured to approach it; and when at length we +did so it was, at least on my part, with feelings of awe. + +At first Jack endeavoured to peep in at the window, but from the deep +shadow of the trees already mentioned, and the gloom within, he could not +clearly discern objects; so we lifted the latch and pushed open the door. +We observed that the latch was made of iron, and almost eaten away with +rust. In the like condition were also the hinges, which creaked as the +door swung back. On entering, we stood still and gazed around us, while +we were much impressed with the dreary stillness of the room. But what +we saw there surprised and shocked us not a little. There was no +furniture in the apartment save a little wooden stool and an iron pot, +the latter almost eaten through with rust. In the corner farthest from +the door was a low bedstead, on which lay two skeletons, imbedded in a +little heap of dry dust. With beating hearts we went forward to examine +them. One was the skeleton of a man, the other that of a dog, which was +extended close beside that of the man, with its head resting on his bosom + +Now we were very much concerned about this discovery, and could scarce +refrain from tears on beholding these sad remains. After some time, we +began to talk about what we had seen, and to examine in and around the +hut, in order to discover some clue to the name or history of this poor +man, who had thus died in solitude, with none to mourn his loss save his +cat and his faithful dog. But we found nothing,--neither a book nor a +scrap of paper. We found, however, the decayed remnants of what appeared +to have been clothing, and an old axe. But none of these things bore +marks of any kind; and, indeed, they were so much decayed as to convince +us that they had lain in the condition in which we found them for many +years. + +This discovery now accounted to us for the tree stump at the top of the +mountain with the initials cut on it; also for the patch of sugar-cane +and other traces of man which we had met with in the course of our +rambles over the island. And we were much saddened by the reflection +that the lot of this poor wanderer might possibly be our own, after many +years' residence on the island, unless we should be rescued by the visit +of some vessel or the arrival of natives. Having no clue whatever to +account for the presence of this poor human being in such a lonely spot, +we fell to conjecturing what could have brought him there. I was +inclined to think that he must have been a shipwrecked sailor, whose +vessel had been lost here, and all the crew been drowned except himself +and his dog and cat. But Jack thought it more likely that he had run +away from his vessel, and had taken the dog and cat to keep him company. +We were also much occupied in our minds with the wonderful difference +between the cat and the dog. For here we saw that while the one +perished, like a loving friend, by its master's side, with its head +resting on his bosom, the other had sought to sustain itself by prowling +abroad in the forest, and had lived in solitude to a good old age. +However, we did not conclude from this that the cat was destitute of +affection, for we could not forget its emotions on first meeting with us; +but we saw from this, that the dog had a great deal more of generous love +in its nature than the cat, because it not only found it impossible to +live after the death of its master, but it must needs, when it came to +die, crawl to his side and rest its head upon his lifeless breast. + +While we were thinking on these things, and examining into everything +about the room, we were attracted by an exclamation from Peterkin. + +"I say, Jack," said he, "here is something that will be of use to us." + +"What is it?" said Jack, hastening across the room. + +"An old pistol," replied Peterkin, holding up the weapon, which he had +just pulled from under a heap of broken wood and rubbish that lay in a +corner. + +"That, indeed, might have been useful," said Jack, examining it, "if we +had any powder; but I suspect the bow and the sling will prove more +serviceable." + +"True, I forgot that," said Peterkin; "but we may as well take it with +us, for the flint will serve to strike fire with when the sun does not +shine." + +{A saddening discovery: p136.jpg} + +After having spent more than an hour at this place without discovering +anything of further interest, Peterkin took up the old cat, which had +lain very contentedly asleep on the stool whereon he had placed it, and +we prepared to take our departure. In leaving the hut, Jack stumbled +heavily against the door-post, which was so much decayed as to break +across, and the whole fabric of the hut seemed ready to tumble about our +ears. This put into our heads that we might as well pull it down, and so +form a mound over the skeleton. Jack, therefore, with his axe, cut down +the other door-post, which, when it was done, brought the whole hut in +ruins to the ground, and thus formed a grave to the bones of the poor +recluse and his dog. Then we left the spot, having brought away the iron +pot, the pistol, and the old axe, as they might be of much use to us +hereafter. + +During the rest of this day we pursued our journey, and examined the +other end of the large valley, which we found to be so much alike to the +parts already described, that I shall not recount the particulars of what +we saw in this place. I may, however, remark, that we did not quite +recover our former cheerful spirits until we arrived at our bower, which +we did late in the evening, and found everything just in the same +condition as we had left it three days before. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + +Something wrong with the tank--Jack's wisdom and Peterkin's +impertinence--Wonderful behaviour of a crab--Good wishes for those who +dwell far from the sea--Jack commences to build a little boat. + +Rest is sweet as well for the body as for the mind. During my long +experience, amid the vicissitudes of a chequered life, I have found that +periods of profound rest at certain intervals, in addition to the +ordinary hours of repose, are necessary to the wellbeing of man. And the +nature as well as the period of this rest varies, according to the +different temperaments of individuals, and the peculiar circumstances in +which they may chance to be placed. To those who work with their minds, +bodily labour is rest. To those who labour with the body, deep sleep is +rest. To the downcast, the weary, and the sorrowful, joy and peace are +rest. Nay, further, I think that to the gay, the frivolous, the +reckless, when sated with pleasures that cannot last, even sorrow proves +to be rest of a kind, although, perchance, it were better that I should +call it relief than rest. There is, indeed, but one class of men to whom +rest is denied. There is no rest to the wicked. At this I do but hint, +however, as I treat not of that rest which is spiritual, but, more +particularly, of that which applies to the mind and to the body. + +Of this rest we stood much in need on our return home, and we found it +exceedingly sweet, when we indulged in it, after completing the journey +just related. It had not, indeed, been a very long journey, nevertheless +we had pursued it so diligently that our frames were not a little +prostrated. Our minds were also very much exhausted in consequence of +the many surprises, frequent alarms, and much profound thought, to which +they had been subjected; so that when we lay down on the night of our +return under the shelter of the bower, we fell immediately into very deep +repose. I can state this with much certainty, for Jack afterwards +admitted the fact, and Peterkin, although he stoutly denied it, I heard +snoring loudly at least two minutes after lying down. In this condition +we remained all night and the whole of the following day without awaking +once, or so much as moving our positions. When we did awake it was near +sunset, and we were all in such a state of lassitude that we merely rose +to swallow a mouthful of food. As Peterkin remarked, in the midst of a +yawn, we took breakfast at tea-time, and then went to bed again, where we +lay till the following forenoon. + +After this we arose very greatly refreshed, but much alarmed lest we had +lost count of a day. I say we were much alarmed on this head, for we had +carefully kept count of the days since we were cast upon our island, in +order that we might remember the Sabbath-day, which day we had hitherto +with one accord kept as a day of rest, and refrained from all work +whatsoever. However, on considering the subject, we all three +entertained the same opinion as to how long we had slept, and so our +minds were put at ease. + +We now hastened to our Water Garden to enjoy a bathe, and to see how did +the animals which I had placed in the tank. We found the garden more +charming, pelucid, and inviting than ever, and Jack and I plunged into +its depth, and gambolled among its radiant coral groves; while Peterkin +wallowed at the surface, and tried occasionally to kick us as we passed +below. Having dressed, I then hastened to the tank; but what was my +surprise and grief to find nearly all the animals dead, and the water in +a putrid condition! I was greatly distressed at this, and wondered what +could be the cause of it. + +"Why, you precious humbug," said Peterkin, coming up to me, "how could +you expect it to be otherwise? When fishes are accustomed to live in the +Pacific Ocean, how can you expect them to exist in a hole like that?" + +"Indeed, Peterkin," I replied, "there seems to be truth in what you say. +Nevertheless, now I think of it, there must be some error in your +reasoning; for, if I put in but a few very small animals, they will bear +the same proportion to this pond that the millions of fish bear to the +ocean." + +"I say, Jack," cried Peterkin, waving his hand, "come here, like a good +fellow. Ralph is actually talking philosophy. Do come to our +assistance, for he's out o' sight beyond me already!" + +"What's the matter?" inquired Jack, coming up, while he endeavoured to +scrub his long hair dry with a towel of cocoa-nut cloth. + +I repeated my thoughts to Jack, who, I was happy to find, quite agreed +with me. "Your best plan," he said, "will be to put very few animals at +first into your tank, and add more as you find it will bear them. And +look here," he added, pointing to the sides of the tank, which, for the +space of two inches above the water-level, were incrusted with salt, "you +must carry your philosophy a little farther, Ralph. That water has +evaporated so much that it is too salt for anything to live in. You will +require to add _fresh_ water now and then, in order to keep it at the +same degree of saltness as the sea." + +"Very true, Jack, that never struck me before," said I. + +"And, now I think of it," continued Jack, "it seems to me that the surest +way of arranging your tank so as to get it to keep pure and in good +condition, will be to imitate the ocean in it. In fact make it a +miniature Pacific. I don't see how you can hope to succeed unless you do +that." + +"Most true," said I, pondering what my companion said. "But I fear that +that will be very difficult." + +"Not at all," cried Jack, rolling his towel up into a ball, and throwing +it into the face of Peterkin, who had been grinning and winking at him +during the last five minutes. "Not at all. Look here. There is water +of a certain saltness in the sea; well, fill your tank with sea water, +and keep it at that saltness by marking the height at which the water +stands on the sides. When it evaporates a little, pour in _fresh_ water +from the brook till it comes up to the mark, and then it will be right, +for the salt does not evaporate with the water. Then, there's lots of +sea-weed in the sea;--well, go and get one or two bits of sea-weed, and +put them into your tank. Of course the weed must be alive, and growing +to little stones; or you can chip a bit off the rocks with the weed +sticking to it. Then, if you like, you can throw a little sand and +gravel into your tank, and the thing's complete." + +"Nay, not quite," said Peterkin, who had been gravely attentive to this +off-hand advice, "not quite; you must first make three little men to dive +in it before it can be said to be perfect, and that would be rather +difficult, I fear, for two of them would require to be philosophers. But +hallo! what's this? I say, Ralph, look here. There's one o' your crabs +up to something uncommon. It's performing the most remarkable operation +for a crab I ever saw,--taking off its coat, I do believe, before going +to bed!" + +We hastily stooped over the tank, and certainly were not a little amused +at the conduct of one of the crabs which still survived it companions. It +was one of the common small crabs, like to those that are found running +about everywhere on the coasts of England. While we gazed at it, we +observed its back to split away from the lower part of its body, and out +of the gap thus formed came a soft lump which moved and writhed +unceasingly. This lump continued to increase in size until it appeared +like a bunch of crab's legs: and, indeed, such it proved in a very few +minutes to be; for the points of the toes were at length extricated from +this hole in its back, the legs spread out, the body followed, and the +crab walked away quite entire, even to the points of its nipper-claws, +leaving a perfectly entire shell behind it, so that, when we looked, it +seemed as though there were two complete crabs instead of one! + +"Well!" exclaimed Peterkin, drawing a long breath, "I've _heard_ of a man +jumping out of his skin and sitting down in his skeleton in order to cool +himself, but I never expected to _see_ a crab do it!" + +We were, in truth, much amazed at this spectacle, and the more so when we +observed that the new crab was larger than the crab that it came out of. +It was also quite soft, but by next morning its skin had hardened into a +good shell. We came thus to know that crabs grow in this way, and not by +the growing of their shells, as we had always thought before we saw this +wonderful operation. + +Now I considered well the advice which Jack had given me about preparing +my tank, and the more I thought of it, the more I came to regard it as +very sound and worthy of being acted on. So I forthwith put his plan in +execution, and found it to answer excellently well, indeed much beyond my +expectation; for I found that after a little experience had taught me the +proper proportion of sea-weed and animals to put into a certain amount of +water, the tank needed no farther attendance; and, moreover, I did not +require ever afterwards to renew or change the sea-water, but only to add +a very little fresh water from the brook, now and then, as the other +evaporated. I therefore concluded that if I had been suddenly conveyed, +along with my tank, into some region where there was no salt sea at all, +my little sea and my sea-fish would have continued to thrive and to +prosper notwithstanding. This made me greatly to desire that those +people in the world who live far inland might know of my wonderful tank, +and, by having materials like to those of which it was made conveyed to +them, thus be enabled to watch the habits of those most mysterious +animals that reside in the sea, and examine with their own eyes the +wonders of the great deep. + +For many days after this, while Peterkin and Jack were busily employed in +building a little boat out of the curious natural planks of the chestnut +tree, I spent much of my time in examining with the burning-glass the +marvellous operations that were constantly going on in my tank. Here I +saw those anemones which cling, like little red, yellow, and green blobs +of jelly, to the rocks, put forth, as it were, a multitude of arms and +wait till little fish or other small animalcules unwarily touched them, +when they would instantly seize them, fold arm after arm around their +victims, and so engulf them in their stomachs. Here I saw the ceaseless +working of those little coral insects whose efforts have encrusted the +islands of the Pacific with vast rocks, and surrounded them with enormous +reefs. And I observed that many of these insects, though extremely +minute, were very beautiful, coming out of their holes in a circle of +fine threads, and having the form of a shuttle-cock. Here I saw curious +little barnacles opening a hole in their backs and constantly putting out +a thin feathery hand, with which, I doubt not, they dragged their food +into their mouths. Here, also, I saw those crabs which have shells only +on the front of their bodies, but no shell whatever on their remarkably +tender tails, so that, in order to find a protection to them, they thrust +them into the empty shells of wilks, or some such fish, and when they +grow too big for one, change into another. But, most curious of all, I +saw an animal which had the wonderful power, when it became ill, of +casting its stomach and its teeth away from it, and getting an entirely +new set in the course of a few months! All this I saw, and a great deal +more, by means of my tank and my burning-glass, but I refrain from +setting down more particulars here, as I have still much to tell of the +adventures that befell us while we remained on this island. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + +Notable discovery at the spouting cliffs--The mysterious green monster +explained--We are thrown into unutterable terror by the idea that Jack is +drowned--The Diamond Cave. + +"Come, Jack," cried Peterkin, one morning about three weeks after our +return from our long excursion, "let's be jolly to-day, and do something +vigorous. I'm quite tired of hammering and hammering, hewing and +screwing, cutting and butting, at that little boat of ours, that seems as +hard to build as Noah's ark; let us go on an excursion to the mountain +top, or have a hunt after the wild ducks, or make a dash at the pigs. I'm +quite flat--flat as bad ginger-beer--flat as a pancake; in fact, I want +something to rouse me, to toss me up, as it were. Eh! what do you say to +it?" + +"Well," answered Jack, throwing down the axe with which he was just about +to proceed towards the boat, "if that's what you want, I would recommend +you to make an excursion to the water-spouts; the last one we had to do +with tossed you up a considerable height, perhaps the next will send you +higher, who knows, if you're at all reasonable or moderate in your +expectations!" + +"Jack, my dear boy," said Peterkin, gravely, "you are really becoming too +fond of jesting. It's a thing I don't at all approve of, and if you +don't give it up, I fear that, for our mutual good, we shall have to +part." + +"Well, then, Peterkin," replied Jack, with a smile, "what would you +have?" + +"Have?" said Peterkin, "I would _have_ nothing. I didn't say I wanted to +_have_; I said that I wanted to _do_." + +"By the by," said I, interrupting their conversation, "I am reminded by +this that we have not yet discovered the nature of yon curious appearance +that we saw near the water-spouts, on our journey round the island. +Perhaps it would be well to go for that purpose." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Peterkin, "I know the nature of it well enough." + +"What was it?" said I. + +"It was of a _mysterious_ nature to be sure!" said he, with a wave of his +hand, while he rose from the log on which he had been sitting, and +buckled on his belt, into which he thrust his enormous club. + +"Well then, let us away to the water-spouts," cried Jack, going up to the +bower for his bow and arrows; "and bring your spear, Peterkin. It may be +useful." + +We now, having made up our minds to examine into this matter, sallied +forth eagerly in the direction of the water-spout rocks, which, as I have +before mentioned, were not far from our present place of abode. On +arriving there we hastened down to the edge of the rocks, and gazed over +into the sea, where we observed the pale-green object still distinctly +visible, moving its tail slowly to and fro in the water. + +"Most remarkable!" said Jack. + +"Exceedingly curious," said I. + +"Beats everything!" said Peterkin. + +"Now, Jack," he added, "you made such a poor figure in your last attempt +to stick that object, that I would advise you to let me try it. If it +has got a heart at all, I'll engage to send my spear right through the +core of it; if it hasn't got a heart, I'll send it through the spot where +its heart ought to be." + +"Fire away, then, my boy," replied Jack with a laugh. + +Peterkin immediately took the spear, poised it for a second or two above +his head, then darted it like an arrow into the sea. Down it went +straight into the centre of the green object, passed quite through it, +and came up immediately afterwards, pure and unsullied, while the +mysterious tail moved quietly as before! + +"Now," said Peterkin, gravely, "that brute is a heartless monster; I'll +have nothing more to do with it." + +"I'm pretty sure now," said Jack, "that it is merely a phosphoric light; +but I must say I'm puzzled at its staying always in that exact spot." + +I also was much puzzled, and inclined to think with Jack that it must be +phosphoric light; of which luminous appearance we had seen much while on +our voyage to these seas. "But," said I, "there is nothing to hinder us +from diving down to it, now that we are sure it is not a shark." + +"True," returned Jack, stripping off his clothes; "I'll go down, Ralph, +as I'm better at diving than you are. Now then, Peterkin, out o' the +road!" Jack stepped forward, joined his hands above his head, bent over +the rocks, and plunged into the sea. For a second or two the spray +caused by his dive hid him from view, then the water became still, and we +saw him swimming far down in the midst of the green object. Suddenly he +sank below it, and vanished altogether from our sight! We gazed +anxiously down at the spot where he had disappeared, for nearly a minute, +expecting every moment to see him rise again for breath; but fully a +minute passed, and still he did not reappear. Two minutes passed! and +then a flood of alarm rushed in upon my soul, when I considered that +during all my acquaintance with him, Jack had never stayed underwater +more than a minute at a time; indeed seldom so long. + +"Oh, Peterkin!" I said, in a voice that trembled with increasing anxiety, +"something has happened. It is more than three minutes now!" But +Peterkin did not answer and I observed that he was gazing down into the +water with a look of intense fear mingled with anxiety, while his face +was overspread with a deadly paleness. Suddenly he sprang to his feet +and rushed about in a frantic state, wringing his hands, and exclaiming, +"Oh, Jack, Jack! he is gone! It must have been a shark, and he is gone +for ever!" + +For the next five minutes I know not what I did. The intensity of my +feelings almost bereft me of my senses. But I was recalled to myself by +Peterkin seizing me by the shoulder and staring wildly into my face, +while he exclaimed, "Ralph! Ralph! perhaps he has only fainted. Dive for +him, Ralph!" + +It seemed strange that this did not occur to me sooner. In a moment I +rushed to the edge of the rocks, and, without waiting to throw off my +garments, was on the point to spring into the waves, when I observed +something black rising up through the green object. In another moment +Jack's head rose to the surface, and he gave a wild shout, flinging back +the spray from his locks, as was his wont after a dive. Now we were +almost as much amazed at seeing him reappear, well and strong, as we had +been at first at his non-appearance; for, to the best of our judgment, he +had been nearly ten minutes under water, perhaps longer, and it required +no exertion of our reason to convince us that this was utterly impossible +for mortal man to do and retain his strength and faculties. It was +therefore with a feeling akin to superstitious awe that I held down my +hand and assisted him to clamber up the steep rocks. But no such feeling +affected Peterkin. No sooner did Jack gain the rocks and seat himself on +one, panting for breath, than he threw his arms round his neck, and burst +into a flood of tears. "Oh, Jack, Jack!" said he, "where were you? What +kept you so long?" + +After a few moments Peterkin became composed enough to sit still and +listen to Jack's explanation, although he could not restrain himself from +attempting to wink every two minutes at me, in order to express his joy +at Jack's safety. I say he attempted to wink, but I am bound to add that +he did not succeed, for his eyes were so much swollen with weeping, that +his frequent attempts only resulted in a series of violent and altogether +idiotical contortions of the face, that were very far from expressing +what he intended. However, I knew what the poor fellow meant by it, so I +smiled to him in return, and endeavoured to make believe that he was +winking. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, when we were composed enough to listen to him, +"yon green object is not a shark; it is a stream of light issuing from a +cave in the rocks. Just after I made my dive, I observed that this light +came from the side of the rock above which we are now sitting; so I +struck out for it, and saw an opening into some place or other that +appeared to be luminous within. For one instant I paused to think +whether I ought to venture. Then I made up my mind, and dashed into it. +For you see, Peterkin, although I take some time to tell this, it +happened in the space of a few seconds, so that I knew I had wind enough +in me to serve to bring me out o' the hole and up to the surface again. +Well, I was just on the point of turning,--for I began to feel a little +uncomfortable in such a place,--when it seemed to me as if there was a +faint light right above me. I darted upwards, and found my head out of +water. This relieved me greatly, for I now felt that I could take in air +enough to enable me to return the way I came. Then it all at once +occurred to me that I might not be able to find the way out again; but, +on glancing downwards, my mind was put quite at rest by seeing the green +light below me streaming into the cave, just like the light that we had +seen streaming out of it, only what I now saw was much brighter. + +"At first I could scarcely see anything as I gazed around me, it was so +dark; but gradually my eyes became accustomed to it, and I found that I +was in a huge cave, part of the walls of which I observed on each side of +me. The ceiling just above me was also visible, and I fancied that I +could perceive beautiful glittering objects there, but the farther end of +the cave was shrouded in darkness. While I was looking around me in +great wonder, it came into my head that you two would think I was +drowned; so I plunged down through the passage again in a great hurry, +rose to the surface, and--here I am!" + +When Jack concluded his recital of what he had seen in this remarkable +cave, I could not rest satisfied till I had dived down to see it; which I +did, but found it so dark, as Jack had said, that I could scarcely see +anything. When I returned, we had a long conversation about it, during +which I observed that Peterkin had a most lugubrious expression on his +countenance. + +"What's the matter, Peterkin?" said I. + +"The matter?" he replied. "It's all very well for you two to be talking +away like mermaids about the wonders of this cave, but you know I must be +content to hear about it, while you are enjoying yourselves down there +like mad dolphins. It's really too bad." + +"I'm very sorry for you, Peterkin, indeed I am," said Jack, "but we +cannot help you. If you would only learn to dive--" + +"Learn to fly, you might as well say!" retorted Peterkin, in a very sulky +tone. + +"If you would only consent to keep still," said I, "we would take you +down with us in ten seconds." + +"Hum!" returned Peterkin; "suppose a salamander was to propose to you +'only to keep still,' and he would carry you through a blazing fire in a +few seconds, what would you say?" + +We both laughed and shook our heads, for it was evident that nothing was +to be made of Peterkin in the water. But we could not rest satisfied +till we had seen more of this cave; so, after further consultation, Jack +and I determined to try if we could take down a torch with us, and set +fire to it in the cavern. This we found to be an undertaking of no small +difficulty; but we accomplished it at last by the following means:--First, +we made a torch of a very inflammable nature out of the bark of a certain +tree, which we cut into strips, and, after twisting, cemented together +with a kind of resin or gum, which we also obtained from another tree; +neither of which trees, however, was known by name to Jack. This, when +prepared, we wrapped up in a great number of plies of cocoa-nut cloth, so +that we were confident it could not get wet during the short time it +should be under water. Then we took a small piece of the tinder, which +we had carefully treasured up lest we should require it, as before said, +when the sun should fail us; also, we rolled up some dry grass and a few +chips, which, with a little bow and drill, like those described before, +we made into another bundle, and wrapped it up in cocoa-nut cloth. When +all was ready we laid aside our garments, with the exception of our +trousers, which, as we did not know what rough scraping against the rocks +we might be subjected to, we kept on. + +Then we advanced to the edge of the rocks, Jack carrying one bundle, with +the torch; I the other, with the things for producing fire. + +"Now don't weary for us, Peterkin, should we be gone some time," said +Jack; "we'll be sure to return in half-an-hour at the very latest, +however interesting the cave should be, that we may relieve your mind." + +"Farewell!" said Peterkin, coming up to us with a look of deep but +pretended solemnity, while he shook hands and kissed each of us on the +cheek. "Farewell! and while you are gone I shall repose my weary limbs +under the shelter of this bush, and meditate on the changefulness of all +things earthly, with special reference to the forsaken condition of a +poor ship-wrecked sailor boy!" So saying, Peterkin waved his hand, +turned from us, and cast himself upon the ground with a look of +melancholy resignation, which was so well feigned, that I would have +thought it genuine had he not accompanied it with a gentle wink. We both +laughed, and, springing from the rocks together, plunged head first into +the sea. + +We gained the interior of the submarine cave without difficulty, and, on +emerging from the waves, supported ourselves for some time by treading- +water, while we held the two bundles above our heads. This we did in +order to let our eyes become accustomed to the obscurity. Then, when we +could see sufficiently, we swam to a shelving rock, and landed in safety. +Having wrung the water from our trousers, and dried ourselves as well as +we could under the circumstances, we proceeded to ignite the torch. This +we accomplished without difficulty in a few minutes; and no sooner did it +flare up than we were struck dumb with the wonderful objects that were +revealed to our gaze. The roof of the cavern just above us seemed to be +about ten feet high, but grew higher as it receded into the distance, +until it was lost in darkness. It seemed to be made of coral, and was +supported by massive columns of the same material. Immense icicles (as +they appeared to us) hung from it in various places. These, however, +were formed, not of ice, but of a species of limestone, which seemed to +flow in a liquid form towards the point of each, where it became solid. A +good many drops fell, however, to the rock below, and these formed little +cones, which rose to meet the points above. Some of them had already +met, and thus we saw how the pillars were formed, which at first seemed +to us as if they had been placed there by some human architect to support +the roof. As we advanced farther in, we saw that the floor was composed +of the same material as the pillars; and it presented the curious +appearance of ripples, such as are formed on water when gently ruffled by +the wind. There were several openings on either hand in the walls, that +seemed to lead into other caverns; but these we did not explore at this +time. We also observed that the ceiling was curiously marked in many +places, as if it were the fret-work of a noble cathedral; and the walls, +as well as the roof, sparkled in the light of our torch, and threw back +gleams and flashes, as if they were covered with precious stones. +Although we proceeded far into this cavern, we did not come to the end of +it; and we were obliged to return more speedily than we would otherwise +have done, as our torch was nearly expended. We did not observe any +openings in the roof, or any indications of places whereby light might +enter; but near the entrance to the cavern stood an immense mass of pure +white coral rock, which caught and threw back the little light that found +an entrance through the cave's mouth, and thus produced, we conjectured, +the pale-green object which had first attracted our attention. We +concluded, also, that the reflecting power of this rock was that which +gave forth the dim light that faintly illumined the first part of the +cave. + +Before diving through the passage again we extinguished the small piece +of our torch that remained, and left it in a dry spot; conceiving that we +might possibly stand in need of it, if at any future time we should +chance to wet our torch while diving into the cavern. As we stood for a +few minutes after it was out, waiting till our eyes became accustomed to +the gloom, we could not help remarking the deep, intense stillness and +the unutterable gloom of all around us; and, as I thought of the +stupendous dome above, and the countless gems that had sparkled in the +torch-light a few minutes before, it came into my mind to consider how +strange it is that God should make such wonderful and exquisitely beautiful +works never to be seen at all, except, indeed, by chance visitors such as +ourselves. + +I afterwards found that there were many such caverns among the islands of +the South Seas, some of them larger and more beautiful than the one I +have just described. + +"Now, Ralph, are you ready?" said Jack, in a low voice, that seemed to +echo up into the dome above. + +"Quite ready." + +"Come along, then," said he; and, plunging off the ledge of the rock into +the water, we dived through the narrow entrance. In a few seconds we +were panting on the rocks above, and receiving the congratulations of our +friend Peterkin. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + +Strange peculiarity of the tides--Also of the twilight--Peterkin's +remarkable conduct in embracing a little pig and killing a big sow--Sage +remarks on jesting--Also on love. + +It was quite a relief to us to breathe the pure air and to enjoy the glad +sunshine after our long ramble in the Diamond Cave, as we named it; for, +although we did not stay more than half an hour away, it seemed to us +much longer. While we were dressing, and during our walk home, we did +our best to satisfy the curiosity of poor Peterkin, who seemed to regret, +with lively sincerity, his inability to dive. + +There was no help for it, however, so we condoled with him as we best +could. Had there been any great rise or fall in the tide of these seas, +we might perhaps have found it possible to take him down with us at low +water; but as the tide never rose or fell more than eighteen inches or +two feet, this was impossible. + +This peculiarity of the tide--its slight rise and fall--had not attracted +our observation till some time after our residence on the island. Neither +had we observed another curious circumstance until we had been some time +there. This was the fact, that the tide rose and fell with constant +regularity, instead of being affected by the changes of the moon as in +our own country, and as it is in most other parts of the world,--at least +in all those parts with which I am acquainted. Every day and every +night, at twelve o'clock precisely, the tide is at the full; and at six +o'clock every morning and evening it is ebb. I can speak with much +confidence on this singular circumstance, as we took particular note of +it, and never found it to alter. Of course, I must admit, we had to +guess the hour of twelve midnight, and I think we could do this pretty +correctly; but in regard to twelve noon we are quite positive, because we +easily found the highest point that the sun reached in the sky by placing +ourselves at a certain spot whence we observed the sharp summit of a +cliff resting against the sky, just where the sun passed. + +Jack and I were surprised that we had not noticed this the first few days +of our residence here, and could only account for it by our being so much +taken up with the more obvious wonders of our novel situation. I have +since learned, however, that this want of observation is a sad and very +common infirmity of human nature, there being hundreds of persons before +whose eyes the most wonderful things are passing every day, who +nevertheless are totally ignorant of them. I therefore have to record my +sympathy with such persons, and to recommend to them a course of conduct +which I have now for a long time myself adopted,--namely, the habit of +forcing my attention upon _all_ things that go on around me, and of +taking some degree of interest in them, whether I feel it naturally or +not. I suggest this the more earnestly, though humbly, because I have +very frequently come to know that my indifference to a thing has +generally been caused by my ignorance in regard to it. + +We had much serious conversation on this subject of the tides; and Jack +told us, in his own quiet, philosophical way, that these tides did great +good to the world in many ways, particularly in the way of cleansing the +shores of the land, and carrying off the filth that was constantly poured +into the sea there-from; which, Peterkin suggested, was remarkably _tidy_ +of it to do. Poor Peterkin could never let slip an opportunity to joke, +however inopportune it might be: which at first we found rather a +disagreeable propensity, as it often interrupted the flow of very +agreeable conversation; and, indeed, I cannot too strongly record my +disapprobation of this tendency in general: but we became so used to it +at last that we found it no interruption whatever; indeed, strange to +say, we came to feel that it was a necessary part of our enjoyment (such +is the force of habit), and found the sudden outbursts of mirth, +resulting from his humorous disposition, quite natural and refreshing to +us in the midst of our more serious conversations. But I must not +misrepresent Peterkin. We often found, to our surprise, that he knew +many things which we did not; and I also observed that those things which +he learned from experience were never forgotten. From all these things I +came at length to understand that things very opposite and dissimilar in +themselves, when united, do make an agreeable whole; as, for example, we +three on this our island, although most unlike in many things, when +united, made a trio so harmonious that I question if there ever met +before such an agreeable triumvirate. There was, indeed, no note of +discord whatever in the symphony we played together on that sweet Coral +Island; and I am now persuaded that this was owing to our having been all +tuned to the same key, namely, that of _love_! Yes, we loved one another +with much fervency while we lived on that island; and, for the matter of +that, we love each other still. + +And while I am on this subject, or rather the subject that just preceded +it--namely, the tides--I may here remark on another curious natural +phenomenon. We found that there was little or no twilight in this +island. We had a distinct remembrance of the charming long twilight at +home, which some people think the most delightful part of the day, though +for my part I have always preferred sunrise; and when we first landed, we +used to sit down on some rocky point or eminence, at the close of our +day's work, to enjoy the evening breeze; but no sooner had the sun sunk +below the horizon than all became suddenly dark. This rendered it +necessary that we should watch the sun when we happened to be out +hunting, for to be suddenly left in the dark while in the woods was very +perplexing, as, although the stars shone with great beauty and +brilliancy, they could not pierce through the thick umbrageous boughs +that interlaced above our heads. + +But, to return: After having told all we could to Peterkin about the +Diamond Cave under Spouting Cliff, as we named the locality, we were +wending our way rapidly homewards, when a grunt and a squeal were borne +down by the land breeze to our ears. + +"That's the ticket!" was Peterkin's remarkable exclamation, as he started +convulsively, and levelled his spear. + +"Hist!" cried Jack; "these are your friends, Peterkin. They must have +come over expressly to pay you a friendly visit, for it is the first time +we have seen them on this side the island." + +"Come along!" cried Peterkin, hurrying towards the wood, while Jack and I +followed, smiling at his impatience. + +Another grunt and half a dozen squeals, much louder than before, came +down the valley. At this time we were just opposite the small vale which +lay between the Valley of the Wreck and Spouting Cliff. + +"I say, Peterkin," cried Jack, in a hoarse whisper. + +"Well, what is't?" + +"Stay a bit, man. These grunters are just up there on the hill side. If +you go and stand with Ralph in the lee of yon cliff, I'll cut round +behind and drive them through the gorge, so that you'll have a better +chance of picking out a good one. Now, mind you pitch into a fat young +pig, Peterkin," added Jack, as he sprang into the bushes. + +"Won't I, just!" said Peterkin, licking his lips, as we took our station +beside the cliff. "I feel quite a tender affection for young pigs in my +heart. Perhaps it would be more correct to say in my s--." + +"There they come!" cried I, as a terrific yell from Jack sent the whole +herd screaming down the hill. Now, Peterkin, being unable to hold back, +crept a short way up a very steep grassy mound, in order to get a better +view of the hogs before they came up; and just as he raised his head +above its summit, two little pigs, which had outrun their companions, +rushed over the top with the utmost precipitation. One of these brushed +close past Peterkin's ear; the other, unable to arrest its headlong +flight, went, as Peterkin himself afterwards expressed it, "bash" into +his arms with a sudden squeal, which was caused more by the force of the +blow than the will of the animal, and both of them rolled violently down +to the foot of the mound. No sooner was this reached than the little pig +recovered its feet, tossed up its tail, and fled shrieking from the spot. +But I slang a large stone after it, which, being fortunately well aimed, +hit it behind the ear, and felled it to the earth. + +"Capital, Ralph! that's your sort!" cried Peterkin, who, to my surprise +and great relief, had risen to his feet. Apparently unhurt, though much +dishevelled, he rushed franticly towards the gorge, which the yells of +the hogs told us they were now approaching. I had made up my mind that I +would abstain from killing another, as, if Peterkin should be successful, +two were more than sufficient for our wants at the present time. Suddenly +they all burst forth,--two or three little round ones in advance, and an +enormous old sow with a drove of hogs at her heels. + +"Now, Peterkin," said I, "there's a nice little fat one; just spear it." + +But Peterkin did not move; he allowed it to pass unharmed. I looked at +him in surprise, and saw that his lips were compressed and his eyebrows +knitted, as if he were about to fight with some awful enemy. + +"What is it?" I inquired, with some trepidation. + +Suddenly he levelled his spear, darted forward, and, with a yell that +nearly froze the blood in my veins, stabbed the old sow to the heart. +Nay, so vigorously was it done that the spear went in at one side and +came out at the other! + +"Oh, Peterkin!" said I, going up to him, "what have you done?" + +"Done? I've killed their great-great-grandmother, that's all," said he, +looking with a somewhat awe-struck expression at the transfixed animal. + +"Hallo! what's this?" said Jack, as he came up. "Why, Peterkin, you must +be fond of a tough chop. If you mean to eat this old hog, she'll try +your jaws, I warrant. What possessed you to stick _her_, Peterkin?" + +"Why, the fact is I want a pair of shoes." + +"What have your shoes to do with the old hog?' said I, smiling. + +"My present shoes have certainly nothing to do with her," replied +Peterkin; "nevertheless she will have a good deal to do with my future +shoes. The fact is, when I saw you floor that pig so neatly, Ralph, it +struck me that there was little use in killing another. Then I +remembered all at once that I had long wanted some leather or tough +substance to make shoes of, and this old grandmother seemed so tough that +I just made up my mind to stick her, and you see I've done it!" + +"That you certainly have, Peterkin," said Jack, as he was examining the +transfixed animal. + +We now considered how we were to carry our game home, for, although the +distance was short, the hog was very heavy. At length we hit on the plan +of tying its four feet together, and passing the spear handle between +them. Jack took one end on his shoulder, I took the other on mine, and +Peterkin carried the small pig. + +Thus we returned in triumph to our bower, laden, as Peterkin remarked, +with the glorious spoils of a noble hunt. As he afterwards spoke in +similarly glowing terms in reference to the supper that followed, there +is every reason to believe that we retired that night to our leafy beds +in a high state of satisfaction. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + +Boat-building extraordinary--Peterkin tries his hand at cookery and fails +most signally--The boat finished--Curious conversation with the cat, and +other matters. + +For many days after this Jack applied himself with unremitting assiduity +to the construction of our boat, which at length began to look somewhat +like one. But those only who have had the thing to do can entertain a +right idea of the difficulty involved in such an undertaking, with no +other implements than an axe, a bit of hoop-iron, a sail-needle, and a +broken pen-knife. But Jack did it. He was of, that disposition which +_will_ not be conquered. When he believed himself to be acting rightly, +he overcame all obstacles. I have seen Jack, when doubtful whether what +he was about to do were right or wrong, as timid and vacillating as a +little girl,--and I honour him for it! + +As this boat was a curiosity in its way, a few words here relative to the +manner of its construction may not be amiss. + +I have already mentioned the chestnut tree with its wonderful buttresses +or planks. This tree, then, furnished us with the chief part of our +material. First of all Jack sought out a limb of a tree of such a form +and size as, while it should form the keel a bend at either end should +form the stem and stern posts. Such a piece, however, was not easy to +obtain, but at last he procured it, by rooting up a small tree which had +a branch growing at the proper angle about ten feet up its stem, with two +strong roots growing in such a form as enabled him to make a flat-sterned +boat. This placed, he procured three branching roots of suitable size, +which he fitted to the keel at equal distances, thus forming three strong +ribs. Now, the squaring and shaping of these, and the cutting of the +grooves in the keel, was an easy enough matter, as it was all work for +the axe, in the use of which Jack was become wonderfully expert; but it +was quite a different affair when he came to nailing the ribs to the +keel, for we had no instrument capable of boring a large hole, and no +nails to fasten them with. We were, indeed, much perplexed here; but +Jack at length devised an instrument that served very well. He took the +remainder of our hoop-iron and beat it into the form of a pipe or +cylinder, about as thick as a man's finger. This he did by means of our +axe and the old rusty axe we had found at the house of the poor man at +the other side of the island. This, when made red hot, bored slowly +though the timbers; and, the better to retain the heat, Jack shut up one +end of it and filled it with sand. True, the work was very slowly done, +but it mattered not--we had little else to do. Two holes were bored in +each timber, about an inch and a half apart, and also down into the keel, +but not quite through. Into these were placed stout pegs made of a tree +called iron-wood; and, when they were hammered well home, the timbers +were as firmly fixed as if they had been nailed with iron. The gunwales, +which were very stout, were fixed in a similar manner. But, besides the +wooden nails, they were firmly lashed to the stem and stern posts and +ribs by means of a species of cordage which we had contrived to make out +of the fibrous husk of the cocoa nut. This husk was very tough, and when +a number of the threads were joined together they formed excellent +cordage. At first we tied the different lengths together, but this was +such a clumsy and awkward complication of knots, that we contrived, by +careful interlacing of the ends together before twisting, to make good +cordage of any size or length we chose. Of course it cost us much time +and infinite labour, but Jack kept up our spirits when we grew weary, and +so all that we required was at last constructed. + +Planks were now cut off the chestnut trees of about an inch thick. These +were dressed with the axe,--but clumsily, for an axe is ill adapted for +such work. Five of these planks on each side were sufficient, and we +formed the boat in a very rounded, barrel-like shape, in order to have as +little twisting of the planks as possible; for, although we could easily +bend them, we could not easily twist them. Having no nails to rivet the +planks with, we threw aside the ordinary fashion of boat building and +adopted one of our own. The planks were therefore placed on each other's +edges, and sewed together with the tough cordage already mentioned. They +were also thus sewed to the stem, the stern, and the keel. Each stitch +or tie was six inches apart, and was formed thus: Three holes were bored +in the upper plank and three in the lower,--the holes being above each +other, that is, in a vertical line. Through these holes the cord was +passed, and, when tied, formed a powerful stitch of three ply. Besides +this, we placed between the edges of the planks, layers of cocoa-nut +fibre, which, as it swelled when wetted, would, we hoped, make our little +vessel water-tight. But in order further to secure this end, we +collected a large quantity of pitch from the bread-fruit tree, with +which, when boiled in our old iron pot, we payed the whole of the inside +of the boat, and, while it was yet hot, placed large pieces of cocoa-nut +cloth on it, and then gave it another coat above that. Thus the interior +was covered with a tough water-tight material; while the exterior, being +uncovered, and so exposed to the swelling action of the water, was we +hoped, likely to keep the boat quite dry. I may add that our hopes were +not disappointed. + +While Jack was thus engaged, Peterkin and I sometimes assisted him, but, +as our assistance was not much required, we more frequently went +a-hunting on the extensive mud-flats at the entrance of the long valley +which lay nearest to our bower. Here we found large flocks of ducks of +various kinds, some of them bearing so much resemblance to the wild ducks +of our own country that I think they must have been the same. On these +occasions we took the bow and the sling, with both of which we were often +successful, though I must confess I was the least so. Our suppers were +thus pleasantly varied, and sometimes we had such a profusion spread out +before us that we frequently knew not with which of the dainties to +begin. + +I must also add, that the poor old cat which we had brought home had +always a liberal share of our good things, and so well was it looked +after, especially by Peterkin, that it recovered much of its former +strength, and seemed to improve in sight as well as hearing. + +{Leaving for the "mud-flats": p175.jpg} + +The large flat stone, or rock of coral, which stood just in front of the +entrance to our bower, was our table. On this rock we had spread out the +few articles we possessed the day we were shipwrecked; and on the same +rock, during many a day afterwards, we spread out the bountiful supply +with which we had been blessed on our Coral Island. Sometimes we sat +down at this table to a feast consisting of hot rolls,--as Peterkin +called the newly baked bread fruit,--a roast pig, roast duck, boiled and +roasted yams, cocoa nuts, taro, and sweet potatoes; which we followed up +with a dessert of plums, apples, and plantains,--the last being a large- +sized and delightful fruit, which grew on a large shrub or tree not more +than twelve feet high, with light-green leaves of enormous length and +breadth. These luxurious feasts were usually washed down with cocoa-nut +lemonade. + +Occasionally Peterkin tried to devise some new dish,--"a conglomerate," +as he used to say; but these generally turned out such atrocious +compounds that he was ultimately induced to give up his attempts in +extreme disgust. Not forgetting, however, to point out to Jack that his +failure was a direct contradiction to the proverb which he, Jack, was +constantly thrusting down his throat, namely, that "where there's a will +there's a way." For he had a great will to become a cook, but could by +no means find a way to accomplish that end. + +One day, while Peterkin and I were seated beside our table on which +dinner was spread, Jack came up from the beach, and, flinging down his +axe, exclaimed,-- + +"There, lads, the boat's finished at last! so we've nothing to do now but +shape two pair of oars, and then we may put to sea as soon as we like." + +This piece of news threw us into a state of great joy; for although we +were aware that the boat had been gradually getting near its completion, +it had taken so long that we did not expect it to be quite ready for at +least two or three weeks. But Jack had wrought hard and said nothing, in +order to surprise us. + +"My dear fellow," cried Peterkin, "you're a perfect trump. But why did +you not tell us it was so nearly ready? won't we have a jolly sail to- +morrow? eh?" + +"Don't talk so much, Peterkin," said Jack; "and, pray, hand me a bit of +that pig." + +"Certainly, my dear," cried Peterkin, seizing the axe; "what part will +you have? a leg, or a wing, or a piece of the breast; which?" + +"A hind leg, if you please," answered Jack; "and, pray, be so good as to +include the tail." + +"With all my heart," said Peterkin, exchanging the axe for his hoop-iron +knife, with which he cut off the desired portion. "I'm only too glad, my +dear boy, to see that your appetite is so wholesale; and there's no +chance whatever of its dwindling down into re-tail again, at least in so +far as this pig is concerned. Ralph, lad, why don't you laugh?--eh?" he +added turning suddenly to me with a severe look of inquiry. + +"Laugh?" said I; "what at, Peterkin? why should I laugh?" + +Both Jack and Peterkin answered this inquiry by themselves laughing so +immoderately that I was induced to believe I had missed noticing some +good joke, so I begged that it might be explained to me; but as this only +produced repeated roars of laughter, I smiled and helped myself to +another slice of plantain. + +"Well, but," continued Peterkin, "I was talking of a sail to-morrow. +Can't we have one, Jack?" + +"No," replied Jack, "we can't have a sail, but I hope we shall have a +row, as I intend to work hard at the oars this afternoon, and, if we +can't get them finished by sunset we'll light our candle-nuts, and turn +them out of hands before we turn into bed." + +"Very good," said Peterkin, tossing a lump of pork to the cat, who +received it with a mew of satisfaction. "I'll help you, if I can." + +"Afterwards," continued Jack, "we will make a sail out of the cocoa-nut +cloth, and rig up a mast, and then we shall be able to sail to some of +the other islands, and visit our old friends the penguins." + +The prospect of being so soon in a position to extend our observations to +the other islands, and enjoy a sail over the beautiful sea, afforded us +much delight, and, after dinner, we set about making the oars in good +earnest. Jack went into the woods and blocked them roughly out with the +axe, and I smoothed them down with the knife, while Peterkin remained in +the bower, spinning, or, rather, twisting some strong thick cordage with +which to fasten them to the boat. + +We worked hard and rapidly, so that, when the sun went down, Jack and I +returned to the bower with four stout oars, which required little to be +done to them save a slight degree of polishing with the knife. As we +drew near we were suddenly arrested by the sound of a voice! We were not +a little surprised at this--indeed I may almost say alarmed--for, +although Peterkin was undoubtedly fond of talking, we had never, up to +this time, found him talking to himself. We listened intently, and still +heard the sound of a voice as if in conversation. Jack motioned me to be +silent, and, advancing to the bower on tip-toe, we peeped in. + +The sight that met our gaze was certainly not a little amusing. On the +top of a log which we sometimes used as a table, sat the black cat, with +a very demure expression on its countenance; and in front of it, sitting +on the ground, with his legs extended on either side of the log, was +Peterkin. At the moment we saw him he was gazing intently into the cat's +face, with his nose about four inches from it,--his hands being thrust +into his breeches pockets. + +"Cat," said Peterkin, turning his head a little on one side, "I love +you!" + +There was a pause, as if Peterkin awaited a reply to this affectionate +declaration but the cat said nothing. + +"Do you hear me?" cried Peterkin, sharply. "I love you--I do. Don't you +love me?" + +To this touching appeal the cat said "Mew," faintly. + +"Ah! that's right. You're a jolly old rascal. Why did you not speak at +once? eh?" and Peterkin put forward his mouth and kissed the cat on the +nose! + +"Yes," continued Peterkin, after a pause, "I love you. D'you think I'd +say so if I didn't, you black villain? I love you because I've got to +take care of you, and to look after you, and to think about you, and to +see that you don't die--" + +"Mew, me-a-w!" said the cat. + +"Very good," continued Peterkin, "quite true, I have no doubt; but you've +no right to interrupt me, sir. Hold your tongue till I have done +speaking. Moreover, cat, I love you because you came to me the first +time you ever saw me, and didn't seem to be afraid, and appeared to be +fond of me, though you didn't know that I wasn't going to kill you. Now, +that was brave, that was bold, and very jolly, old boy, and I love you +for it--I do!" + +Again there was a pause of a few minutes, during which the cat looked +placid, and Peterkin dropped his eyes upon its toes as if in +contemplation. Suddenly he looked up. + +"Well, cat, what are you thinking about now? won't speak? eh? Now, tell +me; don't you think it's a monstrous shame that these two scoundrels, +Jack and Ralph, should keep us waiting for our supper so long?" + +Here the cat arose, put up its back and stretched itself; yawned +slightly, and licked the point of Peterkin's nose! + +"Just so, old boy, you're a clever fellow,--I really do believe the brute +understands me!" said Peterkin, while a broad grin overspread his face, +as he drew back and surveyed the cat. + +At this point Jack burst into a loud fit of laughter. The cat uttered an +angry fuff and fled, while Peterkin sprang up and exclaimed,-- + +"Bad luck to you, Jack! you've nearly made the heart jump out of my body, +you have." + +"Perhaps I have," replied Jack, laughing, as we entered the bower, "but, +as I don't intend to keep you or the cat any longer from your supper, I +hope that you'll both forgive me." + +Peterkin endeavoured to turn this affair off with a laugh, but I observed +that he blushed very deeply at the time we discovered ourselves, and he +did not seem to relish any allusion to the subject afterwards; so we +refrained from remarking on it ever after,--though it tickled us not a +little at the time. + +After supper we retired to rest and to dream of wonderful adventures in +our little boat, and distant voyages upon the sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + +The boat launched--We visit the coral reef--The great breaker that never +goes down--Coral insects--The way in which coral islands are made--The +boat's sail--We tax our ingenuity to form fish-hooks--Some of the fish we +saw--And a monstrous whale--Wonderful shower of little fish--Water-spouts. + +It was a bright, clear, beautiful morning, when we first launched our +little boat and rowed out upon the placid waters of the lagoon. Not a +breath of wind ruffled the surface of the deep. Not a cloud spotted the +deep blue sky. Not a sound that was discordant broke the stillness of +the morning, although there were many sounds, sweet, tiny, and melodious, +that mingled in the universal harmony of nature. The sun was just rising +from the Pacific's ample bosom and tipping the mountain tops with a red +glow. The sea was shining like a sheet of glass, yet heaving with the +long deep swell that, all the world round, indicates the life of ocean; +and the bright sea-weeds and the brilliant corals shone in the depths of +that pellucid water, as we rowed over it, like rare and precious gems. +Oh! it was a sight fitted to stir the soul of man to its profoundest +depths, and, if he owned a heart at all, to lift that heart in adoration +and gratitude to the great Creator of this magnificent and glorious +universe. + +At first, in the strength of our delight, we rowed hither and thither +without aim or object. But after the effervescence of our spirits was +abated, we began to look about us and to consider what we should do. + +"I vote that we row to the reef," cried Peterkin. + +"And I vote that we visit the islands within the lagoon," said I. + +"And I vote we do both," cried Jack, "so pull away, boys." + +As I have already said, we had made four oars, but our boat was so small +that only two were necessary. The extra pair were reserved in case any +accident should happen to the others. It was therefore only needful that +two of us should row, while the third steered, by means of an oar, and +relieved the rowers occasionally. + +First we landed on one of the small islands and ran all over it, but saw +nothing worthy of particular notice. Then we landed on a larger island, +on which were growing a few cocoa-nut trees. Not having eaten anything +that morning, we gathered a few of the nuts and breakfasted. After this +we pulled straight out to sea and landed on the coral reef. + +This was indeed a novel and interesting sight to us. We had now been so +long on shore that we had almost forgotten the appearance of breakers, +for there were none within the lagoon; but now, as we stood beside the +foam-crested billow of the open sea, all the enthusiasm of the sailor was +awakened in our breasts; and, as we gazed on the wide-spread ruin of that +single magnificent breaker that burst in thunder at our feet, we forgot +the Coral Island behind us; we forgot our bower and the calm repose of +the scented woods; we forgot all that had passed during the last few +months, and remembered nothing but the storms, the calms, the fresh +breezes and the surging billows of the open sea. + +This huge, ceaseless breaker, to which I have so often alluded, was a +much larger and more sublime object than we had at all imagined it to be. +It rose many yards above the level of the sea, and could be seen +approaching at some distance from the reef. Slowly and majestically it +came on, acquiring greater volume and velocity as it advanced, until it +assumed the form of a clear watery arch, which sparkled in the bright +sun. On it came with resistless and solemn majesty,--the upper edge +lipped gently over, and it fell with a roar that seemed as though the +heart of Ocean were broken in the crash of tumultuous water, while the +foam-clad coral reef appeared to tremble beneath the mighty shock! + +We gazed long and wonderingly at this great sight, and it was with +difficulty we could tear ourselves away from it. As I have once before +mentioned, this wave broke in many places over the reef and scattered +some of its spray into the lagoon, but in most places the reef was +sufficiently broad and elevated to receive and check its entire force. In +many places the coral rocks were covered with vegetation,--the beginning, +as it appeared to us, of future islands. Thus, on this reef, we came to +perceive how most of the small islands of those seas are formed. On one +part we saw the spray of the breaker washing over the rocks, and millions +of little, active, busy creatures continuing the work of building up this +living rampart. At another place, which was just a little too high for +the waves to wash over it, the coral insects were all dead; for we found +that they never did their work above water. They had faithfully +completed the mighty work which their Creator had given them to do, and +they were now all dead. Again, in other spots the ceaseless lashing of +the sea had broken the dead coral in pieces, and cast it up in the form +of sand. Here sea-birds had alighted, little pieces of sea-weed and +stray bits of wood had been washed up, seeds of plants had been carried +by the wind and a few lovely blades of bright green had already sprung +up, which, when they died, would increase the size and fertility of these +emeralds of Ocean. At other places these islets had grown apace, and +were shaded by one or two cocoa-nut trees, which grew, literally, in the +sand, and were constantly washed by the ocean spray; yet, as I have +before remarked, their fruit was most refreshing and sweet to our taste. + +Again at this time Jack and I pondered the formation of the large coral +islands. We could now understand how the low ones were formed, but the +larger islands cost us much consideration, yet we could arrive at no +certain conclusion on the subject. + +Having satisfied our curiosity and enjoyed ourselves during the whole +day, in our little boat, we returned, somewhat wearied, and, withal, +rather hungry, to our bower. + +"Now," said Jack, "as our boat answers so well, we will get a mast and +sail made immediately." + +"So we will," cried Peterkin, as we all assisted to drag the boat above +high-water mark; "we'll light our candle and set about it this very +night. Hurrah, my boys, pull away!" + +As we dragged our boat, we observed that she grated heavily on her keel; +and, as the sands were in this place mingled with broken coral rocks, we +saw portions of the wood being scraped off. + +"Hallo!" cried Jack, on seeing this. "That won't do. Our keel will be +worn off in no time at this rate." + +"So it will," said I, pondering deeply as to how this might be prevented. +But I am not of a mechanical turn, naturally, so I could conceive no +remedy save that of putting a plate of iron on the keel, but as we had no +iron I knew not what was to be done. "It seems to me, Jack," I added, +"that it is impossible to prevent the keel being worn off thus." + +"Impossible!" cried Peterkin, "my dear Ralph, you are mistaken, there is +nothing so easy--" + +"How?" I inquired, in some surprise. + +"Why, by not using the boat at all!" replied Peterkin. + +"Hold your impudent tongue, Peterkin," said Jack, as he shouldered the +oars, "come along with me and I'll give you work to do. In the first +place, you will go and collect cocoa-nut fibre, and set to work to make +sewing twine with it--" + +"Please, captain," interrupted Peterkin, "I've got lots of it made +already,--more than enough, as a little friend of mine used to be in the +habit of saying every day after dinner." + +"Very well," continued Jack; "then you'll help Ralph to collect cocoa-nut +cloth, and cut it into shape, after which we'll make a sail of it. I'll +see to getting the mast and the gearing; so let's to work." + +And to work we went right busily, so that in three days from that time we +had set up a mast and sail, with the necessary rigging, in our little +boat. The sail was not, indeed, very handsome to look at, as it was +formed of a number of oblong patches of cloth; but we had sewed it well +by means of our sail-needle, so that it was strong, which was the chief +point. Jack had also overcome the difficulty about the keel, by pinning +to it a _false_ keel. This was a piece of tough wood, of the same length +and width as the real keel, and about five inches deep. He made it of +this depth because the boat would be thereby rendered not only much more +safe, but more able to beat against the wind; which, in a sea where the +trade-winds blow so long and so steadily in one direction, was a matter +of great importance. This piece of wood was pegged very firmly to the +keel; and we now launched our boat with the satisfaction of knowing that +when the false keel should be scraped off we could easily put on another; +whereas, should the real keel have been scraped away, we could not have +renewed it without taking our boat to pieces, which Peterkin said made +his "marrow quake to think upon." + +The mast and sail answered excellently; and we now sailed about in the +lagoon with great delight, and examined with much interest the appearance +of our island from a distance. Also, we gazed into the depths of the +water, and watched for hours the gambols of the curious and +bright-coloured fish among the corals and sea-weed. Peterkin also made a +fishing line, and Jack constructed a number of hooks, some of which were +very good, others remarkably bad. Some of these hooks were made of iron- +wood, which did pretty well, the wood being extremely hard, and Jack made +them very thick and large. Fish there are not particular. Some of the +crooked bones in fish-heads also answered for this purpose pretty well. +But that which formed our best and most serviceable hook was the brass +finger-ring belonging to Jack. It gave him not a little trouble to +manufacture it. First he cut it with the axe; then twisted it into the +form of a hook. The barb took him several hours to cut. He did it by +means of constant sawing with the broken pen-knife. As for the point, an +hour's rubbing on a piece of sandstone made an excellent one. + +It would be a matter of much time and labour to describe the appearance +of the multitudes of fish that were day after day drawn into our boat by +means of the brass hook. Peterkin always caught them,--for we observed +that he derived much pleasure from fishing,--while Jack and I found ample +amusement in looking on, also in gazing down at the coral groves, and in +baiting the hook. Among the fish that we saw, but did not catch, were +porpoises and sword-fish, whales and sharks. The porpoises came +frequently into our lagoon in shoals, and amused us not a little by their +bold leaps into the air, and their playful gambols in the sea. The sword- +fish were wonderful creatures; some of them apparently ten feet in +length, with an ivory spear, six or eight feet long, projecting from +their noses. We often saw them darting after other fish, and no doubt +they sometimes killed them with their ivory swords. Jack remembered +having heard once of a sword-fish attacking a ship,--which seemed strange +indeed; but, as they are often in the habit of attacking whales, perhaps +it mistook the ship for one. This sword-fish ran against the vessel with +such force, that it drove its sword quite through the thick planks; and +when the ship arrived in harbour, long afterwards, the sword was found +still sticking in it! + +Sharks did not often appear; but we took care never again to bathe in +deep water without leaving one of our number in the boat to give us +warning, if he should see a shark approaching. As for the whales, they +never came into our lagoon, but we frequently saw them spouting in the +deep water beyond the reef. I shall never forget my surprise the first +day I saw one of these huge monsters close to me. We had been rambling +about on the reef during the morning, and were about to re-embark in our +little boat, to return home, when a loud blowing sound caused us to wheel +rapidly round. We were just in time to see a shower of spray falling, +and the flukes or tail of some monstrous fish disappear in the sea a few +hundred yards off. We waited some time to see if he would rise again. As +we stood, the sea seemed to open up at our very feet; an immense spout of +water was sent with a snort high into the air, and the huge blunt head of +a sperm whale arose before us. It was so large that it could easily have +taken our little boat, along with ourselves, into its mouth! It plunged +slowly back into the sea, like a large ship foundering, and struck the +water with its tail so forcibly as to cause a sound like a cannon shot. +We also saw a great number of flying fish, although we caught none; and +we noticed that they never flew out of the water except when followed by +their bitter foe, the dolphin, from whom they thus endeavoured to escape. +But of all the fish that we saw, none surprised us so much as those that +we used to find in shallow pools after a shower of rain; and this not on +account of their appearance, for they were ordinary-looking and very +small, but on account of their having descended in a shower of rain! We +could account for them in no other way, because the pools in which we +found these fish were quite dry before the shower, and at some distance +above high-water mark. Jack, however, suggested a cause which seemed to +me very probable. We used often to see water-spouts in the sea. A water- +spout is a whirling body of water, which rises from the sea like a sharp- +pointed pillar. After rising a good way, it is met by a long tongue, +which comes down from the clouds; and when the two have joined, they look +something like an hour-glass. The water-spout is then carried by the +wind, sometimes gently, sometimes with violence, over the sea, sometimes +up into the clouds, and then, bursting asunder, it descends in a deluge. +This often happens over the land as well as over the sea; and it +sometimes does much damage, but frequently it passes gently away. Now, +Jack thought that the little fish might perhaps have been carried up in a +water-spout, and so sent down again in a shower of rain. But we could +not be certain as to this point; yet we thought it likely. + +During these delightful fishing and boating excursions we caught a good +many eels, which we found to be very good to eat. We also found turtles +among the coral rocks, and made excellent soup in our iron kettle. +Moreover, we discovered many shrimps and prawns, so that we had no lack +of variety in our food; and, indeed, we never passed a week without +making some new and interesting discovery of some sort or other, either +on the land or in the sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + +A monster wave and its consequences--The boat lost and found--Peterkin's +terrible accident--Supplies of food for a voyage in the boat--We visit +Penguin Island, and are amazed beyond measure--Account of the penguins. + +One day, not long after our little boat was finished, we were sitting on +the rocks at Spouting Cliff, and talking of an excursion which we +intended to make to Penguin Island the next day. + +"You see," said Peterkin, "it might be all very well for a stupid fellow +like me to remain here and leave the penguins alone, but it would be +quite inconsistent with your characters as philosophers to remain any +longer in ignorance of the habits and customs of these birds; so the +sooner we go the better." + +"Very true," said I; "there is nothing I desire so much as to have a +closer inspection of them." + +"And I think," said Jack, "that you had better remain at home, Peterkin, +to take care of the cat; for I'm sure the hogs will be at it in your +absence, out of revenge for your killing their great-grandmother so +recklessly." + +"Stay at home?" cried Peterkin; "my dear fellow, you would certainly lose +your way, or get upset, if I were not there to take care of you." + +"Ah, true," said Jack, gravely, "that did not occur to me; no doubt you +must go. Our boat does require a good deal of ballast; and all that you +say, Peterkin, carries so much weight with it, that we won't need stones +if you go." + +Now, while my companions were talking, a notable event occurred, which, +as it is not generally known, I shall be particular in recording here. + +While we were talking, as I have said, we noticed a dark line, like a low +cloud or fog-bank, on the seaward horizon. The day was a fine one, +though cloudy, and a gentle breeze was blowing, but the sea was not +rougher, or the breaker on the reef higher, than usual. At first we +thought that this looked like a thunder-cloud; and, as we had had a good +deal of broken weather of late, accompanied by occasional peals of +thunder, we supposed that a storm must be approaching. Gradually, +however, this line seemed to draw nearer, without spreading up over the +sky, as would certainly have been the case if it had been a storm-cloud. +Still nearer it came, and soon we saw that it was moving swiftly towards +the island; but there was no sound till it reached the islands out at +sea. As it passed these islands, we observed, with no little anxiety, +that a cloud of white foam encircled them, and burst in spray into the +air: it was accompanied by a loud roar. This led us to conjecture that +the approaching object was an enormous wave of the sea; but we had no +idea how large it was till it came near to ourselves. When it approached +the outer reef, however, we were awe-struck with its unusual magnitude; +and we sprang to our feet, and clambered hastily up to the highest point +of the precipice, under an indefinable feeling of fear. + +I have said before that the reef opposite Spouting Cliff was very near to +the shore, while, just in front of the bower, it was at a considerable +distance out to sea. Owing to this formation, the wave reached the reef +at the latter point before it struck at the foot of Spouting Cliff. The +instant it touched the reef we became aware, for the first time, of its +awful magnitude. It burst completely over the reef at all points, with a +roar that seemed louder to me than thunder; and this roar continued for +some seconds, while the wave rolled gradually along towards the cliff on +which we stood. As its crest reared before us, we felt that we were in +great danger, and turned to flee; but we were too late. With a crash +that seemed to shake the solid rocks the gigantic billow fell, and +instantly the spouting-holes sent up a gush of water-spouts with such +force that they shrieked on issuing from their narrow vents. It seemed +to us as if the earth had been blown up with water. We were stunned and +confused by the shock, and so drenched and blinded with spray, that we +knew not for a few moments whither to flee for shelter. At length we all +three gained an eminence beyond the reach of the water; but what a scene +of devastation met our gaze as we looked along the shore! This enormous +wave not only burst over the reef, but continued its way across the +lagoon, and fell on the sandy beach of the island with such force that +passed completely over it and dashed into the woods, levelling the +smaller trees and bushes in its headlong course! + +On seeing this, Jack said he feared our bower must have been swept away, +and that the boat, which was on the beach, must have been utterly +destroyed. Our hearts sank within us as we thought of this, and we +hastened round through the woods towards our home. On reaching it we +found, to our great relief of mind, that the force of the wave had been +expended just before reaching the bower; but the entrance to it was +almost blocked up by the torn-up bushes and tangled heaps of sea-weed. +Having satisfied ourselves as to the bower, we hurried to the spot where +the boat had been left; but no boat was there! The spot on which it had +stood was vacant, and no sign of it could we see on looking around us. + +"It may have been washed up into the woods," said Jack, hurrying up the +beach as he spoke. Still, no boat was to be seen, and we were about to +give ourselves over to despair, when Peterkin called to Jack and said,-- + +"Jack, my friend, you were once so exceedingly sagacious and wise as to +make me acquainted with the fact that cocoa nuts grow upon trees; will +you now be so good as to inform me what sort of fruit that is growing on +the top of yonder bush? for I confess to being ignorant, or, at least, +doubtful on the point." + +We looked towards the bush indicated, and there, to our surprise, beheld +our little boat snugly nestled among the leaves! We were very much +overjoyed at this, for we would have suffered any loss rather than the +loss of our boat. We found that the wave had actually borne the boat on +its crest from the beach into the woods, and there launched it into the +heart of this bush; which was extremely fortunate, for had it been tossed +against a rock or a tree, it would have been dashed to pieces, whereas it +had not received the smallest injury. It was no easy matter, however, to +get it out of the bush and down to the sea again. This cost us two days +of hard labour to accomplish. + +We had also much ado to clear away the rubbish from before the bower, and +spent nearly a week in constant labour ere we got the neighbourhood to +look as clean and orderly as before; for the uprooted bushes and sea-weed +that lay on the beach formed a more dreadfully confused-looking mass than +one who had not seen the place after the inundation could conceive. + +Before leaving the subject I may mention, for the sake of those who +interest themselves in the curious natural phenomena of our world, that +this gigantic wave occurs regularly on some of the islands of the +Pacific, once, and sometimes twice in the year. I heard this stated by +the missionaries during my career in those seas. They could not tell me +whether it visited all of the islands, but I was certainly assured that +it occurred periodically in some of them. + +After we had got our home put to rights and cleared of the _debris_ of +the inundation, we again turned our thoughts to paying the penguins a +visit. The boat was therefore overhauled and a few repairs done. Then +we prepared a supply of provisions, for we intended to be absent at least +a night or two, perhaps longer. This took us some time to do, for while +Jack was busy with the boat, Peterkin was sent into the woods to spear a +hog or two, and had to search long, sometimes, ere he found them. +Peterkin was usually sent on this errand, when we wanted a pork chop +(which was not seldom), because he was so active, and could run so +wonderfully fast that he found no difficulty in overtaking the hogs; but, +being dreadfully reckless, he almost invariably tumbled over stumps and +stones in the course of his wild chase, and seldom returned home without +having knocked the skin off his shins. Once, indeed, a more serious +accident happened to him. He had been out all morning alone and did not +return at the usual time to dinner. We wondered at this, for Peterkin +was always very punctual at the dinner hour. As supper-time drew near we +began to be anxious about him, and at length sallied forth to search the +woods. For a long time we sought in vain, but a little before dark we +came upon the tracks of the hogs, which we followed up until we came to +the brow of a rather steep bank or precipice. Looking over this we +beheld Peterkin lying in a state of insensibility at the foot, with his +cheek resting on the snout of a little pig, which was pinned to the earth +by the spear! We were dreadfully alarmed, but hastened to bathe his +forehead with water, and had soon the satisfaction of seeing him revive. +After we had carried him home he related to as how the thing had +happened. + +"You must know," said he, "I walked about all the forenoon, till I was as +tired as an old donkey, without seeing a single grunter, not so much as a +track of one; but, as I was determined not to return empty-handed, I +resolved to go without my dinner and--" + +"What!" exclaimed Jack, "did you _really_ resolve to do that?" + +"Now, Jack, hold your tongue," returned Peterkin; "I say that I resolved +to forego my dinner and to push to the head of the small valley, where I +felt pretty sure of discovering the hogs. I soon found that I was on the +right scent, for I had scarcely walked half a mile in the direction of +the small plum tree we found there the other day, when a squeak fell on +my ear. 'Ho, ho,' said I, 'there you go, my boys;' and I hurried up the +glen. I soon started them, and singling out a fat pig, ran tilt at him. +In a few seconds I was up with him, and stuck my spear right through his +dumpy body. Just as I did so, I saw that we were on the edge of a +precipice, whether high or low I knew not, but I had been running at such +a pace that I could not stop, so the pig and I gave a howl in concert and +went plunging over together. I remembered nothing more after that, till +I came to my senses and found you bathing my temples, and Ralph wringing +his hands over me." + +But although Peterkin was often unfortunate, in the way of getting +tumbles, he was successful on the present occasion in hunting, and +returned before evening with three very nice little hogs. I, also, was +successful in my visit to the mud-flats, where I killed several ducks. So +that, when we launched and loaded our boat at sunrise the following +morning, we found our store of provisions to be more than sufficient. +Part had been cooked the night before, and, on taking note of the +different items, we found the account to stand thus:-- + +10 Bread-fruits, (two baked, eight unbaked.) +20 Yams, (six roasted, the rest raw.) +6 Taro roots. +50 Fine large plums. +6 Cocoa nuts, ripe. +6 Ditto green, (for drinking.) +4 Large ducks and two small ones, raw. +3 Cold roast pigs, with stuffing. + +I may here remark that the stuffing had been devised by Peterkin +specially for the occasion. He kept the manner of its compounding a +profound secret, so I cannot tell what it was; but I can say, with much +confidence, that we found it to be atrociously bad, and, after the first +tasting, scraped it carefully out and threw it overboard. We calculated +that this supply would last us for several days, but we afterwards found +that it was much more than we required, especially in regard to the cocoa +nuts, of which we found large supplies wherever we went. However, as +Peterkin remarked, it was better to have too much than too little, as we +knew not to what straits we might be put during our voyage. + +It was a very calm sunny morning when we launched forth and rowed over +the lagoon towards the outlet in the reef, and passed between the two +green islets that guard the entrance. We experienced some difficulty and +no little danger in passing the surf of the breaker, and shipped a good +deal of water in the attempt; but, once past the billow, we found +ourselves floating placidly on the long oily swell that rose and fell +slowly as it rolled over the wide ocean. + +Penguin Island lay on the other side of our own island, at about a mile +beyond the outer reef, and we calculated that it must be at least twenty +miles distant by the way we should have to go. We might, indeed, have +shortened the way by coasting round our island inside of the lagoon, and +going out at the passage in the reef nearly opposite to Penguin Island, +but we preferred to go by the open sea; first, because it was more +adventurous; and, secondly, because we should have the pleasure of again +feeling the motion of the deep, which we all loved very much, not being +liable to sea sickness. + +"I wish we had a breeze," said Jack. + +"So do I," cried Peterkin, resting on his oar and wiping his heated brow; +"pulling is hard work. Oh dear, if we could only catch a hundred or two +of these gulls, tie them to the boat with long strings, and make them fly +as we want them, how capital it would be!" + +"Or bore a hole through a shark's tail, and reeve a rope through it, eh?" +remarked Jack. "But, I say, it seems that my wish is going to be +granted, for here comes a breeze. Ship your oar, Peterkin. Up with the +mast, Ralph; I'll see to the sail. Mind your helm; look out for +squalls!" + +This last speech was caused by the sudden appearance of a dark blue line +on the horizon, which, in an incredibly short space of time, swept down +on us, lashing up the sea in white foam as it went. We presented the +stern of the boat to its first violence, and, in a few seconds, it +moderated into a steady breeze, to which we spread our sail and flew +merrily over the waves. Although the breeze died away soon afterwards, +it had been so stiff while it lasted, that we were carried over the +greater part of our way before it fell calm again; so that, when the +flapping of the sail against the mast told us that it was time to resume +the oars, we were not much more than a mile from Penguin Island. + +"There go the soldiers!" cried Peterkin as we came in sight of it; "how +spruce their white trousers look, this morning! I wonder if they will +receive us kindly. D'you think they are hospitable, Jack?" + +"Don't talk, Peterkin, but pull away, and you shall see shortly." + +As we drew near to the island we were much amused by the manoeuvres and +appearance of these strange birds. They seemed to be of different +species, for some had crests on their heads while others had none, and +while some were about the size of a goose others appeared nearly as large +as a swan. We also saw a huge albatross soaring above the heads of the +penguins. It was followed and surrounded by numerous flocks of +sea-gulls. Having approached to within a few yards of the island, which +was a low rock, with no other vegetation on it than a few bushes, we lay +on our oars and gazed at the birds with surprise and pleasure, they +returning our gaze with interest. We now saw that their soldier-like +appearance was owing to the stiff, erect manner in which they sat on +their short legs,--"Bolt-up-right," as Peterkin expressed it. They had +black heads, long sharp beaks, white breasts, and bluish backs. Their +wings were so short that they looked more like the fins of a fish, and, +indeed, we soon saw that they used them for the purpose of swimming under +water. There were no quills on these wings, but a sort of scaly +feathers; which also thickly covered their bodies. Their legs were +short, and placed so far back that the birds, while on land, were obliged +to stand quite upright in order to keep their balance; but in the water +they floated like other water-fowl. At first we were so stunned with the +clamour which they and other sea-birds kept up around us, that we knew +not which way to look,--for they covered the rocks in thousands; but, as +we continued to gaze, we observed several quadrupeds (as we thought) +walking in the midst of the penguins. + +"Pull in a bit," cried Peterkin, "and let's see what these are. They +must be fond of noisy company, to consort with such creatures." + +To our surprise we found that these were no other than penguins which had +gone down on all fours, and were crawling among the bushes on their feet +and wings, just like quadrupeds. Suddenly one big old bird, that had +been sitting on a point very near to us, gazing in mute astonishment, +became alarmed, and, scuttling down the rocks, plumped or fell, rather +than ran, into the sea. It dived in a moment, and, a few seconds +afterwards, came out of the water far a-head, with such a spring, and +such a dive back into the sea again, that we could scarcely believe it +was not a fish that had leaped in sport. + +"That beats everything," said Peterkin, rubbing his nose, and screwing up +his face with an expression of exasperated amazement. "I've heard of a +thing being neither fish, flesh, nor fowl, but I never did expect to live +to see a brute that was all three together,--at once--in one! But look +there!" he continued, pointing with a look of resignation to the shore, +"look there! there's no end to it. What _has_ that brute got under its +tail?" + +We turned to look in the direction pointed out, and there saw a penguin +walking slowly and very sedately along the shore with an egg under its +tail. There were several others, we observed, burdened in the same way; +and we found afterwards that these were a species of penguins that always +carried their eggs so. Indeed, they had a most convenient cavity for the +purpose, just between the tail and the legs. We were very much impressed +with the regularity and order of this colony. The island seemed to be +apportioned out into squares, of which each penguin possessed one, and +sat in stiff solemnity in the middle of it, or took a slow march up and +down the spaces between. Some were hatching their eggs, but others were +feeding their young ones in a manner that caused us to laugh not a +little. The mother stood on a mound or raised rock, while the young one +stood patiently below her on the ground. Suddenly the mother raised her +head and uttered a series of the most discordant cackling sounds. + +"She's going to choke," cried Peterkin. + +But this was not the case, although, I confess, she looked like it. In a +few seconds she put down her head and opened her mouth, into which the +young one thrust its beak and seemed to suck something from her throat. +Then the cackling was renewed, the sucking continued, and so the +operation of feeding was carried on till the young one was satisfied; but +what she fed her little one with, we could not tell. + +"Now, just look yonder!" said Peterkin, in an excited tone; "if that +isn't the most abominable piece of maternal deception I ever saw. That +rascally old lady penguin has just pitched her young one into the sea, +and there's another about to follow her example." + +This indeed seemed to be the cue, for, on the top of a steep rock close +to the edge of the sea, we observed an old penguin endeavouring to entice +her young one into the water; but the young one seemed very unwilling to +go, and, notwithstanding the enticements of its mother, moved very slowly +towards her. At last she went gently behind the young bird and pushed it +a little towards the water, but with great tenderness, as much as to say, +'Don't be afraid, darling! I won't hurt you, my pet!' but no sooner did +she get it to the edge of the rock, where it stood looking pensively down +at the sea, than she gave it a sudden and violent push, sending it +headlong down the slope into the water, where its mother left it to +scramble ashore as it best could. We observed many of them employed in +doing this, and we came to the conclusion that this is the way in which +old penguins teach their children to swim. + +Scarcely had we finished making our remarks on this, when we were +startled by about a dozen of the old birds hopping in the most clumsy and +ludicrous manner towards the sea. The beach, here, was a sloping rock, +and when they came to it, some of them succeeded in hopping down in +safety, but others lost their balance and rolled and scrambled down the +slope in the most helpless manner. The instant they reached the water, +however, they seemed to be in their proper element. They dived and +bounded out of it and into it again with the utmost agility; and so, +diving and bounding and spluttering, for they could not fly, they went +rapidly out to sea. + +On seeing this, Peterkin turned with a grave face to us and said, "It's +my opinion that these birds are all stark, staring mad, and that this is +an enchanted island. I therefore propose that we should either put about +ship and fly in terror from the spot, or land valorously on the island, +and sell our lives as dearly as we can." + +"I vote for landing, so pull in, lads," said Jack, giving a stroke with +his oar that made the boat spin. In a few seconds we ran the boat into a +little creek where we made her fast to a projecting piece of coral, and, +running up the beach, entered the ranks of the penguins armed with our +cudgels and our spear. We were greatly surprised to find that, instead +of attacking us or showing signs of fear at our approach, these curious +birds did not move from their places until we laid hands on them, and +merely turned their eyes on us in solemn, stupid wonder as we passed. +There was one old penguin, however, that began to walk slowly toward the +sea, and Peterkin took it into his head that he would try to interrupt +its progress, so he ran between it and the sea and brandished his cudgel +in its face. But this proved to be a resolute old bird. It would not +retreat; nay, more, it would not cease to advance, but battled with +Peterkin bravely and drove him before it until it reached the sea. Had +Peterkin used his club he could easily have felled it, no doubt; but, as +he had no wish to do so cruel an act merely out of sport, he let the bird +escape. + +We spent fully three hours on this island in watching the habits of these +curious birds, and, when we finally left them, we all three concluded, +after much consultation, that they were the most wonderful creatures we +had ever seen; and further, we thought it probable that they were the +most wonderful creatures in the world! + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + +An awful storm and its consequences--Narrow escape--A rock proves a sure +foundation--A fearful night and a bright morning--Deliverance from +danger. + +It was evening before we left the island of the penguins. As we had made +up our minds to encamp for the night on a small island, whereon grew a +few cocoa-nut trees, which was about two miles off, we lay to our oars +with some energy. But a danger was in store for us which we had not +anticipated. The wind, which had carried us so quickly to Penguin +Island, freshened as evening drew on, to a stiff breeze, and, before we +had made half the distance to the small island, it became a regular gale. +Although it was not so directly against us as to prevent our rowing in +the course we wished to go, yet it checked us very much; and although the +force of the sea was somewhat broken by the island, the waves soon began +to rise, and to roll their broken crests against our small craft, so that +she began to take in water, and we had much ado to keep ourselves afloat. +At last the wind and sea together became so violent that we found it +impossible to make the island, so Jack suddenly put the head of the boat +round and ordered Peterkin and me to hoist a corner of the sail, +intending to run back to Penguin Island. + +"We shall at least have the shelter of the bushes," he said, as the boat +flew before the wind, "and the penguins will keep us company." + +As Jack spoke, the wind suddenly shifted, and blew so much against us +that we were forced to hoist more of the sail in order to beat up for the +island, being by this change thrown much to leeward of it. What made +matters worse was, that the gale came in squalls, so that we were more +than once nearly upset. + +"Stand by, both of you," cried Jack, in a quick, earnest tone; "be ready +to dowse the sail. I very much fear we won't make the island after all." + +Peterkin and I were so much in the habit of trusting everything to Jack +that we had fallen into the way of not considering things, especially +such things as were under Jack's care. We had, therefore, never doubted +for a moment that all was going well, so that it was with no little +anxiety that we heard him make the above remark. However, we had no time +for question or surmise, for, at the moment he spoke, a heavy squall was +bearing down upon us, and, as we were then flying with our lee gunwale +dipping occasionally under the waves, it was evident that we should have +to lower our sail altogether. In a few seconds the squall struck the +boat, but Peterkin and I had the sail down in a moment, so that it did +not upset us; but, when it was past, we were more than half full of +water. This I soon baled out, while Peterkin again hoisted a corner of +the sail; but the evil which Jack had feared came upon us. We found it +quite impossible to make Penguin Island. The gale carried us quickly +past it towards the open sea, and the terrible truth flashed upon us that +we should be swept out and left to perish miserably in a small boat in +the midst of the wide ocean. + +This idea was forced very strongly upon us because we saw nothing in the +direction whither the wind was blowing us save the raging billows of the +sea; and, indeed, we trembled as we gazed around us, for we were now +beyond the shelter of the islands, and it seemed as though any of the +huge billows, which curled over in masses of foam, might swallow us up in +a moment. The water, also, began to wash in over our sides, and I had to +keep constantly baling, for Jack could not quit the helm nor Peterkin the +sail for an instant, without endangering our lives. In the midst of this +distress Jack uttered an exclamation of hope, and pointed towards a low +island or rock which lay directly ahead. It had been hitherto +unobserved, owing to the dark clouds that obscured the sky and the +blinding spray that seemed to fill the whole atmosphere. + +As we neared this rock we observed that it was quite destitute of trees +and verdure, and so low that the sea broke completely over it. In fact +it was nothing more than the summit of one of the coral formations, which +rose only a few feet above the level of the water, and was, in stormy +weather, all but invisible. Over this island the waves were breaking in +the utmost fury, and our hearts sank within us as we saw that there was +not a spot where we could thrust our little boat without its being dashed +to pieces. + +"Show a little bit more sail," cried Jack, as we swept past the weather +side of the rock with fearful speed. + +"Ay, ay," answered Peterkin, hoisting about a foot more of our sail. + +Little though the addition was it caused the boat to lie over and creak +so loudly, as we cleft the foaming waves, that I expected to be upset +every instant; and I blamed Jack in my heart for his rashness. But I did +him injustice, for, although during two seconds the water rushed in-board +in a torrent, he succeeded in steering us sharply round to the leeward +side of the rock, where the water was comparatively calm, and the force +of the breeze broken. + +"Out your oars now, lads; that's well done. Give way!" We obeyed +instantly. The oars splashed into the waves together. One good hearty +pull, and we were floating in a comparatively calm creek that was so +narrow as to be barely able to admit our boat. Here we were in perfect +safety, and, as we leaped on shore and fastened our cable to the rocks, I +thanked God in my heart for our deliverance from so great danger. But, +although I have said we were now in safety, I suspect that few of my +readers would have envied our position. It is true we had no lack of +food, but we were drenched to the skin; the sea was foaming round us and +the spray flying over our heads, so that we were completely enveloped, as +it were, in water; the spot on which we had landed was not more than +twelve yards in diameter, and from this spot we could not move without +the risk of being swept away by the storm. At the upper end of the creek +was a small hollow or cave in the rock, which sheltered us from the fury +of the winds and waves; and as the rock extended in a sort of ledge over +our heads, it prevented the spray from falling upon us. + +"Why," said Peterkin, beginning to feel cheery again, "it seems to me +that we have got into a mermaid's cave, for there is nothing but water +all round us; and as for earth or sky, they are things of the past." + +Peterkin's idea was not inappropriate, for, what with the sea roaring in +white foam up to our very feet, and the spray flying in white sheets +continually over our heads, and the water dripping heavily from the ledge +above like a curtain in front of our cave, it did seem to us very much +more like being below than above water. + +"Now, boys," cried Jack, "bestir yourselves, and let's make ourselves +comfortable. Toss out our provisions, Peterkin; and here, Ralph, lend a +hand to haul up the boat. Look sharp." + +"Ay, ay, captain," we cried, as we hastened to obey, much cheered by the +hearty manner of our comrade. + +Fortunately the cave, although not very deep, was quite dry, so that we +succeeded in making ourselves much more comfortable than could have been +expected. We landed our provisions, wrung the water out of our garments, +spread our sail below us for a carpet, and, after having eaten a hearty +meal, began to feel quite cheerful. But as night drew on, our spirits +sank again, for with the daylight all evidence of our security vanished +away. We could no longer see the firm rock on which we lay, while we +were stunned with the violence of the tempest that raged around us. The +night grew pitchy dark, as it advanced, so that we could not see our +hands when we held them up before our eyes, and were obliged to feel each +other occasionally to make sure that we were safe, for the storm at last +became so terrible that it was difficult to make our voices audible. A +slight variation of the wind, as we supposed, caused a few drops of spray +ever and anon to blow into our faces; and the eddy of the sea, in its mad +boiling, washed up into our little creek until it reached our feet and +threatened to tear away our boat. In order to prevent this latter +calamity, we hauled the boat farther up and held the cable in our hands. +Occasional flashes of lightning shone with a ghastly glare through the +watery curtains around us, and lent additional horror to the scene. Yet +we longed for those dismal flashes, for they were less appalling than the +thick blackness that succeeded them. Crashing peals of thunder seemed to +tear the skies in twain, and fell upon our ears through the wild yelling +of the hurricane as if it had been but a gentle summer breeze; while the +billows burst upon the weather side of the island until we fancied that +the solid rock was giving way, and, in our agony, we clung to the bare +ground, expecting every moment to be whirled away and whelmed in the +black howling sea! Oh! it was a night of terrible anxiety, and no one +can conceive the feelings of intense gratitude and relief with which we +at last saw the dawn of day break through the vapory mists around us. + +For three days and three nights we remained on this rock, while the storm +continued to rage with unabated fury. On the morning of the fourth day +it suddenly ceased, and the wind fell altogether; but the waves still ran +so high that we did not dare to put off in our boat. During the greater +part of this period we scarcely slept above a few minutes at a time, but +on the third night we slept soundly and awoke early on the fourth morning +to find the sea very much down, and the sun shining brightly again in the +clear blue sky. + +It was with light hearts that we launched forth once more in our little +boat and steered away for our island home, which, we were overjoyed to +find, was quite visible on the horizon, for we had feared that we had +been blown out of sight of it altogether. As it was a dead calm we had +to row during the greater part of the day; but towards the afternoon a +fair breeze sprang up, which enabled us to hoist our sail. We soon +passed Penguin Island, and the other island which we had failed to reach +on the day the storm commenced; but as we had still enough of provisions, +and were anxious to get home, we did not land, to the great +disappointment of Peterkin, who seemed to entertain quite an affection +for the penguins. + +Although the breeze was pretty fresh for several hours, we did not reach +the outer reef of our island till night-fall, and before we had sailed +more than a hundred yards into the lagoon, the wind died away altogether, +so that we had to take to our oars again. It was late and the moon and +stars were shining brightly when we arrived opposite the bower and leaped +upon the strand. So glad were we to be safe back again on our beloved +island, that we scarcely took time to drag the boat a short way up the +beach, and then ran up to see that all was right at the bower. I must +confess, however, that my joy was mingled with a vague sort of fear lest +our home had been visited and destroyed during our absence; but on +reaching it we found everything just as it had been left, and the poor +black cat curled up, sound asleep, on the coral table in front of our +humble dwelling. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + +Shoemaking--The even tenor of our way suddenly interrupted--An unexpected +visit and an appalling battle--We all become warriors, and Jack proves +himself be a hero. + +For many months after this we continued to live on our island in +uninterrupted harmony and happiness. Sometimes we went out a-fishing in +the lagoon, and sometimes went a-hunting in the woods, or ascended to the +mountain top, by way of variety, although Peterkin always asserted that +we went for the purpose of hailing any ship that might chance to heave in +sight. But I am certain that none of us wished to be delivered from our +captivity, for we were extremely happy, and Peterkin used to say that as +we were very young we should not feel the loss of a year or two. +Peterkin, as I have said before, was thirteen years of age, Jack +eighteen, and I fifteen. But Jack was very tall, strong, and manly for +his age, and might easily have been mistaken for twenty. + +The climate was so beautiful that it seemed to be a perpetual summer, and +as many of the fruit-trees continued to bear fruit and blossom all the +year round, we never wanted for a plentiful supply of food. The hogs, +too, seemed rather to increase than diminish, although Peterkin was very +frequent in his attacks on them with his spear. If at any time we failed +in finding a drove, we had only to pay a visit to the plum-tree before +mentioned, where we always found a large family of them asleep under its +branches. + +We employed ourselves very busily during this time in making various +garments of cocoa-nut cloth, as those with which we had landed were +beginning to be very ragged. Peterkin also succeeded in making excellent +shoes out of the skin of the old hog, in the following manner:--He first +cut a piece of the hide, of an oblong form, a few inches longer than his +foot. This he soaked in water, and, while it was wet, he sewed up one +end of it, so as to form a rough imitation of that part of the heel of a +shoe where the seam is. This done, he bored a row of holes all round the +edge of the piece of skin, through which a tough line was passed. Into +the sewed-up part of this shoe he thrust his heel, then, drawing the +string tight, the edges rose up and overlapped his foot all round. It is +true there were a great many ill-looking puckers in these shoes, but we +found them very serviceable notwithstanding, and Jack came at last to +prefer them to his long boots. We ago made various other useful +articles, which added to our comfort, and once or twice spoke of building +us a house, but we had so great an affection for the bower, and, withal, +found it so serviceable, that we determined not to leave it, nor to +attempt the building of a house, which, in such a climate, might turn out +to be rather disagreeable than useful. + +We often examined the pistol that we had found in the house on the other +side of the island, and Peterkin wished much that we had powder and shot, +as it would render pig-killing much easier; but, after all, we had become +so expert in the use of our sling and bow and spear, that we were +independent of more deadly weapons. + +Diving in the Water Garden also continued to afford us as much pleasure +as ever; and Peterkin began to be a little more expert in the water from +constant practice. As for Jack and I, we began to feel as if water were +our native element, and revelled in it with so much confidence and +comfort that Peterkin said he feared we would turn into fish some day, +and swim off and leave him; adding, that he had been for a long time +observing that Jack was becoming more and more like a shark every day. +Whereupon Jack remarked, that if he, Peterkin, were changed into a fish, +he would certainly turn into nothing better or bigger than a shrimp. Poor +Peterkin did not envy us our delightful excursions under water, except, +indeed, when Jack would dive down to the bottom of the Water Garden, sit +down on a rock and look up and make faces at him. Peterkin did feel +envious then, and often said he would give anything to be able to do +that. I was much amused when Peterkin said this; for if he could only +have seen his own face when he happened to take a short dive, he would +have seen that Jack's was far surpassed by it. The great difference +being, however, that Jack made faces on purpose--Peterkin couldn't help +it! + +Now, while we were engaged with these occupations and amusements, an +event occurred one day which was as unexpected as it was exceedingly +alarming and very horrible. + +Jack and I were sitting, as we were often wont to do, on the rocks at +Spouting Cliff, and Peterkin was wringing the water from his garments, +having recently fallen by accident into the sea,--a thing he was +constantly doing,--when our attention was suddenly arrested by two +objects which appeared on the horizon. + +"What are yon, think you?" I said, addressing Jack. + +"I can't imagine," answered he; "I've noticed them for some time, and +fancied they were black sea-gulls, but the more I look at them the more I +feel convinced they are much larger than gulls." + +"They seem to be coming towards us," said I. + +"Hallo! what's wrong?" inquired Peterkin, coming up. + +"Look there," said Jack. + +"Whales!" cried Peterkin, shading his eyes with his hand. "No! eh! can +they be boats, Jack?" + +Our hearts beat with excitement at the very thought of seeing human faces +again. + +"I think you are about right, Peterkin;--but they seem to me to move +strangely for boats," said Jack, in a low tone, as if he were talking to +himself. + +I noticed that a shade of anxiety crossed Jack's countenance as he gazed +long and intently at the two objects, which were now nearing us fast. At +last he sprang to his feet. "They are canoes, Ralph! whether war-canoes +or not I cannot tell, but this I know, that all the natives of the South +Sea Islands are fierce cannibals, and they have little respect for +strangers. We must hide if they land here, which I earnestly hope they +will not do." + +I was greatly alarmed at Jack's speech, but I confess I thought less of +what he said than of the earnest, anxious manner in which he said it, and +it was with very uncomfortable feelings that Peterkin and I followed him +quickly into the woods. + +"How unfortunate," said I, as we gained the shelter of the bushes, "that +we have forgotten our arms." + +"It matters not," said Jack; "here are clubs enough and to spare." As he +spoke, he laid his hand on a bundle of stout poles of various sizes, +which Peterkin's ever-busy hands had formed, during our frequent visits +to the cliff, for no other purpose, apparently, than that of having +something to do. + +We each selected a stout club according to our several tastes, and lay +down behind a rock, whence we could see the canoes approach, without +ourselves being seen. At first we made an occasional remark on their +appearance, but after they entered the lagoon, and drew near the beach, +we ceased to speak, and gazed with intense interest at the scene before +us. + +We now observed that the foremost canoe was being chased by the other, +and that it contained a few women and children, as well as men,--perhaps +forty souls altogether; while the canoe which pursued it contained only +men. They seemed to be about the same in number, but were better armed, +and had the appearance of being a war party. Both crews were paddling +with all their might, and it seemed as if the pursuers exerted themselves +to overtake the natives ere they could land. In this, however, they +failed. The foremost canoe made for the beach close beneath the rocks +behind which we were concealed. Their short paddles flashed like meteors +in the water, and sent up a constant shower of spray. The foam curled +from the prow, and the eyes of the rowers glistened in their black faces +as they strained every muscle of their naked bodies; nor did they relax +their efforts till the canoe struck the beach with a violent shock; then, +with a shout of defiance, the whole party sprang, as if by magic, from +the canoe to the shore. Three women, two of whom carried infants in +their arms, rushed into the woods; and the men crowded to the water's +edge, with stones in their hands, spears levelled, and clubs brandished, +to resist the landing of their enemies. + +The distance between the two canoes had been about half a mile, and, at +the great speed they were going, this was soon passed. As the pursuers +neared the shore, no sign of fear or hesitation was noticeable. On they +came like a wild charger,--received but recked not of a shower of stones. +The canoe struck, and, with a yell that seemed to issue from the throats +of incarnate fiends, they leaped into the water, and drove their enemies +up the beach. + +The battle that immediately ensued was frightful to behold. Most of the +men wielded clubs of enormous size and curious shapes, with which they +dashed out each other's brains. As they were almost entirely naked, and +had to bound, stoop, leap, and run, in their terrible hand-to-hand +encounters, they looked more like demons than human beings. I felt my +heart grow sick at the sight of this bloody battle, and would fain have +turned away, but a species of fascination seemed to hold me down and glue +my eyes upon the combatants. I observed that the attacking party was led +by a most extraordinary being, who, from his size and peculiarity, I +concluded was a chief. His hair was frizzed out to an enormous extent, +so that it resembled a large turban. It was of a light-yellow hue, which +surprised me much, for the man's body was as black as coal, and I felt +convinced that the hair must have been dyed. He was tattooed from head +to foot; and his face, besides being tattooed, was besmeared with red +paint, and streaked with white. Altogether, with his yellow turban-like +hair, his Herculean black frame, his glittering eyes and white teeth, he +seemed the most terrible monster I ever beheld. He was very active in +the fight, and had already killed four men. + +Suddenly the yellow-haired chief was attacked by a man quite as strong +and large as himself. He flourished a heavy club something like an +eagle's beak at the point. For a second or two these giants eyed each +other warily, moving round and round, as if to catch each other at a +disadvantage, but seeing that nothing was to be gained by this caution, +and that the loss of time might effectually turn the tide of battle +either way, they apparently made up their minds to attack at the same +instant, for, with a wild shout and simultaneous spring, they swung their +heavy clubs, which met with a loud report. Suddenly the yellow-haired +savage tripped, his enemy sprang forward, the ponderous club was swung, +but it did not descend, for at that moment the savage was felled to the +ground by a stone from the hand of one who had witnessed his chief's +danger. This was the turning-point in the battle. The savages who +landed first turned and fled towards the bush, on seeing the fall of +their chief. But not one escaped. They were all overtaken and felled to +the earth. I saw, however, that they were not all killed. Indeed, their +enemies, now that they were conquered, seemed anxious to take them alive; +and they succeeded in securing fifteen, whom they bound hand and foot +with cords, and, carrying them up into the woods, laid them down among +the bushes. Here they left them, for what purpose I knew not, and +returned to the scene of the late battle, where the remnant of the party +were bathing their wounds. + +Out of the forty blacks that composed the attacking party, only twenty- +eight remained alive, two of whom were sent into the bush to hunt for the +women and children. Of the other party, as I have said, only ten +survived, and these were lying bound and helpless on the grass. + +Jack and Peterkin and I now looked at each other, and whispered our fears +that the savages might clamber up the rocks to search for fresh water, +and so discover our place of concealment; but we were so much interested +in watching their movements that we agreed to remain where we were; and, +indeed, we could not easily have risen without exposing ourselves to +detection. One of the savages now went up to the wood and soon returned +with a bundle of fire-wood, and we were not a little surprised to see him +set fire to it by the very same means used by Jack the time we made our +first fire,--namely, with the bow and drill. When the fire was kindled, +two of the party went again to the woods and returned with one of the +bound men. A dreadful feeling of horror crept over my heart, as the +thought flashed upon me that they were going to burn their enemies. As +they bore him to the fire my feelings almost overpowered me. I gasped +for breath, and seizing my club, endeavoured to spring to my feet; but +Jack's powerful arm pinned me to the earth. Next moment one of the +savages raised his club, and fractured the wretched creature's skull. He +must have died instantly, and, strange though it may seem, I confess to a +feeling of relief when the deed was done, because I now knew that the +poor savage could not be burned alive. Scarcely had his limbs ceased to +quiver when the monsters cut slices of flesh from his body, and, after +roasting them slightly over the fire, devoured them. + +Suddenly there arose a cry from the woods, and, in a few seconds, the two +savages hastened towards the fire dragging the three women and their two +infants along with them. One of those women was much younger than her +companions, and we were struck with the modesty of her demeanour and the +gentle expression of her face, which, although she had the flattish nose +and thick lips of the others, was of a light-brown colour, and we +conjectured that she must be of a different race. She and her companions +wore short petticoats and a kind of tippet on their shoulders. Their +hair was jet black, but instead of being long, was short and +curly,--though not woolly--somewhat like the hair of a young boy. While +we gazed with interest and some anxiety at these poor creatures, the big +chief advanced to one of the elder females and laid his hand upon the +child. But the mother shrank from him, and clasping the little one to +her bosom, uttered a wail of fear. With a savage laugh, the chief tore +the child from her arms and tossed it into the sea. A low groan burst +from Jack's lips as we witnessed this atrocious act and heard the +mother's shriek, as she fell insensible on the sand. The rippling waves +rolled the child on the beach, as if they refused to be a party in such a +foul murder, and we could observe that the little one still lived. + +The young girl was now brought forward, and the chief addressed her; but +although we heard his voice, and even the words distinctly, of course we +could not understand what he said. The girl made no answer to his fierce +questions, and we saw by the way in which he pointed to the fire that he +threatened her life. + +"Peterkin," said Jack in a hoarse whisper, "have you got your knife?" + +"Yes," replied Peterkin, whose face was pale as death. + +"That will do. Listen to me, and do my bidding quick. Here is the small +knife, Ralph. Fly both of you through the bush, cut the cords that bind +the prisoners and set them free. There! quick, ere it be too late." Jack +sprang up, and seized a heavy but short bludgeon, while his strong frame +trembled with emotion, and large drops rolled down his forehead. + +At this moment the man who had butchered the savage a few minutes before +advanced towards the girl with his heavy club. Jack uttered a yell that +rang like a death-shriek among the rocks. With one bound he leaped over +a precipice full fifteen feet high, and, before the savages had recovered +from their surprise, was in the midst of them; while Peterkin and I +dashed through the bushes towards the prisoners. With one blow of his +staff Jack felled the man with the club, then, turning round with a look +of fury, he rushed upon the big chief with the yellow hair. Had the blow +which Jack aimed at his head taken effect, the huge savage would have +needed no second stroke; but he was agile as a cat, and avoided it by +springing to one side, while, at the same time, he swung his ponderous +club at the head of his foe. It was now Jack's turn to leap aside, and +well was it for him that the first outburst of his blind fury was over, +else he had become an easy prey to his gigantic antagonist; but Jack was +cool now. He darted his blows rapidly and well, and the superiority of +his light weapon was strikingly proved in this combat, for while he could +easily evade the blows of the chief's heavy club, the chief could not so +easily evade those of his light one. Nevertheless, so quick was he, and +so frightfully did he fling about the mighty weapon, that, although Jack +struck him almost every blow, the strokes had to be delivered so quickly +that they wanted force to be very effectual. + +It was lucky for Jack that the other savages considered the success of +their chief in this encounter to be so certain that they refrained from +interfering. Had they doubted it, they would have probably ended the +matter at once by felling him. But they contented themselves with +awaiting the issue. + +The force which the chief expended in wielding his club now began to be +apparent. His movements became slower, his breath hissed through his +clenched teeth, and the surprised savages drew nearer in order to render +assistance. Jack observed this movement. He felt that his fate was +sealed, and resolved to cast his life upon the next blow. The chiefs +club was again about to descend on his head. He might have evaded it +easily, but instead of doing so, he suddenly shortened his grasp of his +own club, rushed in under the blow, struck his adversary right between +the eyes with all his force and fell to the earth, crushed beneath the +senseless body of the chief. A dozen clubs flew high in air ready to +descend on the head of Jack, but they hesitated a moment, for the massive +body of the chief completely covered him. That moment saved his life. +Ere the savages could tear the chief's body away, seven of their number +fell prostrate beneath the clubs of the prisoners whom Peterkin and I had +set free, and two others fell under our own hand. We could never have +accomplished this had not our enemies been so engrossed with the fight +between Jack and their chief that they had failed to observe us until we +were upon them. They still out-numbered our party by three, but we were +flushed with victory while they were taken by surprise and dispirited by +the fall of their chief. Moreover, they were awe-struck by the sweeping +fury of Jack, who seemed to have lost his senses altogether, and had no +sooner shaken himself free of the chief's body than he rushed into the +midst of them, and in three blows equalized our numbers. Peterkin and I +flew to the rescue, the savages followed us, and, in less than ten +minutes, the whole of our opponents were knocked down or made prisoners, +bound hand and foot, and extended side by side upon the sea shore. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + +Intercourse with the savages--Cannibalism prevented--The slain are buried +and the survivors depart, leaving us again alone on our Coral Island. + +After the battle was over, the savages crowded round us and gazed at us +in surprise, while they continued to pour upon us a flood of questions, +which, being wholly unintelligible, of course we could not answer. +However, by way of putting an end to it, Jack took the chief (who had +recovered from the effects of his wound) by the hand and shook it warmly. +No sooner did the blacks see that this was meant to express good-will +than they shook hands with us all round. After this ceremony was gone +through Jack went up to the girl, who had never once moved from the rock +where she had been left, but had continued an eager spectator of all that +had passed. He made signs to her to follow him and then, taking the +chief by the hand, was about to conduct him to the bower when his eye +fell on the poor infant which had been thrown into the sea and was still +lying on the shore. Dropping the chief's hand he hastened towards it, +and, to his great joy, found it to be still alive. We also found that +the mother was beginning to recover slowly. + +"Here, get out o' the way," said Jack, pushing us aside, as we stooped +over the poor woman and endeavoured to restore her, "I'll soon bring her +round." So saying, he placed the infant on her bosom and laid its warm +cheek on hers. The effect was wonderful. The woman opened her eyes, +felt the child, looked at it, and with a cry of joy clasped it in her +arms, at the same time endeavouring to rise, for the purpose, apparently, +of rushing into the woods. + +"There, that's all right," said Jack, once more taking the chief by the +hand. "Now Ralph and Peterkin, make the women and these fellows follow +me to the bower. Well entertain them as hospitably as we can." + +In a few minutes the savages were all seated on the ground in front of +the bower making a hearty meal off a cold roast pig, several ducks, and a +variety of cold fish, together with an unlimited supply of cocoa-nuts, +bread-fruits, yams, taro, and plums; with all of which they seemed to be +quite familiar and perfectly satisfied. + +Meanwhile, we three being thoroughly knocked up with our day's work, took +a good draught of cocoa-nut lemonade, and throwing ourselves on our beds +fell fast asleep. The savages it seems followed our example, and in half- +an-hour the whole camp was buried in repose. + +How long we slept I cannot tell, but this I know, that when we lay down +the sun was setting and when we awoke it was high in the heavens. I +awoke Jack, who started up in surprise, being unable at first to +comprehend our situation. "Now, then," said he, springing up, "let's see +after breakfast. Hallo! Peterkin, lazy fellow, how long do you mean to +lie there?" + +Peterkin yawned heavily. "Well!" said he, opening his eyes and looking +up after some trouble, "if it isn't to-morrow morning, and me thinking it +was to-day all this time. Hallo! Venus, where did you come from? you +seem tolerably at home, any how. Bah! might as well speak to the cat as +to you--better, in fact, for it understands me, and you don't." + +This remark was called forth by the sight of one of the elderly females, +who had seated herself on the rock in front of the bower, and, having +placed her child at her feet, was busily engaged in devouring the remains +of a roast pig. + +By this time the natives outside were all astir, and breakfast in an +advanced state of preparation. During the course of it we made sundry +attempts to converse with the natives by signs, but without effect. At +last we hit upon a plan of discovering their names. Jack pointed to his +breast and said "Jack," very distinctly; then he pointed to Peterkin and +to me, repeating our names at the same time. Then he pointed to himself +again, and said "Jack," and laying his finger on the breast of the chief, +looked inquiringly into his face. The chief instantly understood him and +said "Tararo," twice, distinctly. Jack repeated it after him, and the +chief, nodding his head approvingly, said "Chuck." On hearing which, +Peterkin exploded with laughter; but Jack turned and with a frown rebuked +him, saying, "I must look even more indignantly at you than I feel, +Peterkin, you rascal, for these fellows don't like to be laughed at." +Then turning towards the youngest of the women, who was seated at the +door of the bower, he pointed to her; whereupon the chief said, "Avatea;" +and pointing towards the sun, raised his finger slowly towards the +zenith, where it remained steadily for a minute or two. + +"What can that mean, I wonder," said Jack, looking puzzled. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "the chief means she is an angel come down to +stay here for a while. If so, she's an uncommonly black one!" + +We did not feel quite satisfied with this explanation, so Jack went up to +her and said, "Avatea." The woman smiled sadly, and nodded her head, at +the same time pointing to her breast and then to the sun, in the same +manner as the chief had done. We were much puzzled to know what this +could signify, but as there was no way of solving our difficulty we were +obliged to rest content. + +Jack now made signs to the natives to follow him, and, taking up his axe, +he led them to the place where the battle had been fought. Here we found +the prisoners, who had passed the night on the beach having been totally +forgotten by us, as our minds had been full of our guests, and were +ultimately overcome by sleep. They did not seem the worse for their +exposure, however, as we judged by the hearty appetite with which they +devoured the breakfast that was soon after given to them. Jack then +began to dig a hole in the sand, and, after working a few seconds, he +pointed to it and to the dead bodies that lay exposed on the beach. The +natives immediately perceived what he wanted, and, running for their +paddles, dug a hole in the course of half an hour that was quite large +enough to contain all the bodies of the slain. When it was finished they +tossed their dead enemies into it with so much indifference that we felt +assured they would not have put themselves to this trouble had we not +asked them to do so. The body of the yellow-haired chief was the last +thrown in. This wretched man would have recovered from the blow with +which Jack felled him, and, indeed, he did endeavour to rise during the +melee that followed his fall, but one of his enemies, happening to notice +the action, dealt him a blow with his club that killed him on the spot. + +While they were about to throw the sand over this chief, one of the +savages stooped over him, and with a knife, made apparently of stone, cut +a large slice of flesh from his thigh. We knew at once that he intended +to make use of this for food, and could not repress a cry of horror and +disgust. + +"Come, come, you blackguard," cried Jack, starting up and seizing the man +by the arm, "pitch that into the hole. Do you hear?" + +The savage of course did not understand the command, but he perfectly +understood the look of disgust with which Jack regarded the flesh, and +his fierce gaze as he pointed towards the hole. Nevertheless he did not +obey. Jack instantly turned to Tararo and made signs to him to enforce +obedience. The chief seemed to understand the appeal, for he stepped +forward, raised his club, and was on the point of dashing out the brains +of his offending subject, when Jack sprang forward and caught his +uplifted arm. + +"Stop!" he shouted, "you blockhead, I don't want you to kill the man." He +then pointed again to the flesh and to the hole. The chief uttered a few +words, which had the desired effect; for the man threw the flesh into the +hole, which was immediately filled up. This man was of a morose, sulky +disposition, and, during all the time he remained on the island, regarded +us, especially Jack, with a scowling visage. His name, we found, was +Mahine. + +The next three or four days were spent by the savages in mending their +canoe, which had been damaged by the violent shock it had sustained on +striking the shore. This canoe was a very curious structure. It was +about thirty feet long, and had a high towering stern. The timbers, of +which it was partly composed, were fastened much in the same way as those +of our little boat were put together; but the part that seemed most +curious to us was a sort of out-rigger, or long plank, which was attached +to the body of the canoe by means of two stout cross beams. These beams +kept the plank parallel with the canoe, but not in contact with it, for +it floated in the water with an open space between; thus forming a sort +of double canoe. This we found was intended to prevent the upsetting of +the canoe, which was so narrow that it could not have maintained an +upright position without the out-rigger. We could not help wondering +both at the ingenuity and the clumsiness of this contrivance. + +When the canoe was ready, we assisted the natives to carry the prisoners +into it, and helped them to load it with provisions and fruit. Peterkin +also went to the plum-tree for the purpose of making a special onslaught +upon the hogs, and killed no less than six of them. These we baked and +presented to our friends on the day of their departure. On that day +Tararo made a great many energetic signs to us, which, after much +consideration, we came to understand were proposals that we should go +away with him to his island; but, having no desire to do so, we shook our +heads very decidedly. However, we consoled him by presenting him with +our rusty axe, which we thought we could spare, having the excellent one +which had been so providentially washed ashore to us the day we were +wrecked. We also gave him a piece of wood with our names carved on it, +and a piece of string to hang it round his neck as an ornament. + +In a few minutes more we were all assembled on the beach. Being unable +to speak to the savages, we went through the ceremony of shaking hands, +and expected they would depart; but, before doing so, Tararo went up to +Jack and rubbed noses with him, after which he did the same with Peterkin +and me! Seeing that this was their mode of salutation, we determined to +conform to their custom, so we rubbed noses heartily with the whole +party, women and all! The only disagreeable part of the process was, +when we came to rub noses with Mahine, and Peterkin afterwards said, that +when he saw his wolfish eyes glaring so close to his face, he felt much +more inclined to _bang_ than to _rub_ his nose. Avatea was the last to +take leave of us, and we experienced a feeling of real sorrow when she +approached to bid us farewell. Besides her modest air and gentle manners +she was the only one of the party who exhibited the smallest sign of +regret at parting from us. Going up to Jack, she put out her flat little +nose to be rubbed, and thereafter paid the same compliment to Peterkin +and me. + +An hour later the canoe was out of sight, and we, with an indefinable +feeling of sadness creeping round our hearts, were seated in silence +beneath the shadow of our bower, meditating on the wonderful events of +the last few days. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + +Sagacious and moral remarks in regard to life--A sail!--An unexpected +salute--The end of the black cat--A terrible dive--An incautious +proceeding and a frightful catastrophe. + +Life is a strange compound. Peterkin used to say of it, that it beat a +druggist's shop all to sticks; for, whereas the first is a compound of +good and bad, the other is a horrible compound of all that is utterly +detestable. And indeed the more I consider it the more I am struck with +the strange mixture of good and evil that exists not only in the material +earth but in our own natures. In our own Coral Island we had experienced +every variety of good that a bountiful Creator could heap on us. Yet on +the night of the storm we had seen how almost, in our case,--and +altogether, no doubt, in the case of others less fortunate--all this good +might be swept away for ever. We had seen the rich fruit-trees waving in +the soft air, the tender herbs shooting upwards under the benign +influence of the bright sun; and, the next day, we had seen these good +and beautiful trees and plants uprooted by the hurricane, crushed and +hurled to the ground in destructive devastation. We had lived for many +months in a clime for the most part so beautiful, that we had often +wondered whether Adam and Eve had found Eden more sweet; and we had seen +the quiet solitudes of our paradise suddenly broken in upon by ferocious +savages, and the white sands stained with blood and strewed with lifeless +forms; yet, among these cannibals, we had seen many symptoms of a kindly +nature. I pondered these things much, and, while I considered them, +there recurred to my memory those words which I had read in my Bible,--the +works of God are wonderful, and his ways past finding out. + +After these poor savages had left us, we used to hold long and frequent +conversations about them, and I noticed that Peterkin's manner was now +much altered. He did not, indeed, jest less heartily than before, but he +did so less frequently, and often there was a tone of deep seriousness in +his manner, if not in his words, which made him seem to Jack and me as if +he had grown two years older within a few days. But indeed I was not +surprised at this, when I reflected on the awful realities which we had +witnessed so lately. We could by no means shake off a tendency to gloom +for several weeks afterwards; but, as time wore away, our usual good +spirits returned somewhat, and we began to think of the visit of the +savages with feelings akin to those with which we recall a terrible +dream. + +One day we were all enjoying ourselves in the Water Garden, preparatory +to going on a fishing excursion; for Peterkin had kept us in such +constant supply of hogs that we had become quite tired of pork, and +desired a change. Peterkin was sunning himself on the ledge of rock, +while we were creeping among the rocks below. Happening to look up, I +observed Peterkin cutting the most extraordinary capers and making +violent gesticulations for us to come up; so I gave Jack a push, and rose +immediately. + +"A sail! a sail! Ralph, look! Jack, away on the horizon there, just +over the entrance to the lagoon!" cried Peterkin, as we scrambled up the +rocks. + +"So it is, and a schooner, too!" said Jack, as he proceeded hastily to +dress. + +Our hearts were thrown into a terrible flutter by this discovery, for if +it should touch at our island we had no doubt the captain would be happy +to give us a passage to some of the civilized islands, where we could +find a ship sailing for England, or some other part of Europe. Home, +with all its associations, rushed in upon my heart like a flood, and, +much though I loved the Coral Island and the bower which had now been our +home so long, I felt that I could have quitted all at that moment without +a sigh. With joyful anticipations we hastened to the highest point of +rock near our dwelling, and awaited the arrival of the vessel, for we now +perceived that she was making straight for the island, under a steady +breeze. + +In less than an hour she was close to the reef, where she rounded to, and +backed her topsails in order to survey the coast. Seeing this, and +fearing that they might not perceive us, we all three waved pieces of +cocoa-nut cloth in the air, and soon had the satisfaction of seeing them +beginning to lower a boat and bustle about the decks as if they meant to +land. Suddenly a flag was run up to the peak, a little cloud of white +smoke rose from the schooner's side, and, before we could guess their +intentions, a cannon-shot came crashing through the bushes, carried away +several cocoa-nut trees in its passage, and burst in atoms against the +cliff a few yards below the spot on which we stood. + +With feelings of terror we now observed that the flag at the schooner's +peak was black, with a Death's head and cross bones upon it. As we gazed +at each other in blank amazement, the word "pirate" escaped our lips +simultaneously. + +"What is to be done?" cried Peterkin, as we observed a boat shoot from +the vessel's side, and make for the entrance of the reef. "If they take +us off the island, it will either be to throw us overboard for sport, or +to make pirates of us." + +I did not reply, but looked at Jack, as being our only resource in this +emergency. He stood with folded arms, and his eyes fixed with a grave, +anxious expression on the ground. "There is but one hope," said he, +turning with a sad expression of countenance to Peterkin; "perhaps, after +all, we may not have to resort to it. If these villains are anxious to +take us, they will soon overrun the whole island. But come, follow me." + +Stopping abruptly in his speech, Jack bounded into the woods, and led us +by a circuitous route to Spouting Cliff. Here he halted, and, advancing +cautiously to the rocks, glanced over their edge. We were soon by his +side, and saw the boat, which was crowded with armed men, just touching +the shore. In an instant the crew landed, formed line, and rushed up to +our bower. + +In a few seconds we saw them hurrying back to the boat, one of them +swinging the poor cat round his head by the tail. On reaching the +water's edge, he tossed it far into the sea, and joined his companions, +who appeared to be holding a hasty council. + +"You see what we may expect," said Jack bitterly. "The man who will +wantonly kill a poor brute for sport will think little of murdering a +fellow-creature. Now, boys, we have but one chance left,--the Diamond +Cave." + +"The Diamond Cave!" cried Peterkin, "then my chance is a poor one, for I +could not dive into it if all the pirates on the Pacific were at my +heels." + +"Nay, but," said I, "we will take you down, Peterkin, if you will only +trust us." + +As I spoke, we observed the pirates scatter over the beach, and radiate, +as if from a centre, towards the woods and along shore. + +"Now, Peterkin," said Jack, in a solemn tone, "you must make up your mind +to do it, or we must make up our minds to die in your company." + +"Oh, Jack, my dear friend," cried Peterkin, turning pale, "leave me; I +don't believe they'll think it worth while to kill me. Go, you and +Ralph, and dive into the cave." + +"That will not I," answered Jack quietly, while he picked up a stout +cudgel from the ground. "So now, Ralph, we must prepare to meet these +fellows. Their motto is, 'No quarter.' If we can manage to floor those +coming in this direction, we may escape into the woods for a while." + +"There are five of them," said I; "we have no chance." + +"Come, then," cried Peterkin, starting up, and grasping Jack convulsively +by the arm, "let us dive; I will go." + +Those who are not naturally expert in the water know well the feelings of +horror that overwhelm them, when in it, at the bare idea of being held +down, even for a few seconds,--that spasmodic, involuntary recoil from +compulsory immersion which has no connection whatever with cowardice; and +they will understand the amount of resolution that it required in +Peterkin to allow himself to be dragged down to a depth of ten feet, and +then, through a narrow tunnel, into an almost pitch-dark cavern. But +there was no alternative. The pirates had already caught sight of us, +and were now within a short distance of the rocks. + +Jack and I seized Peterkin by the arms. + +"Now, keep quite still, no struggling," said Jack, "or we are lost." + +Peterkin made no reply, but the stern gravity of his marble features, and +the tension of his muscles, satisfied us that he had fully made up his +mind to go through with it. Just as the pirates gained the foot of the +rocks, which hid us for a moment from their view, we bent over the sea, +and plunged down together head foremost. Peterkin behaved like a hero. +He floated passively between us like a log of wood, and we passed the +tunnel and rose into the cave in a shorter space of time than I had ever +done it before. + +Peterkin drew a long, deep breath on reaching the surface; and in a few +seconds we were all standing on the ledge of rock in safety. Jack now +searched for the tinder and torch, which always lay in the cave. He soon +found them, and, lighting the torch, revealed to Peterkin's wondering +gaze the marvels of the place. But we were too wet to waste much time in +looking about us. Our first care was to take off our clothes, and wring +them as dry as we could. This done, we proceeded to examine into the +state of our larder, for, as Jack truly remarked, there was no knowing +how long the pirates might remain on the island. + +"Perhaps," said Peterkin, "they may take it into their heads to stop here +altogether, and so we shall be buried alive in this place." + +"Don't you think, Peterkin, that it's the nearest thing to being drowned +alive that you ever felt?" said Jack with a smile. "But I've no fear of +that. These villains never stay long on shore. The sea is their home, +so you may depend upon it that they won't stay more than a day or two at +the furthest." + +We now began to make arrangements for spending the night in the cavern. +At various periods Jack and I had conveyed cocoa nuts and other fruits, +besides rolls of cocoa-nut cloth, to this submarine cave, partly for +amusement, and partly from a feeling that we might possibly be driven one +day to take shelter here from the savages. Little did we imagine that +the first savages who would drive us into it would be white savages, +perhaps our own countrymen. We found the cocoa-nuts in good condition, +and the cooked yams, but the bread-fruits were spoiled. We also found +the cloth where we had left it; and, on opening it out, there proved to +be sufficient to make a bed; which was important, as the rock was damp. +Having collected it all together, we spread out our bed, placed our torch +in the midst of us, and ate our supper. It was indeed a strange chamber +to feast in; and we could not help remarking on the cold, ghastly +appearance of the walls, and the black water at our side, with the thick +darkness beyond, and the sullen sound of the drops that fell at long +intervals from the roof of the cavern into the still water; and the +strong contrast between all this and our bed and supper, which, with our +faces, were lit up with the deep red flame of the torch. + +We sat long over our meal, talking together in subdued voices, for we did +not like the dismal echoes that rang through the vault above when we +happened to raise them. At last the faint light that came through the +opening died away, warning us that it was night and time for rest. We +therefore put out our torch and lay down to sleep. + +On awaking, it was some time ere we could collect our faculties so as to +remember where we were, and we were in much uncertainty as to whether it +was early or late. We saw by the faint light that it was day, but could +not guess at the hour; so Jack proposed that he should dive out and +reconnoitre. + +"No, Jack," said I, "do you rest here. You've had enough to do during +the last few days. Rest yourself now, and take care of Peterkin, while I +go out to see what the pirates are about. I'll be very careful not to +expose myself, and I'll bring you word again in a short time." + +"Very well, Ralph," answered Jack, "please yourself, but don't be long; +and if you'll take my advice you'll go in your clothes, for I would like +to have some fresh cocoa nuts, and climbing trees without clothes is +uncomfortable, to say the least of it." + +"The pirates will be sure to keep a sharp lookout," said Peterkin, "so, +pray, be careful." + +"No fear," said I; "good-bye." + +"Good-bye," answered my comrades. + +And while the words were yet sounding in my ears, I plunged into the +water, and in a few seconds found myself in the open air. On rising, I +was careful to come up gently and to breathe softly, while I kept close +in beside the rocks; but, as I observed no one near me, I crept slowly +out, and ascended the cliff a step at a time, till I obtained a full view +of the shore. No pirates were to be seen,--even their boat was gone; but +as it was possible they might have hidden themselves, I did not venture +too boldly forward. Then it occurred to me to look out to sea, when, to +my surprise, I saw the pirate schooner sailing away almost hull-down on +the horizon! On seeing this I uttered a shout of joy. Then my first +impulse was to dive back to tell my companions the good news; but I +checked myself, and ran to the top of the cliff, in order to make sure +that the vessel I saw was indeed the pirate schooner. I looked long and +anxiously at her, and, giving vent to a deep sigh of relief, said aloud, +"Yes, there she goes; the villains have been baulked of their prey this +time at least." + +"Not so sure of that!" said a deep voice at my side; while, at the same +moment, a heavy hand grasped my shoulder, and held it as if in a vice. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + +I fall into the hands of pirates--How they treated me, and what I said to +them--The result of the whole ending in a melancholy separation and in a +most unexpected gift. + +My heart seemed to leap into my throat at the words; and, turning round, +I beheld a man of immense stature, and fierce aspect regarding me with a +smile of contempt. He was a white man,--that is to say, he was a man of +European blood, though his face, from long exposure to the weather, was +deeply bronzed. His dress was that of a common seaman, except that he +had on a Greek skull-cap, and wore a broad shawl of the richest silk +round his waist. In this shawl were placed two pair of pistols and a +heavy cutlass. He wore a beard and moustache, which, like the locks on +his head, were short, curly, and sprinkled with gray hairs. + +"So, youngster," he said, with a sardonic smile, while I felt his grasp +tighten on my shoulder, "the villains have been baulked of their prey, +have they? We shall see, we shall see. Now, you whelp, look yonder." As +he spoke, the pirate uttered a shrill whistle. In a second or two it was +answered, and the pirate-boat rowed round the point at the Water Garden, +and came rapidly towards us. "Now, go, make a fire on that point; and +hark'ee, youngster, if you try to run away, I'll send a quick and sure +messenger after you," and he pointed significantly at his pistols. + +I obeyed in silence, and as I happened to have the burning-glass in my +pocket, a fire was speedily kindled, and a thick smoke ascended into the +air. It had scarcely appeared for two minutes when the boom of a gun +rolled over the sea, and, looking up, I saw that the schooner was making +for the island again. It now flashed across me that this was a ruse on +the part of the pirates, and that they had sent their vessel away, +knowing that it would lead us to suppose that they had left altogether. +But there was no use of regret now. I was completely in their power, so +I stood helplessly beside the pirate watching the crew of the boat as +they landed on the beach. For an instant I contemplated rushing over the +cliff into the sea, but this I saw I could not now accomplish, as some of +the men were already between me and the water. + +There was a good deal of jesting at the success of their scheme, as the +crew ascended the rocks and addressed the man who had captured me by the +title of captain. They were a ferocious set of men, with shaggy beards +and scowling brows. All of them were armed with cutlasses and pistols, +and their costumes were, with trifling variations, similar to that of the +captain. As I looked from one to the other, and observed the low, +scowling brows, that never unbent, even when the men laughed, and the +mean, rascally expression that sat on each face, I felt that my life hung +by a hair. + +"But where are the other cubs?" cried one of the men, with an oath that +made me shudder. "I'll swear to it there were three, at least, if not +more." + +"You hear what he says, whelp; where are the other dogs?" said the +captain. + +"If you mean my companions," said I, in a low voice, "I won't tell you." + +A loud laugh burst from the crew at this answer. + +The pirate captain looked at me in surprise. Then drawing a pistol from +his belt, he cocked it and said, "Now, youngster, listen to me. I've no +time to waste here. If you don't tell me all you know, I'll blow your +brains out! Where are your comrades?" + +For an instant I hesitated, not knowing what to do in this extremity. +Suddenly a thought occurred to me. + +"Villain," said I, shaking my clenched fist in his face, "to blow my +brains out would make short work of me, and be soon over. Death by +drowning is as sure, and the agony prolonged, yet, I tell you to your +face, if you were to toss me over yonder cliff into the sea, I would not +tell you where my companions are, and I dare you to try me!" + +The pirate captain grew white with rage as I spoke. "Say you so?" cried +he, uttering a fierce oath. "Here, lads, take him by the legs and heave +him in,--quick!" + +The men, who were utterly silenced with surprise at my audacity, +advanced, and seized me, and, as they carried me towards the cliff, I +congratulated myself not a little on the success of my scheme, for I knew +that once in the water I should be safe, and could rejoin Jack and +Peterkin in the cave. But my hopes were suddenly blasted by the captain +crying out, "Hold on, lads, hold on. We'll give him a taste of the thumb- +screws before throwing him to the sharks. Away with him into the boat. +Look alive! the breeze is freshening." + +The men instantly raised me shoulder high, and, hurrying down the rocks, +tossed me into the bottom of the boat, where I lay for some time stunned +with the violence of my fall. + +On recovering sufficiently to raise myself on my elbow, I perceived that +we were already outside the coral reef, and close alongside the schooner, +which was of small size and clipper built. I had only time to observe +this much, when I received a severe kick on the side from one of the men, +who ordered me, in a rough voice, to jump aboard. Rising hastily I +clambered up the side. In a few minutes the boat was hoisted on deck, +the vessel's head put close to the wind, and the Coral Island dropped +slowly astern as we beat up against a head sea. + +Immediately after coming aboard, the crew were too busily engaged in +working the ship and getting in the boat to attend to me, so I remained +leaning against the bulwarks close to the gangway, watching their +operations. I was surprised to find that there were no guns or +carronades of any kind in the vessel, which had more of the appearance of +a fast-sailing trader than a pirate. But I was struck with the neatness +of everything. The brass work of the binnacle and about the tiller, as +well as the copper belaying-pins, were as brightly polished as if they +had just come from the foundry. The decks were pure white, and smooth. +The masts were clean-scraped and varnished, except at the cross-trees and +truck, which were painted black. The standing and running rigging was in +the most perfect order, and the sails white as snow. In short, +everything, from the single narrow red stripe on her low black hull to +the trucks on her tapering masts, evinced an amount of care and strict +discipline that would have done credit to a ship of the Royal Navy. There +was nothing lumbering or unseemly about the vessel, excepting, perhaps, a +boat, which lay on the deck with its keel up between the fore and main +masts. It seemed disproportionately large for the schooner; but, when I +saw that the crew amounted to between thirty and forty men, I concluded +that this boat was held in reserve, in case of any accident compelling +the crew to desert the vessel. + +As I have before said, the costumes of the men were similar to that of +the captain. But in head gear they differed not only from him but from +each other, some wearing the ordinary straw hat of the merchant service, +while others wore cloth caps and red worsted night-caps. I observed that +all their arms were sent below; the captain only retaining his cutlass +and a single pistol in the folds of his shawl. Although the captain was +the tallest and most powerful man in the ship, he did not strikingly +excel many of his men in this respect, and the only difference that an +ordinary observer would have noticed was, a certain degree of open +candour, straightforward daring, in the bold, ferocious expression of his +face, which rendered him less repulsive than his low-browed associates, +but did not by any means induce the belief that he was a hero. This look +was, however, the indication of that spirit which gave him the +pre-eminence among the crew of desperadoes who called him captain. He +was a lion-like villain; totally devoid of personal fear, and utterly +reckless of consequences, and, therefore, a terror to his men, who +individually hated him, but unitedly felt it to be their advantage to +have him at their head. + +But my thoughts soon reverted to the dear companions whom I had left on +shore, and as I turned towards the Coral Island, which was now far away +to leeward, I sighed deeply, and the tears rolled slowly down my cheeks +as I thought that I might never see them more. + +"So you're blubbering, are you, you obstinate whelp?" said the deep voice +of the captain, as he came up and gave me a box on the ear that nearly +felled me to the deck. "I don't allow any such weakness aboard o' this +ship. So clap a stopper on your eyes or I'll give you something to cry +for." + +I flushed with indignation at this rough and cruel treatment, but felt +that giving way to anger would only make matters worse, so I made no +reply, but took out my handkerchief and dried my eyes. + +"I thought you were made of better stuff," continued the captain, +angrily; "I'd rather have a mad bull-dog aboard than a water-eyed puppy. +But I'll cure you, lad, or introduce you to the sharks before long. Now +go below, and stay there till I call you." + +As I walked forward to obey, my eye fell on a small keg standing by the +side of the main-mast, on which the word _gunpowder_ was written in +pencil. It immediately flashed across me that, as we were beating up +against the wind, anything floating in the sea would be driven on the +reef encircling the Coral Island. I also recollected--for thought is +more rapid than the lightning--that my old companions had a pistol. +Without a moment's hesitation, therefore, I lifted the keg from the deck +and tossed it into the sea! An exclamation of surprise burst from the +captain and some of the men who witnessed this act of mine. + +Striding up to me, and uttering fearful imprecations, the captain raised +his hand to strike me, while he shouted, "Boy! whelp! what mean you by +that?" + +"If you lower your hand," said I, in a loud voice, while I felt the blood +rush to my temples, "I'll tell you. Until you do so I'm dumb!" + +The captain stepped back and regarded me with a look of amazement. + +"Now," continued I, "I threw that keg into the sea because the wind and +waves will carry it to my friends on the Coral Island, who happen to have +a pistol, but no powder. I hope that it will reach them soon, and my +only regret is that the keg was not a bigger one. Moreover, pirate, you +said just now that you thought I was made of better stuff! I don't know +what stuff I am made of,--I never thought much about that subject; but +I'm quite certain of this, that I am made of such stuff as the like of +you shall never tame, though you should do your worst." + +To my surprise the captain, instead of flying into a rage, smiled, and, +thrusting his hand into the voluminous shawl that encircled his waist, +turned on his heel and walked aft, while I went below. + +Here, instead of being rudely handled, as I had expected, the men +received me with a shout of laughter, and one of them, patting me on the +back, said, "Well done, lad! you're a brick, and I have no doubt will +turn out a rare cove. Bloody Bill, there, was just such a fellow as you +are, and he's now the biggest cut-throat of us all." + +"Take a can of beer, lad," cried another, "and wet your whistle after +that speech o' your'n to the captain. If any one o' us had made it, +youngster, he would have had no whistle to wet by this time." + +"Stop your clapper, Jack," vociferated a third; "give the boy a junck o' +meat. Don't you see he's a'most goin' to kick the bucket?" + +"And no wonder," said the first speaker, with an oath, "after the tumble +you gave him into the boat. I guess it would have broke _your_ neck if +you had got it." + +I did indeed feel somewhat faint; which was owing, doubtless, to the +combined effects of ill-usage and hunger; for it will be recollected that +I had dived out of the cave that morning before breakfast, and it was now +near mid-day. I therefore gladly accepted a plate of boiled pork and a +yam, which were handed to me by one of the men from the locker on which +some of the crew were seated eating their dinner. But I must add that +the zest with which I ate my meal was much abated in consequence of the +frightful oaths and the terrible language that flowed from the lips of +these godless men, even in the midst of their hilarity and good-humour. +The man who had been alluded to as Bloody Bill was seated near me, and I +could not help wondering at the moody silence he maintained among his +comrades. He did indeed reply to their questions in a careless, off-hand +tone, but he never volunteered a remark. The only difference between him +and the others was his taciturnity and his size, for he was nearly, if +not quite, as large a man as the captain. + +During the remainder of the afternoon I was left to my own reflections, +which were anything but agreeable, for I could not banish from my mind +the threat about the thumb-screws, of the nature and use of which I had a +vague but terrible conception. I was still meditating on my unhappy fate +when, just after night-fall, one of the watch on deck called down the +hatchway,-- + +"Hallo there! one o' you, tumble up and light the cabin lamp, and send +that boy aft to the captain--sharp!" + +"Now then, do you hear, youngster? the captain wants you. Look alive," +said Bloody Bill, raising his huge frame from the locker on which he had +been asleep for the last two hours. He sprang up the ladder and I +instantly followed him, and, going aft, was shown into the cabin by one +of the men, who closed the door after me. + +A small silver lamp which hung from a beam threw a dim soft light over +the cabin, which was a small apartment, and comfortably but plainly +finished. Seated on a camp-stool at the table, and busily engaged in +examining a chart of the Pacific, was the captain, who looked up as I +entered, and, in a quiet voice, bade me be seated, while he threw down +his pencil, and, rising from the table, stretched himself on a sofa at +the upper end of the cabin. + +"Boy," said he, looking me full in the face, "what is your name?" + +"Ralph Rover," I replied. + +"Where did you come from, and how came you to be on that island? How +many companions had you on it? Answer me, now, and mind you tell no +lies." + +"I never tell lies," said I, firmly. + +The captain received this reply with a cold sarcastic smile, and bade me +answer his questions. + +I then told him the history of myself and my companions from the time we +sailed till the day of his visit to the island, taking care, however, to +make no mention of the Diamond Cave. After I had concluded, he was +silent for a few minutes; then, looking up, he said--"Boy, I believe +you." + +I was surprised at this remark, for I could not imagine why he should not +believe me. However, I made no reply. + +"And what," continued the captain, "makes you think that this schooner is +a pirate?" + +"The black flag," said I, "showed me what you are; and if any further +proof were wanting I have had it in the brutal treatment I have received +at your hands." + +The captain frowned as I spoke, but subduing his anger he continued--"Boy, +you are too bold. I admit that we treated you roughly, but that was +because you made us lose time and gave us a good deal of trouble. As to +the black flag, that is merely a joke that my fellows play off upon +people sometimes in order to frighten them. It is their humour, and does +no harm. I am no pirate, boy, but a lawful trader,--a rough one, I grant +you, but one can't help that in these seas, where there are so many +pirates on the water and such murderous blackguards on the land. I carry +on a trade in sandal-wood with the Feejee Islands; and if you choose, +Ralph, to behave yourself and be a good boy, I'll take you along with me +and give you a good share of the profits. You see I'm in want of an +honest boy like you, to look after the cabin and keep the log, and +superintend the traffic on shore sometimes. What say you, Ralph, would +you like to become a sandal-wood trader?" + +I was much surprised by this explanation, and a good deal relieved to +find that the vessel, after all, was not a pirate; but instead of +replying I said, "If it be as you state, then why did you take me from my +island, and why do you not now take me back?" + +The captain smiled as he replied, "I took you off in anger, boy, and I'm +sorry for it. I would even now take you back, but we are too far away +from it. See, there it is," he added, laying his finger on the chart, +"and we are now here,--fifty miles at least. It would not be fair to my +men to put about now, for they have all an interest in the trade." + +I could make no reply to this; so, after a little more conversation, I +agreed to become one of the crew, at least until we could reach some +civilized island where I might be put ashore. The captain assented to +this proposition, and after thanking him for the promise, I left the +cabin and went on deck with feelings that ought to have been lighter, but +which were, I could not tell why, marvellously heavy and uncomfortable +still. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + +Bloody Bill--Dark surmises--A strange sail, and a strange crew, and a +still stranger cargo--New reasons for favouring missionaries--A murderous +massacre, and thoughts thereon. + +Three weeks after the conversation narrated in the last chapter, I was +standing on the quarter-deck of the schooner watching the gambols of a +shoal of porpoises that swam round us. It was a dead calm. One of those +still, hot, sweltering days, so common in the Pacific, when Nature seems +to have gone to sleep, and the only thing in water or in air that proves +her still alive, is her long, deep breathing, in the swell of the mighty +sea. No cloud floated in the deep blue above; no ripple broke the +reflected blue below. The sun shone fiercely in the sky, and a ball of +fire blazed, with almost equal power, from out the bosom of the water. So +intensely still was it, and so perfectly transparent was the surface of +the deep, that had it not been for the long swell already alluded to, we +might have believed the surrounding universe to be a huge blue liquid +ball, and our little ship the one solitary material speck in all +creation, floating in the midst of it. + +No sound broke on our ears save the soft puff now and then of a porpoise, +the slow creak of the masts, as we swayed gently on the swell, the patter +of the reef-points, and the occasional flap of the hanging sails. An +awning covered the fore and after parts of the schooner, under which the +men composing the watch on deck lolled in sleepy indolence, overcome with +excessive heat. Bloody Bill, as the men invariably called him, was +standing at the tiller, but his post for the present was a sinecure, and +he whiled away the time by alternately gazing in dreamy abstraction at +the compass in the binnacle, and by walking to the taffrail in order to +spit into the sea. In one of these turns he came near to where I was +standing, and, leaning over the side, looked long and earnestly down into +the blue wave. + +This man, although he was always taciturn and often surly, was the only +human being on board with whom I had the slightest desire to become +better acquainted. The other men, seeing that I did not relish their +company, and knowing that I was a protege of the captain, treated me with +total indifference. Bloody Bill, it is true, did the same; but as this +was his conduct towards every one else, it was not peculiar in reference +to me. Once or twice I tried to draw him into conversation, but he +always turned away after a few cold monosyllables. As he now leaned over +the taffrail close beside me, I said to him,-- + +"Bill, why is it that you are so gloomy? Why do you never speak to any +one?" + +Bill smiled slightly as he replied, "Why, I s'pose it's because I haint +got nothin' to say!" + +"That's strange," said I, musingly; "you look like a man that could +think, and such men can usually speak." + +"So they can, youngster," rejoined Bill, somewhat sternly; "and I could +speak too if I had a mind to, but what's the use o' speakin' here! The +men only open their mouths to curse and swear, an' they seem to find it +entertaining; but I don't, so I hold my tongue." + +"Well, Bill, that's true, and I would rather not hear you speak at all +than hear you speak like the other men; but _I_ don't swear, Bill, so you +might talk to me sometimes, I think. Besides, I'm weary of spending day +after day in this way, without a single soul to say a pleasant word to. +I've been used to friendly conversation, Bill, and I really would take it +kind if you would talk with me a little now and then." + +Bill looked at me in surprise, and I thought I observed a sad expression +pass across his sun-burnt face. + +"An' where have you been used to friendly conversation," said Bill, +looking down again into the sea; "not on that Coral Island, I take it?" + +"Yes, indeed," said I energetically; "I have spent many of the happiest +months in my life on that Coral Island;" and without waiting to be +further questioned, I launched out into a glowing account of the happy +life that Jack and Peterkin and I had spent together, and related +minutely every circumstance that befell us while on the island. + +"Boy, boy," said Bill, in a voice so deep that it startled me, "this is +no place for you." + +"That's true," said I; "I'm of little use on board, and I don't like my +comrades; but I can't help it, and at anyrate I hope to be free again +soon." + +"Free?" said Bill, looking at me in surprise. + +"Yes, free," returned I; "the captain said he would put me ashore after +this trip was over." + +"_This trip_! Hark'ee, boy," said Bill, lowering his voice, "what said +the captain to you the day you came aboard?" + +"He said that he was a trader in sandal-wood and no pirate, and told me +that if I would join him for this trip he would give me a good share of +the profits or put me on shore in some civilized island if I chose." + +Bill's brows lowered savagely as he muttered, "Ay, he said truth when he +told you he was a sandal-wood trader, but he lied when--" + +"Sail ho!" shouted the look-out at the masthead. + +"Where, away?" cried Bill, springing to the tiller; while the men, +startled by the sudden cry jumped up and gazed round the horizon. + +"On the starboard quarter, hull down, sir," answered the look-out. + +At this moment the captain came on deck, and mounting into the rigging, +surveyed the sail through the glass. Then sweeping his eye round the +horizon he gazed steadily at a particular point. + +"Take in top-sails," shouted the captain, swinging himself down on the +deck by the main-back stay. + +"Take in top-sails," roared the first mate. + +"Ay, ay, sir-r-r," answered the men as they sprang into the rigging and +went aloft like cats. + +Instantly all was bustle on board the hitherto quiet schooner. The top- +sails were taken in and stowed, the men stood by the sheets and halyards, +and the captain gazed anxiously at the breeze which was now rushing +towards us like a sheet of dark blue. In a few seconds it struck us. The +schooner trembled as if in surprise at the sudden onset, while she fell +away, then bending gracefully to the wind, as though in acknowledgment of +her subjection, she cut through the waves with her sharp prow like a +dolphin, while Bill directed her course towards the strange sail. + +In half an hour we neared her sufficiently to make out that she was a +schooner, and, from the clumsy appearance of her masts and sails we +judged her to be a trader. She evidently did not like our appearance, +for, the instant the breeze reached her, she crowded all sail and showed +us her stern. As the breeze had moderated a little our top-sails were +again shaken out, and it soon became evident,--despite the proverb, "A +stern chase is a long one," that we doubled her speed and would overhaul +her speedily. When within a mile we hoisted British colours, but +receiving no acknowledgment, the captain ordered a shot to be fired +across her bows. In a moment, to my surprise, a large portion of the +bottom of the boat amidships was removed, and in the hole thus exposed +appeared an immense brass gun. It worked on a swivel and was elevated by +means of machinery. It was quickly loaded and fired. The heavy ball +struck the water a few yards ahead of the chase, and, ricochetting into +the air, plunged into the sea a mile beyond it. + +This produced the desired effect. The strange vessel backed her +top-sails and hove-to, while we ranged up and lay-to, about a hundred +yards off. + +"Lower the boat," cried the captain. + +In a second the boat was lowered and manned by a part of the crew, who +were all armed with cutlasses and pistols. As the captain passed me to +get into it, he said, "jump into the stern sheets, Ralph, I may want +you." I obeyed, and in ten minutes more we were standing on the +stranger's deck. We were all much surprised at the sight that met our +eyes. Instead of a crew of such sailors as we were accustomed to see, +there were only fifteen blacks standing on the quarter-deck and regarding +us with looks of undisguised alarm. They were totally unarmed and most +of them unclothed; one or two, however, wore portions of European attire. +One had on a pair of duck trousers which were much too large for him and +stuck out in a most ungainly manner. Another wore nothing but the common +scanty native garment round the loins, and a black beaver hat. But the +most ludicrous personage of all, and one who seemed to be chief, was a +tall middle-aged man, of a mild, simple expression of countenance, who +wore a white cotton shirt, a swallow-tailed coat, and a straw hat, while +his black brawny legs were totally uncovered below the knees. + +"Where's the commander of this ship?" inquired our captain, stepping up +to this individual. + +"I is capin," he answered, taking off his straw hat and making a low bow. + +"You!" said our captain, in surprise. "Where do you come from, and where +are you bound? What cargo have you aboard?" + +"We is come," answered the man with the swallow-tail, "from Aitutaki; we +was go for Rarotonga. We is native miss'nary ship; our name is de _Olive +Branch_; an' our cargo is two tons cocoa-nuts, seventy pigs, twenty cats, +and de Gosp'l." + +This announcement was received by the crew of our vessel with a shout of +laughter, which, however, was peremptorily checked by the captain, whose +expression instantly changed from one of severity to that of frank +urbanity as he advanced towards the missionary and shook him warmly by +the hand. + +"I am very glad to have fallen in with you," said he, "and I wish you +much success in your missionary labours. Pray take me to your cabin, as +I wish to converse with you privately." + +The missionary immediately took him by the hand, and as he led him away I +heard him saying, "Me most glad to find you trader; we t'ought you be +pirate. You very like one 'bout the masts." + +What conversation the captain had with this man I never heard, but he +came on deck again in a quarter of an hour, and, shaking hands cordially +with the missionary, ordered us into our boat and returned to the +schooner, which was immediately put before the wind. In a few minutes +the _Olive Branch_ was left far behind us. + +That afternoon, as I was down below at dinner, I heard the men talking +about this curious ship. + +"I wonder," said one, "why our captain looked so sweet on yon swallow- +tailed super-cargo o' pigs and Gospels. If it had been an ordinary +trader, now, he would have taken as many o' the pigs as he required and +sent the ship with all on board to the bottom." + +"Why, Dick, you must be new to these seas if you don't know that," cried +another. "The captain cares as much for the gospel as you do (an' that's +precious little), but he knows, and everybody knows, that the only place +among the southern islands where a ship can put in and get what she wants +in comfort, is where the gospel has been sent to. There are hundreds o' +islands, at this blessed moment, where you might as well jump straight +into a shark's maw as land without a band o' thirty comrades armed to the +teeth to back you." + +"Ay," said a man with a deep scar over his right eye, "Dick's new to the +work. But if the captain takes us for a cargo o' sandal-wood to the +Feejees he'll get a taste o' these black gentry in their native +condition. For my part I don't know, an' I don't care, what the gospel +does to them; but I know that when any o' the islands chance to get it, +trade goes all smooth an' easy; but where they ha'nt got it, Beelzebub +himself could hardly desire better company." + +"Well, you ought to be a good judge," cried another, laughing, "for +you've never kept any company but the worst all your life!" + +"Ralph Rover!" shouted a voice down the hatchway. "Captain wants you, +aft." + +Springing up the ladder I hastened to the cabin, pondering as I went the +strange testimony borne by these men to the effect of the gospel on +savage natures;--testimony which, as it was perfectly disinterested, I +had no doubt whatever was strictly true. + +On coming again on deck I found Bloody Bill at the helm, and as we were +alone together I tried to draw him into conversation. After repeating to +him the conversation in the forecastle about the missionaries, I said,-- + +"Tell me, Bill, is this schooner really a trader in sandal-wood?" + +"Yes, Ralph, she is; but she's just as really a pirate. The black flag +you saw flying at the peak was no deception." + +"Then how can you say she's a trader?" asked I. + +"Why, as to that, she trades when she can't take by force, but she takes +by force, when she can, in preference. Ralph," he added, lowering his +voice, "if you had seen the bloody deeds that I have witnessed done on +these decks you would not need to ask if we were pirates. But you'll +find it out soon enough. As for the missionaries, the captain favours +them because they are useful to him. The South-Sea islanders are such +incarnate fiends that they are the better of being tamed, and the +missionaries are the only men who can do it." + +Our track after this lay through several clusters of small islets, among +which we were becalmed more than once. During this part of our voyage +the watch on deck and the look-out at the mast-head were more than +usually vigilant, as we were not only in danger of being attacked by the +natives, who, I learned from the captain's remarks, were a bloody and +deceitful tribe at this group, but we were also exposed to much risk from +the multitudes of coral reefs that rose up in the channels between the +islands, some of them just above the surface, others a few feet below it. +Our precautions against the savages I found were indeed necessary. + +One day we were becalmed among a group of small islands, most of which +appeared to be uninhabited. As we were in want of fresh water the +captain sent the boat ashore to bring off a cask or two. But we were +mistaken in thinking there were no natives; for scarcely had we drawn +near to the shore when a band of naked blacks rushed out of the bush and +assembled on the beach, brandishing their clubs and spears in a +threatening manner. Our men were well armed, but refrained from showing +any signs of hostility, and rowed nearer in order to converse with the +natives; and I now found that more than one of the crew could imperfectly +speak dialects of the language peculiar to the South Sea islanders. When +within forty yards of the shore, we ceased rowing, and the first mate +stood up to address the multitude; but, instead of answering us, they +replied with a shower of stones, some of which cut the men severely. +Instantly our muskets were levelled, and a volley was about to be fired, +when the captain hailed us in a loud voice from the schooner, which lay +not more than five or six hundred yards off the shore. + +"Don't fire," he shouted, angrily. "Pull off to the point ahead of you." + +The men looked surprised at this order, and uttered deep curses as they +prepared to obey, for their wrath was roused and they burned for revenge. +Three or four of them hesitated, and seemed disposed to mutiny. + +"Don't distress yourselves, lads," said the mate, while a bitter smile +curled his lip. "Obey orders. The captain's not the man to take an +insult tamely. If Long Tom does not speak presently I'll give myself to +the sharks." + +The men smiled significantly as they pulled from the shore, which was now +crowded with a dense mass of savages, amounting, probably, to five or six +hundred. We had not rowed off above a couple of hundred yards when a +loud roar thundered over the sea, and the big brass gun sent a withering +shower of grape point blank into the midst of the living mass, through +which a wide lane was cut, while a yell, the like of which I could not +have imagined, burst from the miserable survivors as they fled to the +woods. Amongst the heaps of dead that lay on the sand, just where they +had fallen, I could distinguish mutilated forms writhing in agony, while +ever and anon one and another rose convulsively from out the mass, +endeavoured to stagger towards the wood, and ere they had taken a few +steps, fell and wallowed on the bloody sand. My blood curdled within me +as I witnessed this frightful and wanton slaughter; but I had little time +to think, for the captain's deep voice came again over the water towards +us: "Pull ashore, lads, and fill your water casks." The men obeyed in +silence, and it seemed to me as if even their hard hearts were shocked by +the ruthless deed. On gaining the mouth of the rivulet at which we +intended to take in water, we found it flowing with blood, for the +greater part of those who were slain had been standing on the banks of +the stream, a short way above its mouth. Many of the wretched creatures +had fallen into it, and we found one body, which had been carried down, +jammed between two rocks, with the staring eyeballs turned towards us and +his black hair waving in the ripples of the blood-red stream. No one +dared to oppose our landing now, so we carried our casks to a pool above +the murdered group, and having filled them, returned on board. +Fortunately a breeze sprang up soon afterwards and carried us away from +the dreadful spot; but it could not waft me away from the memory of what +I had seen. + +"And this," thought I, gazing in horror at the captain, who, with a quiet +look of indifference, leaned upon the taffrail smoking a cigar and +contemplating the fertile green islets as they passed like a lovely +picture before our eyes--"this is the man who favours the missionaries +because they are useful to him and can tame the savages better than any +one else can do it!" Then I wondered in my mind whether it were possible +for any missionary to tame _him_! + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + +Bloody Bill is communicative and sagacious--Unpleasant +prospects--Retrospective meditations interrupted by volcanic agency--The +pirates negotiate with a Feejee chief--Various etceteras that are +calculated to surprise and horrify. + +It was many days after the events just narrated ere I recovered a little +of my wonted spirits. I could not shake off the feeling for a long time +that I was in a frightful dream, and the sight of our captain filled me +with so much horror that I kept out of his way as much as my duties about +the cabin would permit. Fortunately he took so little notice of me that +he did not observe my changed feelings towards him, otherwise it might +have been worse for me. + +But I was now resolved that I would run away the very first island we +should land at, and commit myself to the hospitality of the natives +rather than remain an hour longer than I could help in the pirate +schooner. I pondered this subject a good deal, and at last made up my +mind to communicate my intention to Bloody Bill; for, during several +talks I had had with him of late, I felt assured that he too would +willingly escape if possible. When I told him of my design he shook his +head. "No, no, Ralph," said he, "you must not think of running away +here. Among some of the groups of islands you might do so with safety, +but if you tried it here you would find that you had jumped out of the +fryin' pan into the fire." + +"How so, Bill?" said I, "would the natives not receive me?" + +"That they would, lad; but they would eat you too." + +"Eat me!" said I in surprise, "I thought the South Sea islanders never +ate anybody except their enemies." + +"Humph!" ejaculated Bill. "I s'pose 'twas yer tender-hearted friends in +England that put that notion into your head. There's a set o' +soft-hearted folk at home that I knows on, who don't like to have their +feelin's ruffled, and when you tell them anything they don't like--that +shocks them, as they call it--no matter how true it be, they stop their +ears and cry out, 'Oh, that is _too_ horrible! We can't believe that!' +An' they say truth. They can't believe it 'cause they won't believe it. +Now, I believe there's thousands o' the people in England who are sich +born drivellin' _won't-believers_ that they think the black fellows +hereaway, at the worst, eat an enemy only now an' then, out o' spite; +whereas, I know for certain, and many captains of the British and +American navies know as well as me, that the Feejee islanders eat not +only their enemies but one another; and they do it not for spite, but for +pleasure. It's a _fact_ that they prefer human flesh to any other. But +they don't like white men's flesh so well as black. They say it makes +them sick." + +"Why, Bill," said I, "you told me just now that they would eat _me_ if +they caught me." + +"So I did; and so I think they would. I've only heard some o' them say +they don't like white men _so well_ as black; but if they was hungry they +wouldn't be particular. Anyhow, I'm sure they would kill you. You see, +Ralph, I've been a good while in them parts, and I've visited the +different groups of islands oftentimes as a trader. And thorough goin' +blackguards some o' them traders are. No better than pirates, I can tell +you. One captain that I sailed with was not a chip better than the one +we're with now. He was tradin' with a friendly chief one day, aboard his +vessel. The chief had swam off to us with the things for trade tied a- +top of his head, for them chaps are like otters in the water. Well, the +chief was hard on the captain, and would not part with some o' his +things. When their bargainin' was over they shook hands, and the chief +jumped over board to swim ashore; but before he got forty yards from the +ship the captain seized a musket and shot him dead. He then hove up +anchor and put to sea, and as we sailed along shore, he dropped six black- +fellows with his rifle, remarkin' that 'that would spoil the trade for +the next comers.' But, as I was sayin', I'm up to the ways o' these +fellows. One o' the laws o' the country is, that every shipwrecked +person who happens to be cast ashore, be he dead or alive, is doomed to +be roasted and eaten. There was a small tradin' schooner wrecked off one +of these islands when we were lyin' there in harbour during a storm. The +crew was lost, all but three men, who swam ashore. The moment they +landed they were seized by the natives and carried up into the woods. We +knew pretty well what their fate would be, but we could not help them, +for our crew was small, and if we had gone ashore they would likely have +killed us all. We never saw the three men again; but we heard frightful +yelling, and dancing, and merry-making that night; and one of the +natives, who came aboard to trade with us next day, told us that the +_long pigs_, as he called the men, had been roasted and eaten, and their +bones were to be converted into sail needles. He also said that white +men were bad to eat, and that most o' the people on shore were sick." + +I was very much shocked and cast down in my mind at this terrible account +of the natives, and asked Bill what he would advise me to do. Looking +round the deck to make sure that we were not overheard, he lowered his +voice and said, "There are two or three ways that we might escape, Ralph, +but none o' them's easy. If the captain would only sail for some o' the +islands near Tahiti, we might run away there well enough, because the +natives are all Christians; an' we find that wherever the savages take up +with Christianity they always give over their bloody ways, and are safe +to be trusted. I never cared for Christianity myself," he continued, in +a soliloquising voice, "and I don't well know what it means; but a man +with half an eye can see what it does for these black critters. However, +the captain always keeps a sharp look out after us when we get to these +islands, for he half suspects that one or two o' us are tired of his +company. Then, we might manage to cut the boat adrift some fine night +when it's our watch on deck, and clear off before they discovered that we +were gone. But we would run the risk o' bein' caught by the blacks. I +wouldn't like to try that plan. But you and I will think over it, Ralph, +and see what's to be done. In the meantime it's our watch below, so I'll +go and turn in." + +Bill then bade me good night, and went below, while a comrade took his +place at the helm; but, feeling no desire to enter into conversation with +him, I walked aft, and, leaning over the stern, looked down into the +phosphorescent waves that gargled around the ladder, and streamed out +like a flame of blue light in the vessel's wake. My thoughts were very +sad, and I could scarce refrain from tears as I contrasted my present +wretched position with the happy, peaceful time, I had spent on the Coral +Island with my dear companions. As I thought upon Jack and Peterkin +anxious forebodings crossed my mind, and I pictured to myself the grief +and dismay with which they would search every nook and corner of the +island, in a vain attempt to discover my dead body; for I felt assured +that if they did not see any sign of the pirate schooner or boat, when +they came out of the cave to look for me, they would never imagine that I +had been carried away. I wondered, too, how Jack would succeed in +getting Peterkin out of the cave without my assistance; and I trembled +when I thought that he might lose presence of mind, and begin to kick +when he was in the tunnel! These thoughts were suddenly interrupted and +put to flight by a bright red blaze which lighted up the horizon to the +southward, and cut a crimson glow far over the sea. This appearance was +accompanied by a low growling sound, as of distant thunder, and, at the +same time, the sky above us became black, while a hot stifling wind blew +around us in fitful gusts. + +The crew assembled hastily on deck, and most of them were under the +belief that a frightful hurricane was pending; but the captain coming on +deck, soon explained the phenomena. + +"It's only a volcano," said he. "I knew there was one hereabouts, but +thought it was extinct. Up there and furl top-gallant-sails; we'll +likely have a breeze, and it's well to be ready." + +As he spoke, a shower began to fall, which we quickly observed was not +rain, but fine ashes. As we were many miles distant from the volcano, +these must have been carried to us from it by the wind. As the captain +had predicted, a stiff breeze soon afterwards sprang up, under the +influence of which we speedily left the volcano far behind us; but during +the greater part of the night we could see its lurid glare and hear its +distant thunder. The shower did not cease to fall for several hours, and +we must have sailed under it for nearly forty miles, perhaps farther. +When we emerged from the cloud, our decks and every part of the rigging +were completely covered with a thick coat of ashes. I was much +interested in this, and recollected that Jack had often spoken of many of +the islands of the Pacific as being volcanoes, either active or extinct, +and had said that the whole region was more or less volcanic, and that +some scientific men were of opinion that the islands of the Pacific were +nothing more or less than the mountain tops of a huge continent which had +sunk under the influence of volcanic agency. + +Three days after passing the volcano, we found ourselves a few miles to +windward of an island of considerable size and luxuriant aspect. It +consisted of two mountains, which seemed to be nearly four thousand feet +high. They were separated from each other by a broad valley, whose thick- +growing trees ascended a considerable distance up the mountain sides; and +rich level plains, or meadow-land, spread round the base of the +mountains, except at the point immediately opposite the large valley, +where a river seemed to carry the trees, as it were, along with it down +to the white sandy shore. The mountain tops, unlike those of our Coral +Island, were sharp, needle-shaped, and bare, while their sides were more +rugged and grand in outline than anything I had yet seen in those seas. +Bloody Bill was beside me when the island first hove in sight. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, "I know that island well. They call it Emo." + +"Have you been here before, then?" I inquired. + +"Ay, that I have, often, and so has this schooner. 'Tis a famous island +for sandal-wood. We have taken many cargoes off it already, and have +paid for them too; for the savages are so numerous that we dared not try +to take it by force. But our captain has tried to cheat them so often, +that they're beginnin' not to like us overmuch now. Besides, the men +behaved ill the last time we were here; and I wonder the captain is not +afraid to venture. But he's afraid o' nothing earthly, I believe." + +We soon ran inside the barrier coral-reef, and let go our anchor in six +fathoms water, just opposite the mouth of a small creek, whose shores +were densely covered with mangroves and tall umbrageous trees. The +principal village of the natives lay about half a mile from this point. +Ordering the boat out, the captain jumped into it, and ordered me to +follow him. The men, fifteen in number, were well armed; and the mate +was directed to have Long Tom ready for emergencies. + +"Give way, lads," cried the captain. + +The oars fell into the water at the word, the boat shot from the +schooner's side, and in a few minutes reached the shore. Here, contrary +to our expectation, we were met with the utmost cordiality by Romata, the +principal chief of the island, who conducted us to his house, and gave us +mats to sit upon. I observed in passing that the natives, of whom there +were two or three thousand, were totally unarmed. + +After a short preliminary palaver, a feast of baked pigs and various +roots was spread before us; of which we partook sparingly, and then +proceeded to business. The captain stated his object in visiting the +island, regretted that there had been a slight misunderstanding during +the last visit, and hoped that no ill-will was borne by either party, and +that a satisfactory trade would be accomplished. + +Romata answered that he had forgotten there had been any differences +between them, protested that he was delighted to see his friends again, +and assured them they should have every assistance in cutting and +embarking the wood. The terms were afterwards agreed on, and we rose to +depart. All this conversation was afterwards explained to me by Bill, +who understood the language pretty well. + +Romata accompanied us on board, and explained that a great chief from +another island was then on a visit to him, and that he was to be +ceremoniously entertained on the following day. After begging to be +allowed to introduce him to us, and receiving permission, he sent his +canoe ashore to bring him off. At the same time he gave orders to bring +on board his two favourites, a cock and a paroquet. While the canoe was +gone on this errand, I had time to regard the savage chief attentively. +He was a man of immense size, with massive but beautifully moulded limbs +and figure, only parts of which, the broad chest and muscular arms, were +uncovered; for, although the lower orders generally wore no other +clothing than a strip of cloth called _maro_ round their loins, the +chief, on particular occasions, wrapped his person in voluminous folds of +a species of native cloth made from the bark of the Chinese +paper-mulberry. Romata wore a magnificent black beard and moustache, and +his hair was frizzed out to such an extent that it resembled a large +turban, in which was stuck a long wooden pin! I afterwards found that +this pin served for scratching the head, for which purpose the fingers +were too short without disarranging the hair. But Romata put himself to +much greater inconvenience on account of his hair, for we found that he +slept with his head resting on a wooden pillow, in which was cut a hollow +for the neck, so that the hair of the sleeper might not be disarranged. + +In ten minutes the canoe returned, bringing the other chief, who +certainly presented a most extraordinary appearance, having painted one +half of his face red and the other half yellow, besides ornamenting it +with various designs in black! Otherwise he was much the same in +appearance as Romata, though not so powerfully built. As this chief had +never seen a ship before, except, perchance, some of the petty traders +that at long intervals visit these remote islands, he was much taken up +with the neatness and beauty of all the fittings of the schooner. He was +particularly struck with a musket which was shown to him, and asked where +the white men got hatchets hard enough to cut the tree of which the +barrel was made! While he was thus engaged, his brother chief stood +aloof, talking with the captain, and fondling a superb cock and a little +blue-headed paroquet, the favourites of which I have before spoken. I +observed that all the other natives walked in a crouching posture while +in the presence of Romata. Before our guests left us, the captain +ordered the brass gun to be uncovered and fired for their gratification; +and I have every reason to believe he did so for the purpose of showing +our superior power, in case the natives should harbour any evil designs +against us. Romata had never seen this gun before, as it had not been +uncovered on previous visits, and the astonishment with which he viewed +it was very amusing. Being desirous of knowing its power, he begged that +the captain would fire it. So a shot was put into it. The chiefs were +then directed to look at a rock about two miles out at sea, and the gun +was fired. In a second the top of the rock was seen to burst asunder, +and to fall in fragments into the sea. + +Romata was so delighted with the success of this shot, that he pointed to +a man who was walking on the shore, and begged the captain to fire at +him, evidently supposing that his permission was quite sufficient to +justify the captain in such an act. He was therefore surprised, and not +a little annoyed, when the captain refused to fire at the native, and +ordered the gun to be housed. + +Of all the things, however, that afforded matter of amusement to these +savages, that which pleased Romata's visitor most was the ship's pump. He +never tired of examining it, and pumping up the water. Indeed, so much +was he taken up with this pump, that he could not be prevailed on to +return on shore, but sent a canoe to fetch his favourite stool, on which +he seated himself, and spent the remainder of the day in pumping the +bilge-water out of the ship! + +Next day the crew went ashore to cut sandal-wood, while the captain, with +one or two men, remained on board, in order to be ready, if need be, with +the brass gun, which was unhoused and conspicuously elevated, with its +capacious muzzle directed point blank at the chief's house. The men were +fully armed as usual; and the captain ordered me to go with them, to +assist in the work. I was much pleased with this order, for it freed me +from the captain's company, which I could not now endure, and it gave me +an opportunity of seeing the natives. + +As we wound along in single file through the rich fragrant groves of +banana, cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and other trees, I observed that there +were many of the plum and banian trees, with which I had become familiar +on the Coral Island. I noticed also large quantities of taro-roots, +yams, and sweet potatoes, growing in enclosures. On turning into an open +glade of the woods, we came abruptly upon a cluster of native houses. +They were built chiefly of bamboos, and were thatched with the large +thick leaves of the pandanus; but many of them had little more than a +sloping roof and three sides with an open front, being the most simple +shelter from the weather that could well be imagined. Within these, and +around them, were groups of natives--men, women, and children--who all +stood up to gaze at us as we marched along, followed by the party of men +whom the chief had sent to escort us. About half a mile inland we +arrived at the spot where the sandal-wood grew, and, while the men set to +work, I clambered up an adjoining hill to observe the country. + +About mid-day, the chief arrived with several followers, one of whom +carried a baked pig on a wooden platter, with yams and potatoes on +several plantain leaves, which he presented to the men, who sat down +under the shade of a tree to dine. The chief sat down to dine also; but, +to my surprise, instead of feeding himself, one of his wives performed +that office for him! I was seated beside Bill, and asked him the reason +of this. + +"It is beneath his dignity, I believe, to feed himself," answered Bill; +"but I daresay he's not particular, except on great occasions. They've a +strange custom among them, Ralph, which is called _tabu_, and they carry +it to great lengths. If a man chooses a particular tree for his god, the +fruit o' that tree is tabued to him; and if he eats it, he is sure to be +killed by his people, and eaten, of course, for killing means eating +hereaway. Then, you see that great mop o' hair on the chief's head? +Well, he has a lot o' barbers to keep it in order; and it's a law that +whoever touches the head of a living chief or the body of a dead one, his +hands are tabued; so, in that way, the barbers' hands are always tabued, +and they daren't use them for their lives, but have to be fed like big +babies, as they are, sure enough!" + +"That's odd, Bill. But look there," said I, pointing to a man whose skin +was of a much lighter colour than the generality of the natives. "I've +seen a few of these light-skinned fellows among the Fejeeans. They seem +to me to be of quite a different race." + +"So they are," answered Bill. "These fellows come from the Tongan +Islands, which lie a long way to the eastward. They come here to build +their big war-canoes; and as these take two, and sometimes four years, to +build, there's always some o' the brown-skins among the black sarpents o' +these islands." + +"By the way, Bill," said I, "your mentioning serpents, reminds me that I +have not seen a reptile of any kind since I came to this part of the +world." + +"No more there are any," said Bill, "if ye except the niggers themselves, +there's none on the islands, but a lizard or two and some sich harmless +things. But I never seed any myself. If there's none on the land, +however, there's more than enough in the water, and that minds me of a +wonderful brute they have here. But, come, I'll show it to you." So +saying, Bill arose, and, leaving the men still busy with the baked pig, +led me into the forest. After proceeding a short distance we came upon a +small pond of stagnant water. A native lad had followed us, to whom we +called and beckoned him to come to us. On Bill saying a few words to +him, which I did not understand, the boy advanced to the edge of the +pond, and gave a low peculiar whistle. Immediately the water became +agitated and an enormous eel thrust its head above the surface and +allowed the youth to touch it. It was about twelve feet long, and as +thick round the body as a man's thigh. + +"There," said Bill, his lip curling with contempt, "what do you think of +that for a god, Ralph? This is one o' their gods, and it has been fed +with dozens o' livin' babies already. How many more it'll get afore it +dies is hard to say." + +"Babies?" said I, with an incredulous look + +"Ay, babies," returned Bill. "Your soft-hearted folk at home would say, +'Oh, horrible! impossible!' to that, and then go away as comfortable and +unconcerned as if their sayin' 'horrible! impossible!' had made it a lie. +But I tell you, Ralph, it's a _fact_. I've seed it with my own eyes the +last time I was here, an' mayhap if you stop a while at this accursed +place, and keep a sharp look out, you'll see it too. They don't feed it +regularly with livin' babies, but they give it one now and then as a +treat. Bah! you brute!' cried Bill, in disgust, giving the reptile a +kick on the snout with his heavy boot, that sent it sweltering back in +agony into its loathsome pool. I thought it lucky for Bill, indeed for +all of us, that the native youth's back happened to be turned at the +time, for I am certain that if the poor savages had come to know that we +had so rudely handled their god, we should have had to fight our way back +to the ship. As we retraced our steps I questioned my companion further +on this subject. + +"How comes it, Bill, that the mothers allow such a dreadful thing to be +done?" + +"Allow it? the mothers _do_ it! It seems to me that there's nothing too +fiendish or diabolical for these people to do. Why, in some of the +islands they have an institution called the _Areoi_, and the persons +connected with that body are ready for any wickedness that mortal man can +devise. In fact they stick at nothing; and one o' their customs is to +murder their infants the moment they are born. The mothers agree to it, +and the fathers do it. And the mildest ways they have of murdering them +is by sticking them through the body with sharp splinters of bamboo, +strangling them with their thumbs, or burying them alive and stamping +them to death while under the sod." + +I felt sick at heart while my companion recited these horrors. + +"But it's a curious fact," he continued, after a pause, during which we +walked in silence towards the spot where we had left our comrades,--"it's +a curious fact, that wherever the missionaries get a footin' all these +things come to an end at once, an' the savages take to doin' each other +good, and singin' psalms, just like Methodists." + +"God bless the missionaries!" said I, while a feeling of enthusiasm +filled my heart, so that I could speak with difficulty. "God bless and +prosper the missionaries till they get a footing in every island of the +sea!" + +"I would say Amen to that prayer, Ralph, if I could," said Bill, in a +deep, sad voice; "but it would be a mere mockery for a man to ask a +blessing for others who dare not ask one for himself. But, Ralph," he +continued, "I've not told you half o' the abominations I have seen durin' +my life in these seas. If we pull long together, lad, I'll tell you +more; and if times have not changed very much since I was here last, it's +like that you'll have a chance o' seeing a little for yourself before +long." + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + +The Sandal-wood party--Native children's games, somewhat +surprising--Desperate amusements suddenly and fatally brought to a +close--An old friend recognised--News--Romata's mad conduct. + +Next day the wood-cutting party went ashore again, and I accompanied them +as before. During the dinner hour I wandered into the woods alone, being +disinclined for food that day. I had not rambled far when I found myself +unexpectedly on the sea-shore, having crossed a narrow neck of land which +separated the native village from a large bay. Here I found a party of +the islanders busy with one of their war-canoes, which was almost ready +for launching. I stood for a long time watching this party with great +interest, and observed that they fastened the timbers and planks to each +other very much in the same way in which I had seen Jack fasten those of +our little boat. But what surprised me most was its immense length, +which I measured very carefully, and found to be a hundred feet long; and +it was so capacious that it could have held three hundred men. It had +the unwieldy out-rigger and enormously high stern-posts which I had +remarked on the canoe that came to us while I was on the Coral Island. +Observing some boys playing at games a short way along the beach, I +resolved to go and watch them; but as I turned from the natives who were +engaged so busily and cheerfully at their work, I little thought of the +terrible event that hung on the completion of that war-canoe. + +Advancing towards the children, who were so numerous that I began to +think this must be the general play-ground of the village, I sat down on +a grassy bank under the shade of a plantain-tree, to watch them. And a +happier or more noisy crew I have never seen. There were at least two +hundred of them, both boys and girls, all of whom were clad in no other +garments than their own glossy little black skins, except the maro, or +strip of cloth round the loins of the boys, and a very short petticoat or +kilt on the girls. They did not all play at the same game, but amused +themselves in different groups. + +One band was busily engaged in a game exactly similar to our blind-man's- +buff. Another set were walking on stilts, which raised the children +three feet from the ground. They were very expert at this amusement and +seldom tumbled. In another place I observed a group of girls standing +together, and apparently enjoying themselves very much; so I went up to +see what they were doing, and found that they were opening their eye-lids +with their fingers till their eyes appeared of an enormous size, and then +thrusting pieces of straw between the upper and lower lids, across the +eye-ball, to keep them in that position! This seemed to me, I must +confess, a very foolish as well as dangerous amusement. Nevertheless the +children seemed to be greatly delighted with the hideous faces they made. +I pondered this subject a good deal, and thought that if little children +knew how silly they seem to grown-up people when they make faces, they +would not be so fond of doing it. In another place were a number of boys +engaged in flying kites, and I could not help wondering that some of the +games of those little savages should be so like to our own, although they +had never seen us at play. But the kites were different from ours in +many respects, being of every variety of shape. They were made of very +thin cloth, and the boys raised them to a wonderful height in the air by +means of twine made from the cocoa-nut husk. Other games there were, +some of which showed the natural depravity of the hearts of these poor +savages, and made me wish fervently that missionaries might be sent out +to them. But the amusement which the greatest number of the children of +both sexes seemed to take chief delight in, was swimming and diving in +the sea; and the expertness which they exhibited was truly amazing. They +seemed to have two principal games in the water, one of which was to dive +off a sort of stage which had been erected near a deep part of the sea, +and chase each other in the water. Some of them went down to an +extraordinary depth; others skimmed along the surface, or rolled over and +over like porpoises, or diving under each other, came up unexpectedly and +pulled each other down by a leg or an arm. They never seemed to tire of +this sport, and, from the great heat of the water in the South Seas, they +could remain in it nearly all day without feeling chilled. Many of these +children were almost infants, scarce able to walk; yet they staggered +down the beach, flung their round fat little black bodies fearlessly into +deep water, and struck out to sea with as much confidence as ducklings. + +The other game to which I have referred was swimming in the surf. But as +this is an amusement in which all engage, from children of ten to gray- +headed men of sixty, and as I had an opportunity of witnessing it in +perfection the day following, I shall describe it more minutely. + +I suppose it was in honour of their guest that this grand swimming-match +was got up, for Romata came and told the captain that they were going to +engage in it, and begged him to "come and see." + +"What sort of amusement is this surf swimming?" I inquired of Bill, as we +walked together to a part of the shore on which several thousands of the +natives were assembled. + +"It's a very favourite lark with these 'xtr'or'nary critters," replied +Bill, giving a turn to the quid of tobacco that invariably bulged out his +left cheek. "Ye see, Ralph, them fellows take to the water as soon +a'most as they can walk, an' long before they can do that anything +respectably, so that they are as much at home in the sea as on the land. +Well, ye see, I 'spose they found swimmin' for miles out to sea, and +divin' fathoms deep, wasn't exciting enough, so they invented this game +o' the surf. Each man and boy, as you see, has got a short board or +plank, with which he swims out for a mile or more to sea, and then, +gettin' on the top o' yon thundering breaker, they come to shore on the +top of it, yellin' and screechin' like fiends. It's a marvel to me that +they're not dashed to shivers on the coral reef, for sure an' sartin am I +that if any o' us tried it, we wouldn't be worth the fluke of a broken +anchor after the wave fell. But there they go!" + +As he spoke, several hundreds of the natives, amongst whom we were now +standing, uttered a loud yell, rushed down the beach, plunged into the +surf, and were carried off by the seething foam of the retreating wave. + +At the point where we stood, the encircling coral reef joined the shore, +so that the magnificent breakers, which a recent stiff breeze had +rendered larger than usual, fell in thunder at the feet of the multitudes +who lined the beach. For some time the swimmers continued to strike out +to sea, breasting over the swell like hundreds of black seals. Then they +all turned, and, watching an approaching billow, mounted its white crest, +and, each laying his breast on the short flat board, came rolling towards +the shore, careering on the summit of the mighty wave, while they and the +onlookers shouted and yelled with excitement. Just as the monster wave +curled in solemn majesty to fling its bulky length upon the beach, most +of the swimmers slid back into the trough behind; others, slipping off +their boards, seized them in their hands, and, plunging through the +watery waste, swam out to repeat the amusement; but a few, who seemed to +me the most reckless, continued their career until they were launched +upon the beach, and enveloped in the churning foam and spray. One of +these last came in on the crest of the wave most manfully, and landed +with a violent bound almost on the spot where Bill and I stood. I saw by +his peculiar head-dress that he was the chief whom the tribe entertained +as their guest. The sea-water had removed nearly all the paint with +which his face had been covered; and, as he rose panting to his feet, I +recognised, to my surprise, the features of Tararo, my old friend of the +Coral Island! + +Tararo at the same moment recognised me, and, advancing quickly, took me +round the neck and rubbed noses; which had the effect of transferring a +good deal of the moist paint from his nose to mine. Then, recollecting +that this was not the white man's mode of salutation, he grasped me by +the hand and shook it violently. + +"Hallo, Ralph!" cried Bill, in surprise, "that chap seems to have taken a +sudden fancy to you, or he must be an old acquaintance." + +"Right, Bill," I replied, "he is indeed an old acquaintance;" and I +explained in a few words that he was the chief whose party Jack and +Peterkin and I had helped to save. + +Tararo having thrown away his surf-board, entered into an animated +conversation with Bill, pointing frequently during the course of it to +me; whereby I concluded he must be telling him about the memorable +battle, and the part we had taken in it. When he paused, I begged of +Bill to ask him about the woman Avatea, for I had some hope that she +might have come with Tararo on this visit. "And ask him," said I, "who +she is, for I am persuaded she is of a different race from the +Feejeeans." On the mention of her name the chief frowned darkly, and +seemed to speak with much anger. + +"You're right, Ralph," said Bill, when the chief had ceased to talk; +"she's not a Feejee girl, but a Samoan. How she ever came to this place +the chief does not very clearly explain, but he says she was taken in +war, and that he got her three years ago, an' kept her as his daughter +ever since. Lucky for her, poor girl, else she'd have been roasted and +eaten like the rest." + +"But why does Tararo frown and look so angry?" said I. + +"Because the girl's somewhat obstinate, like most o' the sex, an' won't +marry the man he wants her to. It seems that a chief of some other +island came on a visit to Tararo and took a fancy to her, but she +wouldn't have him on no account, bein' already in love, and engaged to a +young chief whom Tararo hates, and she kicked up a desperate shindy; so, +as he was going on a war expedition in his canoe, he left her to think +about it, sayin' he'd be back in six months or so, when he hoped she +wouldn't be so obstropolous. This happened just a week ago; an' Tararo +says that if she's not ready to go, when the chief returns, as his bride, +she'll be sent to him as a _long pig_." + +"As a long pig!" I exclaimed in surprise; "why what does he mean by +that?" + +"He means somethin' very unpleasant," answered Bill with a frown. "You +see these blackguards eat men an' women just as readily as they eat pigs; +and, as baked pigs and baked men are very like each other in appearance, +they call men _long_ pigs. If Avatea goes to this fellow as a long pig, +it's all up with her, poor thing." + +"Is she on the island now?" I asked eagerly. + +"No, she's at Tararo's island." + +"And where does it lie?" + +"About fifty or sixty miles to the south'ard o' this," returned Bill; +"but I--" + +At this moment we were startled by the cry of "Mao! mao!--a shark! a +shark!" which was immediately followed by a shriek that rang clear and +fearfully loud above the tumult of cries that arose from the savages in +the water and on the land. We turned hastily towards the direction +whence the cry came, and had just time to observe the glaring eye-balls +of one of the swimmers as he tossed his arms in the air. Next instant he +was pulled under the waves. A canoe was instantly launched, and the hand +of the drowning man was caught, but only half of his body was dragged +from the maw of the monster, which followed the canoe until the water +became so shallow that it could scarcely swim. The crest of the next +billow was tinged with red as it rolled towards the shore. + +In most countries of the world this would have made a deep impression on +the spectators, but the only effect it had upon these islanders was to +make them hurry with all speed out of the sea, lest a similar fate should +befall some of the others; but, so utterly reckless were they of human +life, that it did not for a moment suspend the progress of their +amusements. It is true the surf-swimming ended for that time somewhat +abruptly, but they immediately proceeded with other games. Bill told me +that sharks do not often attack the surf-swimmers, being frightened away +by the immense numbers of men and boys in the water, and by the shouting +and splashing that they make. "But," said he, "such a thing as you have +seen just now don't frighten them much. They'll be at it again to-morrow +or next day, just as if there wasn't a single shark between Feejee and +Nova Zembla." + +After this the natives had a series of wrestling and boxing matches; and +being men of immense size and muscle, they did a good deal of injury to +each other, especially in boxing, in which not only the lower orders, but +several of the chiefs and priests engaged. Each bout was very quickly +terminated, for they did not pretend to a scientific knowledge of the +art, and wasted no time in sparring, but hit straight out at each other's +heads, and their blows were delivered with great force. Frequently one +of the combatants was knocked down with a single blow; and one gigantic +fellow hit his adversary so severely that he drove the skin entirely off +his forehead. This feat was hailed with immense applause by the +spectators. + +During these exhibitions, which were very painful to me, though I confess +I could not refrain from beholding them, I was struck with the beauty of +many of the figures and designs that were tattooed on the persons of the +chiefs and principal men. One figure, that seemed to me very elegant, +was that of a palm-tree tattooed on the back of a man's leg, the roots +rising, as it were, from under his heel, the stem ascending the tendon of +the ankle, and the graceful head branching out upon the calf. I +afterwards learned that this process of tattooing is very painful, and +takes long to do, commencing at the age of ten, and being continued at +intervals up to the age of thirty. It is done by means of an instrument +made of bone, with a number of sharp teeth with which the skin is +punctured. Into these punctures a preparation made from the kernel of +the candle-nut, mixed with cocoa-nut oil, is rubbed, and the mark thus +made is indelible. The operation is performed by a class of men whose +profession it is, and they tattoo as much at a time, as the person on +whom they are operating can bear; which is not much, the pain and +inflammation caused by tattooing being very great, sometimes causing +death. Some of the chiefs were tattooed with an ornamental stripe down +the legs, which gave them the appearance of being clad in tights. Others +had marks round the ankles and insteps, which looked like tight-fitting +and elegant boots. Their faces were also tattooed, and their breasts +were very profusely marked with every imaginable species of +device,--muskets, dogs, birds, pigs, clubs, and canoes, intermingled with +lozenges, squares, circles, and other arbitrary figures. + +The women were not tattooed so much as the men, having only a few marks +on their feet and arms. But I must say, however objectionable this +strange practice may be, it nevertheless had this good effect, that it +took away very much from their appearance of nakedness. + +Next day, while we were returning from the woods to our schooner, we +observed Romata rushing about in the neighbourhood of his house, +apparently mad with passion. + +"Ah!" said Bill to me, "there he's at his old tricks again. That's his +way when he gets drink. The natives make a sort of drink o' their own, +and it makes him bad enough; but when he gets brandy he's like a wild +tiger. The captain, I suppose, has given him a bottle, as usual, to keep +him in good humour. After drinkin' he usually goes to sleep, and the +people know it well and keep out of his way, for fear they should waken +him. Even the babies are taken out of ear-shot; for, when he's waked up, +he rushes out just as you see him now, and spears or clubs the first +person he meets." + +It seemed at the present time, however, that no deadly weapon had been in +his way, for the infuriated chief was raging about without one. Suddenly +he caught sight of an unfortunate man who was trying to conceal himself +behind a tree. Rushing towards him, Romata struck him a terrible blow on +the head, which knocked out the poor man's eye and also dislocated the +chief's finger. The wretched creature offered no resistance; he did not +even attempt to parry the blow. Indeed, from what Bill said, I found +that he might consider himself lucky in having escaped with his life, +which would certainly have been forfeited had the chief been possessed of +a club at the time. + +"Have these wretched creatures no law among themselves," said I, "which +can restrain such wickedness?" + +"None," replied Bill. "The chief's word is law. He might kill and eat a +dozen of his own subjects any day for nothing more than his own pleasure, +and nobody would take the least notice of it." + +This ferocious deed took place within sight of our party as we wended our +way to the beach, but I could not observe any other expression on the +faces of the men than that of total indifference or contempt. It seemed +to me a very awful thing that it should be possible for men to come to +such hardness of heart and callousness to the sight of bloodshed and +violence; but, indeed, I began to find that such constant exposure to +scenes of blood was having a slight effect upon myself, and I shuddered +when I came to think that I, too, was becoming callous. + +I thought upon this subject much that night while I walked up and down +the deck during my hours of watch; and I came to the conclusion that if +I, who hated, abhorred, and detested such bloody deeds as I had witnessed +within the last few weeks, could so soon come to be less sensitive about +them, how little wonder that these poor ignorant savages, who were born +and bred in familiarity therewith, should think nothing of them at all, +and should hold human life in so very slight esteem. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + +Mischief brewing--My blood is made to run cold--Evil consultations and +wicked resolves--Bloody Bill attempts to do good and fails--The +attack--Wholesale murder--The flight--The escape. + +Next morning I awoke with a feverish brow and a feeling of deep +depression at my heart; and the more I thought on my unhappy fate, the +more wretched and miserable did I feel. + +I was surrounded on all sides by human beings of the most dreadful +character, to whom the shedding of blood was mere pastime. On shore were +the natives, whose practices were so horrible that I could not think of +them without shuddering. On board were none but pirates of the blackest +dye, who, although not cannibals, were foul murderers, and more +blameworthy even than the savages, inasmuch as they knew better. Even +Bill, with whom I had, under the strange circumstances of my lot, formed +a kind of intimacy, was so fierce in his nature as to have acquired the +title of "Bloody" from his vile companions. I felt very much cast down +the more I considered the subject and the impossibility of delivery, as +it seemed to me, at least for a long time to come. At last, in my +feeling of utter helplessness, I prayed fervently to the Almighty that he +would deliver me out of my miserable condition; and when I had done so I +felt some degree of comfort. + +When the captain came on deck, before the hour at which the men usually +started for the woods, I begged of him to permit me to remain aboard that +day, as I did not feel well; but he looked at me angrily, and ordered me, +in a surly tone, to get ready to go on shore as usual. The fact was that +the captain had been out of humour for some time past. Romata and he had +had some differences, and high words had passed between them, during +which the chief had threatened to send a fleet of his war-canoes, with a +thousand men, to break up and burn the schooner; whereupon the captain +smiled sarcastically, and going up to the chief gazed sternly in his +face, while he said, "I have only to raise my little finger just now, and +my big gun will blow your whole village to atoms in five minutes!" +Although the chief was a bold man, he quailed before the pirate's glance +and threat, and made no reply; but a bad feeling had been raised and old +sores had been opened. + +I had, therefore, to go with the wood-cutters that day. Before starting, +however, the captain called me into the cabin, and said,-- + +"Here, Ralph, I've got a mission for you, lad. That blackguard Romata is +in the dumps, and nothing will mollify him but a gift; so do you go up to +his house and give him these whales' teeth, with my compliments. Take +with you one of the men who can speak the language." + +I looked at the gift in some surprise, for it consisted of six white +whales' teeth, and two of the same dyed bright red, which seemed to me +very paltry things. However, I did not dare to hesitate or ask any +questions; so, gathering them up, I left the cabin and was soon on my way +to the chief's house, accompanied by Bill. On expressing my surprise at +the gift, he said,-- + +"They're paltry enough to you or me, Ralph, but they're considered of +great value by them chaps. They're a sort o' cash among them. The red +ones are the most prized, one of them bein' equal to twenty o' the white +ones. I suppose the only reason for their bein' valuable is that there +ain't many of them, and they're hard to be got." + +On arriving at the house we found Romata sitting on a mat, in the midst +of a number of large bales of native cloth and other articles, which had +been brought to him as presents from time to time by inferior chiefs. He +received us rather haughtily, but on Bill explaining the nature of our +errand he became very condescending, and his eyes glistened with +satisfaction when he received the whales' teeth, although he laid them +aside with an assumption of kingly indifference. + +"Go," said he, with a wave of the hand,--"go, tell your captain that he +may cut wood to-day, but not to-morrow. He must come ashore,--I want to +have a palaver with him." + +As we left the house to return to the woods, Bill shook his head: + +"There's mischief brewin' in that black rascal's head. I know him of +old. But what comes here?" + +As he spoke, we heard the sound of laughter and shouting in the wood, and +presently there issued from it a band of savages, in the midst of whom +were a number of men bearing burdens on their shoulders. At first I +thought that these burdens were poles with something rolled round them, +the end of each pole resting on a man's shoulder. But on a nearer +approach I saw that they were human beings, tied hand and foot, and so +lashed to the poles that they could not move. I counted twenty of them +as they passed. + +"More murder!" said Bill, in a voice that sounded between a hoarse laugh +and a groan. + +"Surely they are not going to murder them?" said I, looking anxiously +into Bill's face. + +"I don't know, Ralph," replied Bill, "what they're goin' to do with them; +but I fear they mean no good when they tie fellows up in that way." + +As we continued our way towards the wood-cutters, I observed that Bill +looked anxiously over his shoulder, in the direction where the procession +had disappeared. At last he stopped, and turning abruptly on his heel, +said,-- + +"I tell ye what it is, Ralph, I must be at the bottom o' that affair. Let +us follow these black scoundrels and see what they're goin' to do." + +I must say I had no wish to pry further into their bloody practices; but +Bill seemed bent on it, so I turned and went. We passed rapidly through +the bush, being guided in the right direction by the shouts of the +savages. Suddenly there was a dead silence, which continued for some +time, while Bill and I involuntarily quickened our pace until we were +running at the top of our speed across the narrow neck of land previously +mentioned. As we reached the verge of the wood, we discovered the +savages surrounding the large war-canoe, which they were apparently on +the point of launching. Suddenly the multitude put their united strength +to the canoe; but scarcely had the huge machine begun to move, when a +yell, the most appalling that ever fell upon my ear, rose high above the +shouting of the savages. It had not died away when another and another +smote upon my throbbing ear; and then I saw that these inhuman monsters +were actually launching their canoe over the living bodies of their +victims. But there was no pity in the breasts of these men. Forward +they went in ruthless indifference, shouting as they went, while high +above their voices rang the dying shrieks of those wretched creatures, +as, one after another, the ponderous canoe passed over them, burst the +eyeballs from their sockets, and sent the life's blood gushing from their +mouths. Oh, reader, this is no fiction. I would not, for the sake of +thrilling you with horror, invent so terrible a scene. It was witnessed. +It is true; true as that accursed sin which has rendered the human heart +capable of such diabolical enormities! + +When it was over I turned round and fell upon the grass with a deep +groan; but Bill seized me by the arm, and lifting me up as if I had been +a child, cried,-- + +"Come along, lad; let's away!"--and so, staggering and stumbling over the +tangled underwood, we fled from the fatal spot. + +During the remainder of that day I felt as if I were in a horrible dream. +I scarce knew what was said to me, and was more than once blamed by the +men for idling my time. At last the hour to return aboard came. We +marched down to the beach, and I felt relief for the first time when my +feet rested on the schooner's deck. + +In the course of the evening I overheard part of a conversation between +the captain and the first mate, which startled me not a little. They +were down in the cabin, and conversed in an under-tone, but the sky-light +being off, I overheard every word that was said. + +"I don't half like it," said the mate. "It seems to me that we'll only +have hard fightin' and no pay." + +"No pay!" repeated the captain, in a voice of suppressed anger. "Do you +call a good cargo all for nothing no pay?" + +"Very true," returned the mate; "but we've got the cargo aboard. Why not +cut your cable and take French leave o' them? What's the use o' tryin' +to lick the blackguards when it'll do us no manner o' good?" + +"Mate," said the captain, in a low voice, "you talk like a fresh-water +sailor. I can only attribute this shyness to some strange delusion; for +surely" (his voice assumed a slightly sneering tone as he said this) +"surely I am not to suppose that _you_ have become soft-hearted! Besides, +you are wrong in regard to the cargo being aboard; there's a good quarter +of it lying in the woods, and that blackguard chief knows it and won't +let me take it off. He defied us to do our worst, yesterday." + +"Defied us! did he?" cried the mate, with a bitter laugh. "Poor +contemptible thing!" + +"And yet he seems not so contemptible but that you are afraid to attack +him." + +"Who said I was afraid?" growled the mate, sulkily. "I'm as ready as any +man in the ship. But, captain, what is it that you intend to do?" + +"I intend to muffle the sweeps and row the schooner up to the head of the +creek there, from which point we can command the pile of sandal-wood with +our gun. Then I shall land with all the men except two, who shall take +care of the schooner and be ready with the boat to take us off. We can +creep through the woods to the head of the village, where these cannibals +are always dancing round their suppers of human flesh, and if the +carbines of the men are loaded with a heavy charge of buck-shot, we can +drop forty or fifty at the first volley. After that the thing will be +easy enough. The savages will take to the mountains in a body, and we +shall take what we require, up anchor, and away." + +To this plan the mate at length agreed. As he left the cabin I heard the +captain say,-- + +"Give the men an extra glass of grog, and don't forget the buck-shot." + +The reader may conceive the horror with which I heard this murderous +conversation. I immediately repeated it to Bill, who seemed much +perplexed about it. At length he said,-- + +"I'll tell you what I'll do, Ralph: I'll swim ashore after dark and fix a +musket to a tree not far from the place where we'll have to land, and +I'll tie a long string to the trigger, so that when our fellows cross it +they'll let it off, and so alarm the village in time to prevent an +attack, but not in time to prevent us gettin' back to the boat; so, +master captain," added Bill with a smile that for the first time seemed +to me to be mingled with good-natured cheerfulness, "you'll be baulked at +least for once in your life by Bloody Bill." + +After it grew dark, Bill put this resolve in practice. He slipped over +the side with a musket in his left hand, while with his right he swam +ashore and entered the woods. He soon returned, having accomplished his +purpose, and got on board without being seen,--I being the only one on +deck. + +When the hour of midnight approached the men were mustered on deck, the +cable was cut and the muffled sweeps got out. These sweeps were +immensely large oars, each requiring a couple of men to work it. In a +few minutes we entered the mouth of the creek, which was indeed the mouth +of a small river, and took about half an hour to ascend it, although the +spot where we intended to land was not more than six hundred yards from +the mouth, because there was a slight current against us, and the +mangroves which narrowed the creek, impeded the rowers in some places. +Having reached the spot, which was so darkened by overhanging trees that +we could see with difficulty, a small kedge anchor attached to a thin +line was let softly down over the stern. + +"Now, lads," whispered the captain, as he walked along the line of men, +who were all armed to the teeth, "don't be in a hurry, aim low, and don't +waste your first shots." + +He then pointed to the boat, into which the men crowded in silence. There +was no room to row, but oars were not needed, as a slight push against +the side of the schooner sent the boat gliding to the shore. + +"There's no need of leaving two in the boat," whispered the mate, as the +men stepped out; "we shall want all our hands. Let Ralph stay." + +The captain assented, and ordered me to stand in readiness with the boat- +hook, to shove ashore at a moment's notice if they should return, or to +shove off if any of the savages should happen to approach. He then threw +his carbine into the hollow of his arm and glided through the bushes +followed by his men. With a throbbing head I awaited the result of our +plan. I knew the exact locality where the musket was placed, for Bill +had described it to me, and I kept my straining eyes fixed upon the spot. +But no sound came, and I began to fear that either they had gone in +another direction or that Bill had not fixed the string properly. +Suddenly I heard a faint click, and observed one or two bright sparks +among the bushes. My heart immediately sank within me, for I knew at +once that the trigger had indeed been pulled but that the priming had not +caught. The plan, therefore, had utterly failed. A feeling of dread now +began to creep over me as I stood in the boat, in that dark, silent spot, +awaiting the issue of this murderous expedition. I shuddered as I +glanced at the water that glided past like a dark reptile. I looked back +at the schooner, but her hull was just barely visible, while her tapering +masts were lost among the trees which overshadowed her. Her lower sails +were set, but so thick was the gloom that they were quite invisible. + +Suddenly I heard a shot. In a moment a thousand voices raised a yell in +the village; again the cry rose on the night air, and was followed by +broken shouts as of scattered parties of men bounding into the woods. +Then I heard another shout loud and close at hand. It was the voice of +the captain cursing the man who had fired the premature shot. Then came +the order, "Forward," followed by the wild hurrah of our men, as they +charged the savages. Shots now rang in quick succession, and at last a +loud volley startled the echoes of the woods. It was followed by a +multitude of wild shrieks, which were immediately drowned in another +"hurrah" from the men; the distance of the sound proving that they were +driving their enemies before them towards the sea. + +While I was listening intently to these sounds, which were now mingled in +confusion, I was startled by the rustling of the leaves not far from me. +At first I thought it was a party of savages who had observed the +schooner, but I was speedily undeceived by observing a body of +natives--apparently several hundreds, as far as I could guess in the +uncertain light--bounding through the woods towards the scene of battle. +I saw at once that this was a party who had out-flanked our men, and +would speedily attack them in the rear. And so it turned out, for, in a +short time, the shouts increased ten-fold, and among them I thought I +heard a death-cry uttered by voices familiar to my ear. + +At length the tumult of battle ceased, and, from the cries of exultation +that now arose from the savages, I felt assured that our men had been +conquered. I was immediately thrown into dreadful consternation. What +was I now to do? To be taken by the savages was too horrible to be +thought of; to flee to the mountains was hopeless, as I should soon be +discovered; and to take the schooner out of the creek without assistance +was impossible. I resolved, however, to make the attempt, as being my +only hope, and was on the point of pushing off when my hand was stayed +and my blood chilled by an appalling shriek in which I recognised the +voice of one of the crew. It was succeeded by a shout from the savages. +Then came another, and another shriek of agony, making my ears to tingle, +as I felt convinced they were murdering the pirate crew in cold blood. +With a bursting heart and my brain whirling as if on fire, I seized the +boat-hook to push from shore when a man sprang from the bushes. + +"Stop! Ralph, stop!--there now, push off," he cried, and bounded into the +boat so violently as nearly to upset her. It was Bill's voice! In +another moment we were on board,--the boat made fast, the line of the +anchor cut, and the sweeps run out. At the first stroke of Bill's giant +arm the schooner was nearly pulled ashore, for in his haste he forgot +that I could scarcely move the unwieldy oar. Springing to the stern he +lashed the rudder in such a position as that, while it aided me, it acted +against him, and so rendered the force of our strokes nearly equal. The +schooner now began to glide quickly down the creek, but before we reached +its mouth, a yell from a thousand voices on the bank told that we were +discovered. Instantly a number of the savages plunged into the water and +swam towards us; but we were making so much way that they could not +overtake us. One, however, an immensely powerful man, succeeded in +laying hold of the cut rope that hung from the stern, and clambered +quickly upon deck. Bill caught sight of him the instant his head +appeared above the taffrail. But he did not cease to row, and did not +appear even to notice the savage until he was within a yard of him; then, +dropping the sweep, he struck him a blow on the forehead with his +clenched fist that felled him to the deck. Lifting him up he hurled him +overboard and resumed the oar. But now a greater danger awaited us, for +the savages had outrun us on the bank and were about to plunge into the +water ahead of the schooner. If they succeeded in doing so our fate was +sealed. For one moment Bill stood irresolute. Then, drawing a pistol +from his belt, he sprang to the brass gun, held the pan of his pistol +over the touch-hole and fired. The shot was succeeded by the hiss of the +cannon's priming, then the blaze and the crashing thunder of the +monstrous gun burst upon the savages with such deafening roar that it +seemed as if their very mountains had been rent asunder. + +This was enough. The moment of surprise and hesitation caused by the +unwonted sound, gave us time to pass the point; a gentle breeze, which +the dense foliage had hitherto prevented us from feeling, bulged out our +sails; the schooner bent before it, and the shouts of the disappointed +savages grew fainter and fainter in the distance as we were slowly wafted +out to sea. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + +Reflections--The wounded man--The squall--True consolation--Death. + +There is a power of endurance in human beings, both in their bodies and +in their minds, which, I have often thought, seems to be wonderfully +adapted and exactly proportioned to the circumstances in which +individuals may happen to be placed,--a power which, in most cases, is +sufficient to carry a man through and over every obstacle that may happen +to be thrown in his path through life, no matter how high or how steep +the mountain may be, but which often forsakes him the moment the summit +is gained, the point of difficulty passed; and leaves him prostrated, +with energies gone, nerves unstrung, and a feeling of incapacity +pervading the entire frame that renders the most trifling effort almost +impossible. + +During the greater part of that day I had been subjected to severe mental +and much physical excitement, which had almost crushed me down by the +time I was relieved from duty in the course of the evening. But when the +expedition, whose failure has just been narrated, was planned, my +anxieties and energies had been so powerfully aroused that I went through +the protracted scenes of that terrible night without a feeling of the +slightest fatigue. My mind and body were alike active and full of +energy. No sooner was the last thrilling fear of danger past, however, +than my faculties were utterly relaxed; and, when I felt the cool breezes +of the Pacific playing around my fevered brow, and heard the free waves +rippling at the schooner's prow, as we left the hated island behind us, +my senses forsook me and I fell in a swoon upon the deck. + +From this state I was quickly aroused by Bill, who shook me by the arm, +saying,-- + +"Hallo! Ralph, boy, rouse up, lad, we're safe now. Poor thing, I believe +he's fainted." And raising me in his arms he laid me on the folds of the +gaff-top-sail, which lay upon the deck near the tiller. "Here, take a +drop o' this, it'll do you good, my boy," he added, in a voice of +tenderness which I had never heard him use before, while he held a brandy- +flask to my lips. + +I raised my eyes gratefully, as I swallowed a mouthful; next moment my +head sank heavily upon my arm and I fell fast asleep. I slept long, for +when I awoke the sun was a good way above the horizon. I did not move on +first opening my eyes, as I felt a delightful sensation of rest pervading +me, and my eyes were riveted on and charmed with the gorgeous splendour +of the mighty ocean, that burst upon my sight. It was a dead calm; the +sea seemed a sheet of undulating crystal, tipped and streaked with the +saffron hues of sunrise, which had not yet merged into the glowing heat +of noon; and there was a deep calm in the blue dome above, that was not +broken even by the usual flutter of the sea-fowl. How long I would have +lain in contemplation of this peaceful scene I know not, but my mind was +recalled suddenly and painfully to the past and the present by the sight +of Bill, who was seated on the deck at my feet with his head reclining, +as if in sleep, on his right arm, which rested on the tiller. As he +seemed to rest peacefully I did not mean to disturb him, but the slight +noise I made in raising myself on my elbow caused him to start and look +round. + +"Well, Ralph, awake at last, my boy; you have slept long and soundly," he +said, turning towards me. + +On beholding his countenance I sprang up in anxiety. He was deadly pale, +and his hair, which hung in dishevelled locks over his face, was clotted +with blood. Blood also stained his hollow cheeks and covered the front +of his shirt, which, with the greater part of dress, was torn and soiled +with mud. + +"Oh, Bill!" said I, with deep anxiety, "what is the matter with you? You +are ill. You must have been wounded." + +"Even so, lad," said Bill in a deep soft voice, while he extended his +huge frame on the couch from which I had just risen. "I've got an ugly +wound, I fear, and I've been waiting for you to waken, to ask you to get +me a drop o' brandy and a mouthful o' bread from the cabin lockers. You +seemed to sleep so sweetly, Ralph, that I didn't like to disturb you. But +I don't feel up to much just now." + +I did not wait till he had done talking, but ran below immediately, and +returned in a few seconds with a bottle of brandy and some broken +biscuit. He seemed much refreshed after eating a few morsels and +drinking a long draught of water mingled with a little of the spirits. +Immediately afterwards he fell asleep, and I watched him anxiously until +he awoke, being desirous of knowing the nature and extent of his wound. + +"Ha!" he exclaimed, on awaking suddenly, after a slumber of an hour, "I'm +the better of that nap, Ralph; I feel twice the man I was;" and he +attempted to rise, but sank back again immediately with a deep groan. + +"Nay, Bill you must not move, but lie still while I look at your wound. +I'll make a comfortable bed for you here on deck, and get you some +breakfast. After that you shall tell me how you got it. Cheer up, +Bill," I added, seeing that he turned his head away; "you'll be all right +in a little, and I'll be a capital nurse to you though I'm no doctor." + +I then left him, and lighted a fire in the caboose. While it was +kindling, I went to the steward's pantry and procured the materials for a +good breakfast, with which, in little more than half an hour, I returned +to my companion. He seemed much better, and smiled kindly on me as I set +before him a cup of coffee and a tray with several eggs and some bread on +it. + +"Now then, Bill," said I, cheerfully, sitting down beside him on the +deck, "let's fall to. I'm very hungry myself, I can tell you; but--I +forgot--your wound," I added, rising; "let me look at it." + +I found that the wound was caused by a pistol shot in the chest. It did +not bleed much, and, as it was on the right side, I was in hopes that it +might not be very serious. But Bill shook his head. "However," said he, +"sit down, Ralph, and I'll tell you all about it." + +"You see, after we left the boat an' began to push through the bushes, we +went straight for the line of my musket, as I had expected; but by some +unlucky chance it didn't explode, for I saw the line torn away by the +men's legs, and heard the click o' the lock; so I fancy the priming had +got damp and didn't catch. I was in a great quandary now what to do, for +I couldn't concoct in my mind, in the hurry, any good reason for firin' +off my piece. But they say necessity's the mother of invention; so, just +as I was givin' it up and clinchin' my teeth to bide the worst o't, and +take what should come, a sudden thought came into my head. I stepped out +before the rest, seemin' to be awful anxious to be at the savages, +tripped my foot on a fallen tree, plunged head foremost into a bush, an', +ov coorse, my carbine exploded! Then came such a screechin' from the +camp as I never heard in all my life. I rose at once, and was rushin' on +with the rest when the captain called a halt. + +{The dying pirate: p334.jpg} + +"'You did that a-purpose, you villain!' he said, with a tremendous oath, +and, drawin' a pistol from his belt, let fly right into my breast. I +fell at once, and remembered no more till I was startled and brought +round by the most awful yell I ever heard in my life, except, maybe, the +shrieks o' them poor critters that were crushed to death under yon big +canoe. Jumpin' up, I looked round, and, through the trees, saw a fire +gleamin' not far off, the light o' which showed me the captain and men +tied hand and foot, each to a post, and the savages dancin' round them +like demons. I had scarce looked for a second, when I saw one o' them go +up to the captain flourishing a knife, and, before I could wink, he +plunged it into his breast, while another yell, like the one that roused +me, rang upon my ear. I didn't wait for more, but, bounding up, went +crashing through the bushes into the woods. The black fellows caught +sight of me, however, but not in time to prevent me jumpin' into the +boat, as you know." + +Bill seemed to be much exhausted after this recital, and shuddered +frequently during the narrative, so I refrained from continuing the +subject at that time, and endeavoured to draw his mind to other things. + +"But now, Bill," said I, "it behoves us to think about the future, and +what course of action we shall pursue. Here we are, on the wide Pacific, +in a well-appointed schooner, which is our own,--at least no one has a +better claim to it than we have,--and the world lies before us. Moreover, +here comes a breeze, so we must make up our minds which way to steer." + +"Ralph, boy," said my companion, "it matters not to me which way we go. I +fear that my time is short now. Go where you will. I'm content." + +"Well then, Bill, I think we had better steer to the Coral Island, and +see what has become of my dear old comrades, Jack and Peterkin. I +believe the island has no name, but the captain once pointed it out to me +on the chart, and I marked it afterwards; so, as we know pretty well our +position just now, I think I can steer to it. Then, as to working the +vessel, it is true I cannot hoist the sails single-handed, but luckily we +have enough of sail set already, and if it should come on to blow a +squall, I could at least drop the peaks of the main and fore sails, and +clew them up partially without help, and throw her head close into the +wind, so as to keep her all shaking till the violence of the squall is +past. And if we have continued light breezes, I'll rig up a complication +of blocks and fix them to the top-sail halyards, so that I shall be able +to hoist the sails without help. 'Tis true I'll require half a day to +hoist them, but we don't need to mind that. Then I'll make a sort of +erection on deck to screen you from the sun, Bill; and if you can only +manage to sit beside the tiller and steer for two hours every day, so as +to let me get a nap, I'll engage to let you off duty all the rest of the +twenty-four hours. And if you don't feel able for steering, I'll lash +the helm and heave to, while I get you your breakfasts and dinners; and +so we'll manage famously, and soon reach the Coral Island." + +Bill smiled faintly as I ran on in this strain. + +"And what will you do," said he, "if it comes on to blow a storm?" + +This question silenced me, while I considered what I should do in such a +case. At length I laid my hand an his arm, and said, "Bill, when a man +has done all that he _can_ do, he ought to leave the rest to God." + +"Oh, Ralph," said my companion, in a faint voice, looking anxiously into +my face, "I wish that I had the feelin's about God that you seem to have, +at this hour. I'm dyin', Ralph; yet I, who have braved death a hundred +times, am afraid to die. I'm afraid to enter the next world. Something +within tells me there will be a reckoning when I go there. But it's all +over with me, Ralph. I feel that there's no chance o' my bein' saved." + +"Don't say that, Bill," said I, in deep compassion, "don't say that. I'm +quite sure there's hope even for you, but I can't remember the words of +the Bible that make me think so. Is there not a Bible on board, Bill?" + +"No; the last that was in the ship belonged to a poor boy that was taken +aboard against his will. He died, poor lad, I think, through ill +treatment and fear. After he was gone the captain found his Bible and +flung it overboard." + +I now reflected, with great sadness and self-reproach, on the way in +which I had neglected my Bible; and it flashed across me that I was +actually in the sight of God a greater sinner than this blood-stained +pirate; for, thought I, he tells me that he never read the Bible, and was +never brought up to care for it; whereas I was carefully taught to read +it by my own mother, and had read it daily as long as I possessed one, +yet to so little purpose that I could not now call to mind a single text +that would meet this poor man's case, and afford him the consolation he +so much required. I was much distressed, and taxed my memory for a long +time. At last a text did flash into my mind, and I wondered much that I +had not thought of it before. + +"Bill," said I, in a low voice, "'Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ and +thou shalt be saved.'" + +"Ay, Ralph, I've heard the missionaries say that before now, but what +good can it do me? It's not for me that. It's not for the likes o' me." + +I knew not now what to say, for, although I felt sure that that word was +for him as well as for me, I could not remember any other word whereby I +could prove it. + +After a short pause, Bill raised his eyes to mine and said, "Ralph, I've +led a terrible life. I've been a sailor since I was a boy, and I've gone +from bad to worse ever since I left my father's roof. I've been a pirate +three years now. It is true I did not choose the trade, but I was +inveigled aboard this schooner and kept here by force till I became +reckless and at last joined them. Since that time my hand has been +steeped in human blood again and again. Your young heart would grow cold +if I--; but why should I go on? 'Tis of no use, Ralph; my doom is +fixed." + +"Bill," said I, "'Though your sins be red like crimson, they shall be +white as snow.' 'Only believe.'" + +"Only believe!" cried Bill, starting up on his elbow; "I've heard men +talk o' believing as if it was easy. Ha! 'tis easy enough for a man to +point to a rope and say, 'I believe that would bear my weight;' but 'tis +another thing for a man to catch hold o' that rope, and swing himself by +it over the edge of a precipice!" + +The energy with which he said this, and the action with which it was +accompanied, were too much for Bill. He sank back with a deep groan. As +if the very elements sympathized with this man's sufferings, a low moan +came sweeping over the sea. + +"Hist! Ralph," said Bill, opening his eves; "there's a squall coming, +lad. Look alive, boy. Clew up the fore-sail. Drop the main-sail peak. +Them squalls come quick sometimes." + +I had already started to my feet, and saw that a heavy squall was indeed +bearing down on us. It had hitherto escaped my notice, owing to my being +so much engrossed by our conversation. I instantly did as Bill desired, +for the schooner was still lying motionless on the glassy sea. I +observed with some satisfaction that the squall was bearing down on the +larboard bow, so that it would strike the vessel in the position in which +she would be best able to stand the shock. Having done my best to +shorten sail, I returned aft, and took my stand at the helm. + +"Now, boy," said Bill, in a faint voice, "keep her close to the wind." + +A few seconds afterwards he said, "Ralph, let me hear those two texts +again." + +I repeated them. + +"Are ye sure, lad, ye saw them in the Bible?" + +"Quite sure," I replied. + +Almost before the words had left my lips the wind burst upon us, and the +spray dashed over our decks. For a time the schooner stood it bravely, +and sprang forward against the rising sea like a war-horse. Meanwhile +clouds darkened the sky, and the sea began to rise in huge billows. There +was still too much sail on the schooner, and, as the gale increased, I +feared that the masts would be torn out of her or carried away, while the +wind whistled and shrieked through the strained rigging. Suddenly the +wind shifted a point, a heavy sea struck us on the bow, and the schooner +was almost laid on her beam-ends, so that I could scarcely keep my legs. +At the same moment Bill lost his hold of the belaying-pin which had +served to steady him, and he slid with stunning violence against the sky- +light. As he lay on the deck close beside me, I could see that the shock +had rendered him insensible, but I did not dare to quit the tiller for an +instant, as it required all my faculties, bodily and mental, to manage +the schooner. For an hour the blast drove us along, while, owing to the +sharpness of the vessel's bow and the press of canvass, she dashed +through the waves instead of breasting over them, thereby drenching the +decks with water fore and aft. At the end of that time the squall passed +away, and left us rocking on the bosom of the agitated sea. + +My first care, the instant I could quit the helm, was to raise Bill from +the deck and place him on the couch. I then ran below for the brandy +bottle and rubbed his face and hands with it, and endeavoured to pour a +little down his throat. But my efforts, although I continued them long +and assiduously, were of no avail; as I let go the hand which I had been +chafing it fell heavily on the deck. I laid my hand over his heart, and +sat for some time quite motionless, but there was no flutter there--the +pirate was dead! + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + + +Alone on the deep--Necessity the mother of invention--A valuable book +discovered--Natural phenomenon--A bright day in my history. + +It was with feelings of awe, not unmingled with fear, that I now seated +myself on the cabin sky-light and gazed upon the rigid features of my +late comrade, while my mind wandered over his past history and +contemplated with anxiety my present position. Alone! in the midst of +the wide Pacific, having a most imperfect knowledge of navigation, and in +a schooner requiring at least eight men as her proper crew. But I will +not tax the reader's patience with a minute detail of my feelings and +doings during the first few days that followed the death of my companion. +I will merely mention that I tied a cannon ball to his feet and, with +feelings of the deepest sorrow, consigned him to the deep. + +For fully a week after that a steady breeze blew from the east, and, as +my course lay west-and-by-north, I made rapid progress towards my +destination. I could not take an observation, which I very much +regretted, as the captain's quadrant was in the cabin; but, from the day +of setting sail from the island of the savages, I had kept a dead +reckoning, and as I knew pretty well now how much lee-way the schooner +made, I hoped to hit the Coral Island without much difficulty. In this I +was the more confident that I knew its position on the chart (which I +understood was a very good one), and so had its correct bearings by +compass. + +As the weather seemed now quite settled and fine, and as I had got into +the trade-winds, I set about preparations for hoisting the top-sails. +This was a most arduous task, and my first attempts were complete +failures, owing, in a great degree, to my reprehensible ignorance of +mechanical forces. The first error I made was in applying my apparatus +of blocks and pulleys to a rope which was too weak, so that the very +first heave I made broke it in two, and sent me staggering against the +after-hatch, over which I tripped, and, striking against the main-boom, +tumbled down the companion ladder into the cabin. I was much bruised and +somewhat stunned by this untoward accident. However, I considered it +fortunate that I was not killed. In my next attempt I made sure of not +coming by a similar accident, so I unreeved the tackling and fitted up +larger blocks and ropes. But although the principle on which I acted was +quite correct, the machinery was now so massive and heavy that the mere +friction and stiffness of the thick cordage prevented me from moving it +at all. Afterwards, however, I came to proportion things more correctly; +but I could not avoid reflecting at the time how much better it would +have been had I learned all this from observation and study, instead of +waiting till I was forced to acquire it through the painful and tedious +lessons of experience. + +After the tackling was prepared and in good working order, it took me the +greater part of a day to hoist the main-top sail. As I could not steer +and work at this at the same time, I lashed the helm in such a position +that, with a little watching now and then, it kept the schooner in her +proper course. By this means I was enabled also to go about the deck and +down below for things that I wanted, as occasion required; also to cook +and eat my victuals. But I did not dare to trust to this plan during the +three hours of rest that I allowed myself at night, as the wind might +have shifted, in which case I should have been blown far out of my course +ere I awoke. I was, therefore, in the habit of heaving-to during those +three hours; that is, fixing the rudder and the sails in such a position +as that by acting against each other, they would keep the ship +stationary. After my night's rest, therefore, I had only to make +allowance for the lee-way she had made, and so resume my course. + +Of course I was to some extent anxious lest another squall should come, +but I made the best provision I could in the circumstances, and concluded +that by letting go the weather-braces of the top-sails and the top-sail +halyards at the same time, I should thereby render these sails almost +powerless. Besides this, I proposed to myself to keep a sharp look-out +on the barometer in the cabin, and if I observed at any time a sudden +fall in it, I resolved that I would instantly set about my multiform +appliances for reducing sail, so as to avoid being taken at unawares. +Thus I sailed prosperously for two weeks, with a fair wind, so that I +calculated I must be drawing near to the Coral Island; at the thought of +which my heart bounded with joyful expectation. + +The only book I found on board, after a careful search, was a volume of +Captain Cook's voyages. This, I suppose, the pirate captain had brought +with him in order to guide him, and to furnish him with information +regarding the islands of these seas. I found this a most delightful book +indeed, and I not only obtained much interesting knowledge about the sea +in which I was sailing, but I had many of my own opinions, derived from +experience, corroborated; and not a few of them corrected. Besides the +reading of this charming book, and the daily routine of occupations, +nothing of particular note happened to me during this voyage, except +once, when on rising one night, after my three hours' nap, while it was +yet dark, I was amazed and a little alarmed to find myself floating in +what appeared to be a sea of blue fire! I had often noticed the +beautiful appearance of phosphorescent light, but this far exceeded +anything of the sort I ever saw before. The whole sea appeared somewhat +like milk and was remarkably luminous. + +I rose in haste, and, letting down a bucket into the sea, brought some of +the water on board and took it down to the cabin to examine it; but no +sooner did I approach the light than the strange appearance disappeared, +and when I removed the cabin lamp the luminous light appeared again. I +was much puzzled with this, and took up a little of the water in the +hollow of my hand and then let it run off, when I found that the luminous +substance was left behind on my palm. I ran with it to the lamp; but +when I got there it was gone. I found, however, that when I went into +the dark my hand shone again; so I took the large glass of the ship's +telescope and examined my hand minutely, when I found that there were on +it one or two small patches of a clear, transparent substance like jelly, +which were so thin as to be almost invisible to the naked eye. Thus I +came to know that the beautiful phosphoric light, which I had so often +admired before, was caused by animals, for I had no doubt that these were +of the same kind as the medusae or jelly-fish which are seen in all parts +of the world. + +On the evening of my fourteenth day, I was awakened out of a nap into +which I had fallen by a loud cry, and starting up, I gazed around me. I +was surprised and delighted to see a large albatross soaring majestically +over the ship. I immediately took it into my head that this was the +albatross I had seen at Penguin Island. I had, of course, no good reason +for supposing this, but the idea occurred to me, I know not why, and I +cherished it, and regarded the bird with as much affection as if he had +been an old friend. He kept me company all that day and left me as night +fell. + +Next morning as I stood motionless and with heavy eyes at the helm, for I +had not slept well, I began to weary anxiously for day-light, and peered +towards the horizon, where I thought I observed something like a black +cloud against the dark sky. Being always on the alert for squalls, I ran +to the bow. There could be no doubt it was a squall, and as I listened I +thought I heard the murmur of the coming gale. Instantly I began to work +might and main at my cumbrous tackle for shortening sail, and in the +course of an hour and a half had the most of it reduced,--the top-sail +yards down on the caps, the top-sails clewed up, the sheets hauled in, +the main and fore peaks lowered, and the flying-jib down. While thus +engaged the dawn advanced, and I cast an occasional furtive glance ahead +in the midst of my labour. But now that things were prepared for the +worst, I ran forward again and looked anxiously over the bow. I now +heard the roar of the waves distinctly, and as a single ray of the rising +sun gleamed over the ocean I saw--what! could it be that I was +dreaming?--that magnificent breaker with its ceaseless roar!--that +mountain top!--yes, once more I beheld the Coral Island! + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + +The effect of a cannon-shot--A happy reunion of a somewhat moist +nature--Retrospects and explanations--An awful dive--New plans--The last +of the Coral Island. + +I almost fell upon the deck with the tumult of mingled emotions that +filled my heart, as I gazed ardently towards my beautiful island. It was +still many miles away, but sufficiently near to enable me to trace +distinctly the well-remembered outlines of the two mountains. My first +impulse was to utter an exclamation of gratitude for being carried to my +former happy home in safety; my second, to jump up, clap my hands, shout, +and run up and down the deck, with no other object in view than that of +giving vent to my excited feelings. Then I went below for the telescope, +and spent nearly ten minutes of the utmost impatience in vainly trying to +get a focus, and in rubbing the skin nearly off my eyes, before I +discovered that having taken off the large glass to examine the +phosphoric water with I had omitted to put it on again. + +After that I looked up impatiently at the sails, which I now regretted +having lowered so hastily, and for a moment thought of hoisting the main- +top sail again; but recollecting that it would take me full half a day to +accomplish, and that, at the present rate of sailing, two hours would +bring me to the island, I immediately dismissed the idea. + +The remainder of the time I spent in making feverish preparations for +arriving and seeing my dear comrades. I remembered that they were not in +the habit of rising before six, and, as it was now only three, I hoped to +arrive before they were awake. Moreover, I set about making ready to let +go the anchor, resolving in my own mind that, as I knew the depth of +water in the passage of the reef and within the lagoon, I would run the +schooner in and bring up opposite the bower. Fortunately the anchor was +hanging at the cat-head, otherwise I should never have been able to use +it. Now, I had only to cut the tackling, and it would drop of its own +weight. After searching among the flags, I found the terrible black one, +which I ran up to the peak. While I was doing this, a thought struck me. +I went to the powder magazine, brought up a blank cartridge and loaded +the big brass gun, which, it will be remembered, was unhoused when we set +sail, and, as I had no means of housing it, there it had stood, bristling +alike at fair weather and foul all the voyage. I took care to grease its +mouth well, and, before leaving the fore part of the ship, thrust the +poker into the fire. + +{A terrible surprise: p352.jpg} + +All was now ready. A steady five-knot breeze was blowing, so that I was +now not more than quarter of a mile from the reef. I was soon at the +entrance, and, as the schooner glided quietly through, I glanced +affectionately at the huge breaker, as if it had been the same one I had +seen there when I bade adieu, as I feared for ever, to the island. On +coming opposite the Water Garden, I put the helm hard down. The schooner +came round with a rapid, graceful bend, and lost way just opposite the +bower. Running forward, I let go the anchor, caught up the red-hot +poker, applied it to the brass gun, and the mountains with a _bang_, such +as had only once before broke their slumbering echoes! + +Effective although it was, however, it was scarcely equal to the bang +with which, instantly after, Peterkin bounded from the bower, in scanty +costume, his eye-balls starting from his head with surprise and terror. +One gaze he gave, one yell, and then fled into the bushes like a wild +cat. The next moment Jack went through exactly the same performance, the +only difference being, that his movements were less like those of Jack-in- +the-box, though not less vigorous and rapid than those of Peterkin. + +"Hallo!" I shouted, almost mad with joy, "what, ho! Peterkin! Jack! +hallo! it's me!" + +My shout was just in time to arrest them. They halted and turned round, +and, the instant I repeated the cry, I saw that they recognised my voice, +by both of them running at full speed towards the beach. I could no +longer contain myself. Throwing off my jacket, I jumped overboard at the +same moment that Jack bounded into the sea. In another moment we met in +deep water, clasped each other round the neck, and sank, as a matter of +course, to the bottom! We were well-nigh choked, and instantly struggled +to the surface, where Peterkin was spluttering about like a wounded duck, +laughing and crying by turns, and choking himself with salt water! + +It would be impossible to convey to my reader, by description, an +adequate conception of the scene that followed my landing on the beach, +as we stood embracing each other indiscriminately in our dripping +garments, and giving utterance to incoherent rhapsodies, mingled with +wild shouts. It can be more easily imagined than described, so I will +draw a curtain over this part of my history, and carry the reader forward +over an interval of three days. + +During the greater part of that period Peterkin did nothing but roast +pigs, taro, and bread-fruit, and ply me with plantains, plums, potatoes, +and cocoa-nuts, while I related to him and Jack the terrible and +wonderful adventures I had gone through since we last met. After I had +finished the account, they made me go all over it again; and, when I had +concluded the second recital, I had to go over it again, while they +commented upon it piecemeal. They were much affected by what I told them +of the probable fate of Avatea, and Peterkin could by no means brook the +idea of the poor girl being converted into a _long pig_! As for Jack, he +clenched his teeth, and shook his fist towards the sea, saying at the +same time, that he was sorry he had not broken Tararo's head, and he only +hoped that one day he should be able to plant his knuckles on the bridge +of that chief's nose! After they had "pumped me dry," as Peterkin said, +I begged to be informed of what had happened to them during my long +absence, and particularly as to how they got out of the Diamond Cave. + +"Well, you must know," began Jack, "after you had dived out of the cave, +on the day you were taken away from us, we waited very patiently for half +an hour, not expecting you to return before the end of that time. Then +we began to upbraid you for staying so long, when you knew we would be +anxious; but when an hour passed, we became alarmed, and I resolved at +all hazards to dive out, and see what had become of you, although I felt +for poor Peterkin, because, as he truly said, 'If you never come back, +I'm shut up here for life.' However, I promised not to run any risk, and +he let me go; which, to say truth, I thought very courageous of him!" + +"I should just think it was!" interrupted Peterkin, looking at Jack over +the edge of a monstrous potato which he happened to be devouring at the +time. + +"Well," continued Jack, "you may guess my consternation when you did not +answer to my halloo. At first I imagined that the pirates must have +killed you, and left you in the bush, or thrown you into the sea; then it +occurred to me that this would have served no end of theirs, so I came to +the conclusion that they must have carried you away with them. As this +thought struck me, I observed the pirate schooner standing away to the +nor'ard, almost hull-down on the horizon, and I sat down on the rocks to +watch her as she slowly sank from my sight. And I tell you, Ralph, my +boy, that I shed more tears that time, at losing you, than I have done, I +verify believe, all my life before--" + +"Pardon me, Jack, for interrupting," said Peterkin; "surely you must be +mistaken in that; you've often told me that, when you were a baby, you +used to howl and roar from morning to--" + +"Hold your tongue, Peterkin," cried Jack. "Well, after the schooner had +disappeared, I dived back into the cave, much to Peterkin's relief, and +told him what I had seen. We sat down and had a long talk over this +matter, and then we agreed to make a regular, systematic search through +the woods, so as to make sure, at least, that you had not been killed. +But now we thought of the difficulty of getting out of the cave without +your help. Peterkin became dreadfully nervous when he thought of this; +and I must confess that I felt some alarm, for, of course, I could not +hope alone to take him out so quickly as we two together had brought him +in; and he himself vowed that, if we had been a moment longer with him +that time, he would have had to take a breath of salt water. However, +there was no help for it, and I endeavoured to calm his fears as well as +I could: 'for,' said I, 'you can't live here, Peterkin;' to which he +replied, 'Of course not, Jack, I can only die here, and, as that's not at +all desirable, you had better propose something.' So I suggested that he +should take a good long breath, and trust himself to me. + +"'Might we not make a large bag of cocoa-nut cloth, into which I could +shove my head, and tie it tight round my neck?' he asked, with a haggard +smile. 'It might let me get one breath under water!' + +"'No use,' said I; 'it would fill in a moment and suffocate you. I see +nothing for it, Peterkin, if you really can't keep your breath so long, +but to let me knock you down, and carry you out while in a state of +insensibility.' + +"But Peterkin didn't relish this idea. He seemed to fear that I could +not be able to measure the exact force of the blow, and might, on the one +hand, hit him so softly as to render a second or third blow necessary, +which would be very uncomfortable; or, on the other hand, give him such a +smash as would entirely spoil his figure-head, or, mayhap, knock the life +out of him altogether! At last I got him persuaded to try to hold his +breath, and commit himself to me; so he agreed, and down we went. But I +had not got him half way through, when he began to struggle and kick like +a wild bull, burst from my grasp, and hit against the roof of the tunnel. +I was therefore, obliged to force him violently back into the cave gain, +where he rose panting to the surface. In short, he had lost his presence +of mind, and--" + +"Nothing of the sort," cried Peterkin, indignantly, "I had only lost my +wind; and if I had not had presence of mind enough to kick as I did, I +should have bu'st in your arms!" + +"Well, well, so be it," resumed Jack, with a smile, "but the upshot of it +was, that we had to hold another consultation on the point, and I really +believe that, had it not been for a happy thought of mine, we should have +been consulting there yet." + +"I wish we had," again interrupted Peterkin with a sigh. "I'm sure, +Ralph, if I had thought that you were coming back again, I would +willingly have awaited your return for months, rather than have endured +the mental agony which I went through! But proceed." + +"The thought was this," continued Jack, "that I should tie Peterkin's +hands and feet with cords, and then lash him firmly to a stout pole about +five feet long, in order to render him quite powerless, and keep him +straight and stiff. You should have seen his face of horror, Ralph, when +I suggested this: but he came to see that it was his only chance, and +told me to set about it as fast as I could; 'for,' said he, 'this is no +jokin', Jack, _I_ can tell you, and the sooner it's done the better.' I +soon procured the cordage and a suitable pole, with which I returned to +the cave, and lashed him as stiff and straight as an Egyptian mummy; and, +to say truth, he was no bad representation of what an English mummy would +be, if there were such things, for he was as white as a dead man." + +"'Now,' said Peterkin, in a tremulous voice, 'swim with me as near to the +edge of the hole as you can before you dive, then let me take a long +breath, and, as I sha'nt be able to speak after I've taken it, you'll +watch my face, and the moment you see me wink--dive! And oh!' he added, +earnestly, 'pray don't be long!' + +"I promised to pay the strictest attention to his wishes, and swam with +him to the outlet of the cave. Here I paused. 'Now then,' said I, 'pull +away at the wind, lad.'" + +Peterkin drew in a breath so long that I could not help thinking of the +frog in the fable, that wanted to swell itself as big as the ox. Then I +looked into his face earnestly. Slap went the lid of his right eye; down +went my head, and up went my heels. We shot through the passage like an +arrow, and rose to the surface of the open sea before you could count +twenty! + +"Peterkin had taken in such an awful load of wind that, on reaching the +free air, he let it out with a yell loud enough to have been heard a mile +off, and then, the change in his feelings was so sudden and great, that +he did not wait till we landed, but began, tied up as he was, to shout +and sing for joy as I supported him with my left arm to the shore. +However, in the middle of a laugh that a hyaena might have envied, I let +him accidentally slip, which extinguished him in a moment. + +"After this happy deliverance, we immediately began our search for your +dead body, Ralph, and you have no idea how low our hearts sank as we set +off, day after day, to examine the valleys and mountain sides with the +utmost care. In about three weeks we completed the survey of the whole +island, and had at least the satisfaction of knowing that you had not +been killed. But it occurred to us that you might have been thrown into +the sea, so we examined the sands and the lagoon carefully, and +afterwards went all round the outer reef. One day, while we were upon +the reef, Peterkin espied a small dark object lying among the rocks, +which seemed to be quite different from the surrounding stones. We +hastened towards the spot, and found it to be a small keg. On knocking +out the head we discovered that it was gunpowder." + +"It was I who sent you that, Jack," said I, with a smile. + +"Fork out!" cried Peterkin, energetically, starting to his feet and +extending his open hand to Jack. "Down with the money, sir, else I'll +have you shut up for life in a debtor's prison the moment we return to +England!" + +"I'll give you an I.O.U. in the meantime," returned Jack, laughing, "so +sit down and be quiet. The fact is, Ralph, when we discovered this keg +of powder, Peterkin immediately took me a bet of a thousand pounds that +you had something to do with it, and I took him a bet of ten thousand +that you had not. + +"Peterkin was right then," said I, explaining how the thing had occurred. + +"Well, we found it very useful," continued Jack; "although some of it had +got a little damp; and we furbished up the old pistol, with which +Peterkin is a crack shot now. But, to continue. We did not find any +other vestige of you on the reef, and, finally, gave up all hope of ever +seeing you again. After this the island became a dreary place to us, and +we began to long for a ship to heave in sight and take us off. But now +that you're back again, my dear fellow, it looks as bright and cheerful +as it used to do, and I love it as much as ever." + +"And now," continued Jack, "I have a great desire to visit some of the +other islands of the South Seas. Here we have a first-rate schooner at +our disposal, so I don't see what should hinder us." + +"Just the very thing I was going to propose," cried Peterkin; "I vote for +starting at once." + +"Well, then," said Jack, "it seems to me that we could not do better than +shape our course for the island on which Avatea lives, and endeavour to +persuade Tararo to let her marry the black fellow to whom she is engaged, +instead of making a long pig of her. If he has a spark of gratitude in +him he'll do it. Besides, having become champions for this girl once +before, it behoves us, as true knights, not to rest until we set her +free; at least, all the heroes in all the story-books I have ever read +would count it foul disgrace to leave such a work unfinished." + +"I'm sure I don't know, or care, what your knights in story-books would +do," said Peterkin, "but I'm certain that it would be capital fun, so I'm +your man whenever you want me." + +This plan of Jack's was quite in accordance with his romantic, impulsive +nature; and, having made up his mind to save this black girl, he could +not rest until the thing was commenced. + +"But there may be great danger in this attempt," he said, at the end of a +long consultation on the subject; "will you, lads, go with me in spite of +this?" + +"Go with you?" we repeated in the same breath. + +"Can you doubt it?" said I. + +"For a moment," added Peterkin. + +I need scarcely say that, having made up our minds to go on this +enterprise, we lost no time in making preparations to quit the island; +and as the schooner was well laden with stores of every kind for a long +cruise, we had little to do except to add to our abundant supply a +quantity of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, taro, yams, plums, and potatoes, +chiefly with the view of carrying the fragrance of our dear island along +with us as long as we could. + +When all was ready, we paid a farewell visit to the different familiar +spots where most of our time had been spent. We ascended the mountain +top, and gazed for the last time at the rich green foliage in the +valleys, the white sandy beach, the placid lagoon, and the barrier coral- +reef with its crested breakers. Then we descended to Spouting Cliff, and +looked down at the pale-green monster which we had made such fruitless +efforts to spear in days gone by. From this we hurried to the Water +Garden and took a last dive into its clear waters, and a last gambol +amongst its coral groves. I hurried out before my companions, and +dressed in haste, in order to have a long examination of my tank, which +Peterkin, in the fulness of his heart, had tended with the utmost care, +as being a vivid remembrancer of me, rather than out of love for natural +history. It was in superb condition;--the water as clear and pellucid as +crystal; the red and green sea-weed of the most brilliant hues; the red, +purple, yellow, green, and striped anemones fully expanded, and +stretching out their arms as if to welcome and embrace their former +master; the starfish, zoophytes, sea-pens, and other innumerable marine +insects, looking fresh and beautiful; and the crabs, as Peterkin said, +looking as wide awake, impertinent, rampant, and pugnacious as ever. It +was indeed so lovely and so interesting that I would scarcely allow +myself to be torn away from it. + +Last of all, we returned to the bower and collected the few articles we +possessed, such as the axe, the pencil-case, the broken telescope, the +pen-knife, the hook made from the brass ring, and the sail-needle, with +which we had landed on the island;--also, the long boots and the pistol, +besides several curious articles of costume which we had manufactured +from time to time. + +These we conveyed on board in our little boat, after having carved our +names on a chip of iron-wood, thus:-- + + JACK MARTIN, + RALPH ROVER, + PETERKIN GAY, + +which we fixed up inside of the bower. The boat was then hoisted on +board and the anchor weighed; which latter operation cost us great labour +and much time, as the anchor was so heavy that we could not move it +without the aid of my complex machinery of blocks and pulleys. A steady +breeze was blowing off shore when we set sail, at a little before sunset. +It swept us quickly past the reef and out to sea. The shore grew rapidly +more indistinct as the shades of evening fell, while our clipper bark +bounded lightly over the waves. Slowly the mountain top sank on the +horizon, until it became a mere speck. In another moment the sun and the +Coral Island sank together into the broad bosom of the Pacific. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + +The voyage--The island, and a consultation in which danger is scouted as +a thing unworthy of consideration--Rats and cats--The native +teacher--Awful revelations--Wonderful effects of Christianity. + +Our voyage during the next two weeks was most interesting and prosperous. +The breeze continued generally fair, and at all times enabled us to lie +our course; for being, as I have said before, clipper-built, the pirate +schooner could lie very close to the wind, and made little lee-way. We +had no difficulty now in managing our sails, for Jack was heavy and +powerful, while Peterkin was active as a kitten. Still, however, we were +a very insufficient crew for such a vessel, and if any one had proposed +to us to make such a voyage in it before we had been forced to go through +so many hardships from necessity, we would have turned away with pity +from the individual making such proposal as from a madman. I pondered +this a good deal, and at last concluded that men do not know how much +they are capable of doing till they try, and that we should never give +way to despair in any undertaking, however difficult it may seem:--always +supposing, however, that our cause is a good one, and that we can ask the +divine blessing on it. + +Although, therefore, we could now manage our sails easily, we +nevertheless found that my pulleys were of much service to us in some +things; though Jack did laugh heartily at the uncouth arrangement of +ropes and blocks, which had, to a sailor's eye, a very lumbering and +clumsy appearance. But I will not drag my reader through the details of +this voyage. Suffice it to say, that, after an agreeable sail of about +three weeks, we arrived off the island of Mango, which I recognised at +once from the description that the pirate, Bill, had given me of it +during one of our conversations. + +As soon as we came within sight of it we hove the ship to, and held a +council of war. + +"Now, boys," said Jack, as we seated ourselves beside him on the cabin +sky-light, "before we go farther in this business, we must go over the +pros and cons of it; for, although you have so generously consented to +stick by me through thick and thin, it would be unfair did I not see that +you thoroughly understand the danger of what we are about to attempt." + +"Oh! bother the danger," cried Peterkin; "I wonder to hear _you_, Jack, +talk of danger. When a fellow begins to talk about it, he'll soon come +to magnify it to such a degree that he'll not be fit to face it when it +comes, no more than a suckin' baby!" + +"Nay, Peterkin," replied Jack, gravely, "I won't be jested out of it. I +grant you, that, when we've once resolved to act, and have made up our +minds what to do, we should think no more of danger. But, before we have +so resolved, it behoves us to look at it straight in the face, and +examine into it, and walk round it; for if we flinch at a distant view, +we're sure to run away when the danger is near. Now, I understand from +you, Ralph, that the island is inhabited by thorough-going, out-and-out +cannibals, whose principal law is--'Might is right, and the weakest goes +to the wall?'" + +"Yes," said I, "so Bill gave me to understand. He told me, however, +that, at the southern side of it, the missionaries had obtained a footing +amongst an insignificant tribe. A native teacher had been sent there by +the Wesleyans, who had succeeded in persuading the chief at that part to +embrace Christianity. But instead of that being of any advantage to our +enterprise, it seems the very reverse; for the chief Tararo is a +determined heathen, and persecutes the Christians,--who are far too weak +in numbers to offer any resistance,--and looks with dislike upon all +white men, whom he regards as propagators of the new faith." + +"'Tis a pity," said Jack, "that the Christian tribe is so small, for we +shall scarcely be safe under their protection, I fear. If Tararo takes +it into his head to wish for our vessel, or to kill ourselves, he could +take us from them by force. You say that the native missionary talks +English?" + +"So I believe." + +"Then, what I propose is this," said Jack: "We will run round to the +south side of the island, and cut anchor off the Christian village. We +are too far away just now to have been descried by any of the savages, so +we shall get there unobserved, and have time to arrange our plans before +the heathen tribes know of our presence. But, in doing this, we run the +risk of being captured by the ill-disposed tribes, and being very ill +used, if not--a--" + +"Roasted alive and eaten," cried Peterkin. "Come, out with it, Jack; +according to your own showing, it's well to look the danger straight in +the face!" + +"Well, that is the worst of it, certainly. Are you prepared, then, to +take your chance of that?" + +"I've been prepared and had my mind made up long ago," cried Peterkin, +swaggering about the deck with his hands thrust into his breeches' +pockets. "The fact is, Jack, I don't believe that Tararo will be so +ungrateful as to eat us; and I'm quite sure that he'll be too happy to +grant us whatever we ask: so the sooner we go in and win the better." + +Peterkin was wrong, however, in his estimate of savage gratitude, as the +sequel will show. + +The schooner was now put before the wind, and, after making a long run to +the south'ard, we put about and beat up for the south side of Mango, +where we arrived before sunset, and hove-to off the coral reef. Here we +awaited the arrival of a canoe, which immediately put off on our rounding +to. When it arrived, a mild-looking native, of apparently forty years of +age, came on board, and, taking off his straw hat, made us a low bow. He +was clad in a respectable suit of European clothes; and the first words +he uttered, as he stepped up to Jack and shook hands with him, were,-- + +"Good day, gentlemen; we are happy to see you at Mango--you are heartily +welcome." + +After returning his salutation, Jack exclaimed, "You must be the native +missionary teacher of whom I have heard--are you not?" + +"I am. I have the joy to be a servant of the Lord Jesus at this +station." + +"You're the very man I want to see, then," replied Jack; "that's lucky. +Come down to the cabin, friend, and have a glass of wine. I wish +particularly to speak with you. My men there" (pointing to Peterkin and +me) "will look after your people." + +"Thank you," said the teacher, as he followed Jack to the cabin, "I do +not drink wine or any strong drink." + +"Oh! then, there's lots of water, and you can have biscuit." + +"Now, 'pon my word, that's cool!" said Peterkin; "his _men_, forsooth! +Well, since we are to be men, we may as well come it as strong over these +black chaps as we can. Hallo, there!" he cried to the half dozen of +natives who stood upon the deck, gazing in wonder at all they saw, +"here's for you;" and he handed them a tray of broken biscuit and a can +of water. Then, thrusting his hands into his pockets, he walked up and +down the deck with an enormous swagger, whistling vociferously. + +In about half an hour Jack and the teacher came on deck, and the latter, +bidding us a cheerful good evening, entered his canoe and paddled to the +shore. When he was gone, Peterkin stepped up to Jack, and, touching his +cap, said,-- + +"Well, captain, have you any communications to make to your _men_?" + +"Yes," cried Jack; "ready about, mind the helm and clew up your tongue, +while I con the schooner through the passage in the reef. The teacher, +who seems a first-rate fellow, says it's quite deep, and good anchorage +within the lagoon close to the shore." + +While the vessel was slowly advancing to her anchorage, under a light +breeze, Jack explained to us that Avatea was still on the island, living +amongst the heathens; that she had expressed a strong desire to join the +Christians, but Tararo would not let her, and kept her constantly in +close confinement. + +"Moreover," continued Jack, "I find that she belongs to one of the Samoan +Islands, where Christianity had been introduced long before her capture +by the heathens of a neighbouring island; and the very day after she was +taken, she was to have joined the church which had been planted there by +that excellent body, the London Missionary Society. The teacher tells +me, too, that the poor girl has fallen in love with a Christian chief, +who lives on an island some fifty miles or so to the south of this one, +and that she is meditating a desperate attempt at escape. So, you see, +we have come in the nick of time. I fancy that this chief is the fellow +whom you heard of, Ralph, at the Island of Emo. Besides all this, the +heathen savages are at war among themselves, and there's to be a battle +fought the day after to-morrow, in which the principal leader is Tararo; +so that we'll not be able to commence our negotiations with the rascally +chief till the day after." + +The village off which we anchored was beautifully situated at the head of +a small bay, from the margin of which trees of every description peculiar +to the tropics rose in the richest luxuriance to the summit of a hilly +ridge, which was the line of demarcation between the possessions of the +Christians and those of the neighbouring heathen chief. + +The site of the settlement was an extensive plot of flat land, stretching +in a gentle slope from the sea to the mountain. The cottages stood +several hundred yards from the beach, and were protected from the glare +of the sea by the rich foliage of rows of large Barringtonia and other +trees, which girt the shore. The village was about a mile in length, and +perfectly straight, with a wide road down the middle, on either side of +which were rows of the tufted-topped ti tree, whose delicate and +beautiful blossoms, hanging beneath their plume-crested tops, added +richness to the scene. The cottages of the natives were built beneath +these trees, and were kept in the most excellent order, each having a +little garden in front, tastefully laid out and planted, while the walks +were covered with black and white pebbles. + +Every house had doors and Venetian windows, painted partly with lamp +black made from the candle-nut, and partly with red ochre, which +contrasted powerfully with the dazzling coral lime that covered the +walls. On a prominent position stood a handsome church, which was quite +a curiosity in its way. It was a hundred feet long by fifty broad, and +was seated throughout to accommodate upwards of two thousand persons. It +had six large folding doors and twelve windows with Venetian blinds; and, +although a large and substantial edifice, it had been built, we were told +by the teacher, in the space of two months! There was not a single iron +nail in the fabric, and the natives had constructed it chiefly with their +stone and bone axes and other tools, having only one or two axes or tools +of European manufacture. Everything around this beautiful spot wore an +aspect of peace and plenty, and, as we dropped our anchor within a +stone's cast of the substantial coral wharf, I could not avoid +contrasting it with the wretched village of Emo, where I had witnessed so +many frightful scenes. When the teacher afterwards told me that the +people of this tribe had become converts only a year previous to our +arrival, and that they had been living before that in the practice of the +most bloody system of idolatry, I could not refrain from exclaiming, +"What a convincing proof that Christianity is of God!" + +On landing from our little boat, we were received with a warm welcome by +the teacher and his wife; the latter being also a native, clothed in a +simple European gown and straw bonnet. The shore was lined with hundreds +of natives, whose persons were all more or less clothed with native +cloth. Some of the men had on a kind of poncho formed of this cloth, +their legs being uncovered. Others wore clumsily-fashioned trousers, and +no upper garment except hats made of straw and cloth. Many of the +dresses, both of women and men, were grotesque enough, being very bad +imitations of the European garb; but all wore a dress of some sort or +other. They seemed very glad to see us, and crowded round us as the +teacher led the way to his dwelling, where we were entertained, in the +most sumptuous manner, on baked pig and all the varieties of fruits and +vegetables that the island produced. We were much annoyed, however, by +the rats: they seemed to run about the house like domestic animals. As +we sat at table, one of them peeped up at us over the edge of the cloth, +close to Peterkin's elbow, who floored it with a blow on the snout from +his knife, exclaiming as he did so-- + +"I say, Mister Teacher, why don't you set traps for these brutes?--surely +you are not fond of them!" + +"No," replied the teacher, with a smile; "we would be glad to get rid of +them if we could; but if we were to trap all the rats on the island, it +would occupy our whole time." + +"Are they, then, so numerous?" inquired Jack. + +"They swarm everywhere. The poor heathens on the north side eat them, +and think them very sweet. So did my people formerly; but they do not +eat so many now, because the missionary who was last here expressed +disgust at it. The poor people asked if it was wrong to eat rats; and he +told them that it was certainly not wrong, but that the people of England +would be much disgusted were they asked to eat rats." + +We had not been an hour in the house of this kind-hearted man when we +were convinced of the truth of his statement as to their numbers, for the +rats ran about the floors in dozens, and, during our meal, two men were +stationed at the table to keep them off! + +"What a pity you have no cats," said Peterkin, as he aimed a blow at +another reckless intruder, and missed it. + +"We would, indeed, be glad to have a few," rejoined the teacher, "but +they are difficult to be got. The hogs, we find, are very good +rat-killers, but they do not seem to be able to keep the numbers down. I +have heard that they are better than cats." + +As the teacher said this, his good-natured black face was wrinkled with a +smile of merriment. Observing that I had noticed it, he said:-- + +"I smiled just now when I remembered the fate of the first cat that was +taken to Raratonga. This is one of the stations of the London Missionary +Society. It, like our own, is infested with rats, and a cat was brought +at last to the island. It was a large black one. On being turned loose, +instead of being content to stay among men, the cat took to the +mountains, and lived in a wild state, sometimes paying visits during the +night to the houses of the natives; some of whom, living at a distance +from the settlement, had not heard of the cat's arrival, and were +dreadfully frightened in consequence, calling it a 'monster of the deep,' +and flying in terror away from it. One night the cat, feeling a desire +for company, I suppose, took its way to the house of a chief, who had +recently been converted to Christianity, and had begun to learn to read +and pray. The chief's wife, who was sitting awake at his side while he +slept, beheld with horror two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard +with surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, she awoke +her husband, and began to upbraid him for forsaking his old religion, and +burning his god, who, she declared, was now come to be avenged of them. +'Get up and pray! get up and pray!' she cried. The chief arose, and, on +opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring lights, and heard the same +ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme urgency of the case, he +commenced, with all possible vehemence, to vociferate the alphabet, as a +prayer to God to deliver them from the vengeance of Satan! On hearing +this, the cat, as much alarmed as themselves, fled precipitately away, +leaving the chief and his wife congratulating themselves on the efficacy +of their prayer." + +We were much diverted with this anecdote, which the teacher related in +English so good, that we certainly could not have supposed him a native +but for the colour of his face and the foreign accent in his tone. Next +day we walked out with this interesting man, and were much entertained +and instructed by his conversation, as we rambled through the cool shady +groves of bananas, citrons, limes, and other trees, or sauntered among +the cottages of the natives, and watched them while they laboured +diligently in the taro beds, or manufactured the tapa or native cloth. To +some of these Jack put questions through the medium of the missionary; +and the replies were such as to surprise us at the extent of their +knowledge. Indeed, Peterkin very truly remarked that "they seemed to +know a considerable deal more than Jack himself!" + +Among other pieces of interesting information that we obtained was the +following, in regard to coral formations:-- + +"The islands of the Pacific," said our friend, "are of three different +kinds or classes. Those of the first class are volcanic, mountainous, +and wild; some shooting their jagged peaks into the clouds at an +elevation of ten and fifteen thousand feet. Those of the second class +are of crystalized limestone, and vary in height from one hundred to five +hundred feet. The hills on these are not so wild or broken as those of +the first class, but are richly clothed with vegetation, and very +beautiful. I have no doubt that the Coral Island on which you were +wrecked was one of this class. They are supposed to have been upheaved +from the bottom of the sea by volcanic agency, but they are not +themselves volcanic in their nature, neither are they of coral formation. +Those of the third class are the low coralline islands usually having +lagoons of water in their midst; they are very numerous. + +"As to the manner in which coral islands and reefs are formed; there are +various opinions on this point. I will give you what seems to me the +most probable theory,--a theory, I may add, which is held by some of the +good and scientific missionaries. It is well known that there is much +lime in salt water; it is also known that coral is composed of lime. It +is supposed that the polypes, or coral insects, have the power of +attracting this lime to their bodies; and with this material they build +their little cells or habitations. They choose the summit of a volcano, +or the top of a submarine mountain, as a foundation on which to build; +for it is found that they never work at any great depth below the +surface. On this they work; the polypes on the mountain top, of course, +reach the surface first, then those at the outer edges reach the top +sooner than the others between them and the centre, thus forming the +coral reef surrounding the lagoon of water and the central island; after +that the insects within the lagoon cease working. When the surface of +the water is reached, these myriads of wonderful creatures die. Then +birds visit the spot, and seeds are thus conveyed thither, which take +root, and spring up, and flourish. Thus are commenced those coralline +islets of which you have seen so many in these seas. The reefs round the +large islands are formed in a similar manner. When we consider," added +the missionary, "the smallness of the architects used by our heavenly +Father in order to form those lovely and innumerable islands, we are +filled with much of that feeling which induced the ancient king to +exclaim, 'How manifold, O God, are thy works! in wisdom thou hast made +them all.'" + +We all heartily agreed with the missionary in this sentiment, and felt +not a little gratified to find that the opinions which Jack and I had +been led to form from personal observation on our Coral Island were thus +to a great extent corroborated. + +The missionary also gave us an account of the manner in which +Christianity had been introduced among them. He said: "When missionaries +were first sent here, three years ago, a small vessel brought them; and +the chief, who is now dead, promised to treat well the two native +teachers who were left with their wives on the island. But scarcely had +the boat which landed them returned to the ship, than the natives began +to maltreat their guests, taking away all they possessed, and offering +them further violence, so that, when the boat was sent in haste to fetch +them away, the clothes of both men and women were torn nearly off their +backs. + +"Two years after this the vessel visited them again, and I, being in her, +volunteered to land alone, without any goods whatever; begging that my +wife might be brought to me the following year,--that is, _this_ year; +and, as you see, she is with me. But the surf was so high that the boat +could not land me; so with nothing on but my trousers and shirt, and with +a few catechisms and a Bible, besides some portions of the Scripture +translated into the Mango tongue, I sprang into the sea, and swam ashore +on the crest of a breaker. I was instantly dragged up the beach by the +natives; who, on finding I had nothing worth having upon me, let me +alone. I then made signs to my friends in the ship to leave me; which +they did. At first the natives listened to me in silence, but laughed at +what I said while I preached the gospel of our blessed Saviour Jesus +Christ to them. Afterwards they treated me ill sometimes; but I +persevered, and continued to dwell among them, and dispute, and exhort +them to give up their sinful ways of life, burn their idols, and come to +Jesus. + +"About a month after I landed, I heard that the chief was dead. He was +the father of the present chief, who is now a most consistent member of +the church. It is a custom here that, when a chief dies, his wives are +strangled and buried with him. Knowing this, I hastened to his house to +endeavour to prevent such cruelty if possible. When I arrived, I found +two of the wives had already been killed, while another was in the act of +being strangled. I pleaded hard for her, but it was too late; she was +already dead. I then entreated the son to spare the fourth wife; and, +after much hesitation, my prayer was granted: but, in half an hour +afterwards, this poor woman repented of being unfaithful, as she termed +it, to her husband, and insisted on being strangled; which was +accordingly done. + +"All this time the chief's son was walking up and down before his +father's house with a brow black as thunder. When he entered, I went in +with him, and found, to my surprise, that his father was not dead! The +old man was sitting on a mat in a corner, with an expression of placid +resignation on his face. + +"'Why,' said I, 'have you strangled your father's wives before he is +dead?' + +"To this the son replied, 'He is dead. That is no longer my father. He +is as good as dead now. He is to be _buried alive_.' + +"I now remembered having heard that it is a custom among the Feejee +islanders, that when the reigning chief grows old or infirm, the heir to +the chieftainship has a right to depose his father; in which case he is +considered as dead, and is buried alive. The young chief was now about +to follow this custom, and, despite my earnest entreaties and pleadings, +the old chief was buried that day before my eyes in the same grave with +his four strangled wives! Oh! my heart groaned when I saw this, and I +prayed to God to open the hearts of these poor creatures, as he had +already opened mine, and pour into them the light and the love of the +gospel of Jesus. My prayer was answered very soon. A week afterwards, +the son, who was now chief of the tribe, came to me, bearing his god on +his shoulders, and groaning beneath its weight. Flinging it down at my +feet, he desired me to burn it! + +"You may conceive how overjoyed I was at this. I sprang up and embraced +him, while I shed tears of joy. Then we made a fire, and burned the god +to ashes, amid an immense concourse of the people, who seemed terrified +at what was being done, and shrank back when we burned the god, expecting +some signal vengeance to be taken upon us; but seeing that nothing +happened, they changed their minds, and thought that our God must be the +true one after all. From that time the mission prospered steadily, and +now, while there is not a single man in the tribe who has not burned his +household gods, and become a convert to Christianity, there are not a +few, I hope, who are true followers of the Lamb, having been plucked as +brands from the burning by Him who can save unto the uttermost. I will +not tell you more of our progress at this time, but you see," he said, +waving his hand around him, "the village and the church did not exist a +year ago!" + +We were indeed much interested in this account, and I could not help +again in my heart praying God to prosper those missionary societies that +send such inestimable blessings to these islands of dark and bloody +idolatry. The teacher also added that the other tribes were very +indignant at this one for having burned its gods, and threatened to +destroy it altogether, but they had done nothing yet; "and if they +should," said the teacher, "the Lord is on our side; of whom shall we be +afraid?" + +"Have the missionaries many stations in these seas?" inquired Jack. + +"Oh, yes. The London Missionary Society have a great many in the Tahiti +group, and other islands in that quarter. Then the Wesleyans have the +Feejee Islands all to themselves, and the Americans have many stations in +other groups. But still, my friend, there are hundreds of islands here +the natives of which have never heard of Jesus, or the good word of God, +or the Holy Spirit; and thousands are living and dying in the practice of +those terrible sins and bloody murders of which you have already heard. I +trust, my friends," he added, looking earnestly into our faces, "I trust +that if you ever return to England, you will tell your Christian friends +that the horrors which they hear of in regard to these islands are +_literally true_, and that when they have heard the worst, the '_half has +not been told them_;' for there are perpetrated here foul deeds of +darkness of which man may not speak. You may also tell them," he said, +looking around with a smile, while a tear of gratitude trembled in his +eye and rolled down his coal-black cheek,--"tell them of the blessings +that the gospel has wrought _here_!" + +We assured our friend that we would certainly not forget his request. On +returning towards the village, about noon, we remarked on the beautiful +whiteness of the cottages. + +"That is owing to the lime with which they are plastered," said the +teacher. "When the natives were converted, as I have described, I set +them to work to build cottages for themselves, and also this handsome +church which you see. When the framework and other parts of the houses +were up, I sent the people to fetch coral from the sea. They brought +immense quantities. Then I made them cut wood, and, piling the coral +above it, set it on fire. + +"'Look! look!' cried the poor people, in amazement; 'what wonderful +people the Christians are! He is roasting stones. We shall not need +taro or bread-fruit any more; we may eat stones!' + +"But their surprise was still greater when the coral was reduced to a +fine soft white powder. They immediately set up a great shout, and, +mingling the lime with water, rubbed their faces and their bodies all +over with it, and ran through the village screaming with delight. They +were also much surprised at another thing they saw me do. I wished to +make some household furniture, and constructed a turning-lathe to assist +me. The first thing that I turned was the leg of a sofa; which was no +sooner finished than the chief seized it with wonder and delight, and ran +through the village exhibiting it to the people, who looked upon it with +great admiration. The chief then, tying a string to it, hung it round +his neck as an ornament! He afterwards told me that if he had seen it +before he became a Christian he would have made it his god!" + +As the teacher concluded this anecdote we reached his door. Saying that +he had business to attend to, he left us to amuse ourselves as we best +could. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, turning abruptly towards us, and buttoning up his +jacket as he spoke, "I'm off to see the battle. I've no particular +fondness for seein' blood-shed, but I must find out the nature o' these +fellows and see their customs with my own eyes, so that I may be able to +speak of it again, if need be, authoritatively. It's only six miles off, +and we don't run much more risk than that of getting a rap with a stray +stone or an over-shot arrow. Will you go?" + +"To be sure we will," said Peterkin. + +"If they chance to see us we'll cut and run for it," added Jack. + +"Dear me!" cried Peterkin,--"_you_ run! thought you would scorn to run +from any one." + +"So I would, if it were my duty to fight," returned Jack, coolly; "but as +I don't want to fight, and don't intend to fight, if they offer to attack +us I'll run away like the veriest coward that ever went by the name of +Peterkin. So come along." + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + +A strange and bloody battle--The lion bearded in his den--Frightful +scenes of cruelty, and fears for the future. + +We had ascertained from the teacher the direction to the spot on which +the battle was to be fought, and after a walk of two hours reached it. +The summit of a bare hill was the place chosen; for, unlike most of the +other islanders, who are addicted to bush-fighting, those of Mango are in +the habit of meeting on open ground. We arrived before the two parties +had commenced the deadly struggle, and, creeping as close up as we dared +among the rocks, we lay and watched them. + +The combatants were drawn up face to face, each side ranged in rank four +deep. Those in the first row were armed with long spears; the second, +with clubs to defend the spearmen; the third row was composed of young +men with slings; and the fourth consisted of women, who carried baskets +of stones for the slingers, and clubs and spears with which to supply the +warriors. Soon after we arrived, the attack was made with great fury. +There was no science displayed. The two bodies of savages rushed +headlong upon each other and engaged in a general _melee_, and a more +dreadful set of men I have never seen. They wore grotesque war-caps made +of various substances and decorated with feathers. Their faces and +bodies were painted so as to make them look as frightful as possible; and +as they brandished their massive clubs, leaped, shouted, yelled, and +dashed each other to the ground, I thought I had never seen men look so +like demons before. + +We were much surprised at the conduct of the women, who seemed to be +perfect furies, and hung about the heels of their husbands in order to +defend them. One stout young women we saw, whose husband was hard +pressed and about to be overcome: she lifted a large stone, and throwing +it at his opponent's head, felled him to the earth. But the battle did +not last long. The band most distant from us gave way and were routed, +leaving eighteen of their comrades dead upon the field. These the +victors brained as they lay; and putting some of their brains on leaves +went off with them, we were afterwards informed, to their temples, to +present them to their gods as an earnest of the human victims who were +soon to be brought there. + +We hastened back to the Christian village with feelings of the deepest +sadness at the sanguinary conflict which we had just witnessed. + +Next day, after breakfasting with our friend the teacher, we made +preparations for carrying out our plan. At first the teacher endeavoured +to dissuade us. + +"You do not know," said he, turning to Jack, "the danger you run in +venturing amongst these ferocious savages. I feel much pity for poor +Avatea; but you are not likely to succeed in saving her, and you may die +in the attempt." + +"Well," said Jack, quietly, "I am not afraid to die in a good cause." + +The teacher smiled approvingly at him as he said this, and after a little +further conversation agreed to accompany us as interpreter; saying that, +although Tararo was unfriendly to him, he had hitherto treated him with +respect. + +We now went on board the schooner, having resolved to sail round the +island and drop anchor opposite the heathen village. We manned her with +natives, and hoped to overawe the savages by displaying our brass gun to +advantage. The teacher soon after came on board, and setting our sails +we put to sea. In two hours more we made the cliffs reverberate with the +crash of the big gun, which we fired by way of salute, while we ran the +British ensign up to the peak and cast anchor. The commotion on shore +showed us that we had struck terror into the hearts of the natives; but +seeing that we did not offer to molest them, a canoe at length put off +and paddled cautiously towards us. The teacher showed himself, and +explaining that we were friends and wished to palaver with the chief, +desired the native to go and tell him to come on board. + +We waited long and with much impatience for an answer. During this time +the native teacher conversed with us again, and told us many things +concerning the success of the gospel among those islands; and perceiving +that we were by no means so much gratified as we ought to have been at +the hearing of such good news, he pressed us more closely in regard to +our personal interest in religion, and exhorted us to consider that our +souls were certainly in as great danger as those of the wretched heathen +whom we pitied so much, if we had not already found salvation in Jesus +Christ. "Nay, further," he added, "if such be your unhappy case, you +are, in the sight of God, much worse than these savages (forgive me, my +young friends, for saying so); for they have no knowledge, no light, and +do not profess to believe; while you, on the contrary, have been brought +up in the light of the blessed gospel and call yourselves Christians. +These poor savages are indeed the enemies of our Lord; but you, if ye be +not true believers, are traitors!" + +I must confess that my heart condemned me while the teacher spoke in this +earnest manner, and I knew not what to reply. Peterkin, too, did not +seem to like it, and I thought would willingly have escaped; but Jack +seemed deeply impressed, and wore an anxious expression on his naturally +grave countenance, while he assented to the teacher's remarks and put to +him many earnest questions. Meanwhile the natives who composed our crew, +having nothing particular to do, had squatted down on the deck and taken +out their little books containing the translated portions of the New +Testament, along with hymns and spelling-books, and were now busily +engaged, some vociferating the alphabet, others learning prayers off by +heart, while a few sang hymns,--all of them being utterly unmindful of +our presence. The teacher soon joined them, and soon afterwards they all +engaged in a prayer which was afterwards translated to us, and proved to +be a petition for the success of our undertaking and for the conversion +of the heathen. + +While we were thus engaged a canoe put off from shore and several savages +leaped on deck, one of whom advanced to the teacher and informed him that +Tararo could not come on board that day, being busy with some religious +ceremonies before the gods, which could on no account be postponed. He +was also engaged with a friendly chief who was about to take his +departure from the island, and therefore begged that the teacher and his +friends would land and pay a visit to him. To this the teacher returned +answer that we would land immediately. + +"Now, lads," said Jack, as we were about to step into our little boat, +"I'm not going to take any weapons with me, and I recommend you to take +none either. We are altogether in the power of these savages, and the +utmost we could do, if they were to attack us, would be to kill a few of +them before we were ourselves overpowered. I think that our only chance +of success lies in mild measures. Don't you think so?" + +To this I assented gladly, and Peterkin replied by laying down a huge +bell-mouthed blunderbuss, and divesting himself of a pair of enormous +horse-pistols with which he had purposed to overawe the natives! We then +jumped into our boat and rowed ashore. + +On reaching the beach we were received by a crowd of naked savages, who +shouted a rude welcome, and conducted us to a house or shed where a baked +pig and a variety of vegetables were prepared for us. Having partaken of +these, the teacher begged to be conducted to the chief; but there seemed +some hesitation, and after some consultation among themselves, one of the +men stood forward and spoke to the teacher. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack when the savage had concluded. + +"He says that the chief is just going to the temple of his god and cannot +see us yet; so we must be patient, my friend." + +"Well," cried Jack, rising; "if he won't come to see me, I'll e'en go and +see him. Besides, I have a great desire to witness their proceedings at +this temple of theirs. Will you go with me, friend?" + +"I cannot," said the teacher, shaking his head; "I must not go to the +heathen temples and witness their inhuman rites, except for the purpose +of condemning their wickedness and folly." + +"Very good," returned Jack; "then I'll go alone, for I cannot condemn +their doings till I have seen them." + +Jack arose, and we, having determined to go also, followed him through +the banana groves to a rising ground immediately behind the village, on +the top of which stood the Bure, or temple, under the dark shade of a +group of iron-wood trees. As we went through the village, I was again +led to contrast the rude huts and sheds, and their almost naked savage- +looking inhabitants, with the natives of the Christian village, who, to +use the teacher's scriptural expression, were now "clothed and in their +right mind." + +As we turned into a broad path leading towards the hill, we were arrested +by the shouts of an approaching multitude in the rear. Drawing aside +into the bushes we awaited their coming up, and as they drew near we +observed that it was a procession of the natives, many of whom were +dancing and gesticulating in the most frantic manner. They had an +exceedingly hideous aspect, owing to the black, red, and yellow paints +with which their faces and naked bodies were bedaubed. In the midst of +these came a band of men carrying three or four planks, on which were +seated in rows upwards of a dozen men. I shuddered involuntarily as I +recollected the sacrifice of human victims at the island of Emo, and +turned with a look of fear to Jack as I said,-- + +"Oh, Jack! I have a terrible dread that they are going to commit some of +their cruel practices on these wretched men. We had better not go to the +temple. We shall only be horrified without being able to do any good, +for I fear they are going to kill them." + +Jack's face wore an expression of deep compassion as he said, in a low +voice, "No fear, Ralph; the sufferings of these poor fellows are over +long ago." + +I turned with a start as he spoke, and, glancing at the men, who were now +quite near to the spot where we stood, saw that they were all dead. They +were tied firmly with ropes in a sitting posture on the planks, and +seemed, as they bent their sightless eye-balls and grinning mouths over +the dancing crew below, as if they were laughing in ghastly mockery at +the utter inability of their enemies to hurt them now. These, we +discovered afterwards, were the men who had been slain in the battle of +the previous day, and were now on their way to be first presented to the +gods, and then eaten. Behind these came two men leading between them a +third, whose hands were pinioned behind his back. He walked with a firm +step, and wore a look of utter indifference on his face, as they led him +along; so that we concluded he must be a criminal who was about to +receive some slight punishment for his faults. The rear of the +procession was brought up by a shouting crowd of women and children, with +whom we mingled and followed to the temple. + +Here we arrived in a few minutes. The temple was a tall circular +building, open at one side. Around it were strewn heaps of human bones +and skulls. At a table inside sat the priest, an elderly man, with a +long gray beard. He was seated on a stool, and before him lay several +knives, made of wood, bone, and splinters of bamboo, with which he +performed his office of dissecting dead bodies. Farther in lay a variety +of articles that had been dedicated to the god, and among them were many +spears and clubs. I observed among the latter some with human teeth +sticking in them, where the victims had been clubbed in their mouths. + +Before this temple the bodies, which were painted with vermilion and +soot, were arranged in a sitting posture; and a man, called a "dan-vosa" +(orator), advanced, and, laying his hands on their heads, began to chide +them, apparently, in a low bantering tone. What he said we knew not, +but, as he went on, he waxed warm, and at last shouted to them at the top +of his lungs, and finally finished by kicking the bodies over and running +away, amid the shouts and laughter of the people, who now rushed forward. +Seizing the bodies by a leg, or an arm, or by the hair of the head, they +dragged them over stumps and stones and through sloughs, until they were +exhausted. The bodies were then brought back to the temple and dissected +by the priest, after which they were taken out to be baked. + +Close to the temple a large fire was kindled, in which stones were heated +red hot. When ready these were spread out on the ground, and a thick +coating of leaves strewn over them to slack the heat. On this "lovo," or +oven, the bodies were then placed, covered over, and left to bake. + +The crowd now ran, with terrible yells, towards a neighbouring hill or +mound, on which we observed the frame-work of a house lying ready to be +erected. Sick with horror, yet fascinated by curiosity, we staggered +after them mechanically, scarce knowing where we were going or what we +did, and feeling a sort of impression that all we saw was a dreadful +dream. + +Arrived at the place, we saw the multitude crowding round a certain spot. +We pressed forward and obtained a sight of what they were doing. A large +wooden beam or post lay on the ground, beside the other parts of the +frame-work of the house, and close to the end of it was a hole about +seven feet deep and upwards of two feet wide. While we looked, the man +whom we had before observed with his hands pinioned, was carried into the +circle. His hands were now free, but his legs were tightly strapped +together. The post of the house was then placed in the hole, and the man +put in beside it. His head was a good way below the surface of the hole, +and his arms were clasped round the post. Earth was now thrown in until +all was covered over and stamped down; and this, we were afterwards told, +was a _ceremony_ usually performed at the dedication of a new temple, or +the erection of a chief's house! + +"Come, come," cried Jack, on beholding this horrible tragedy, "we have +seen enough, enough, far more than enough! Let us go." + +Jack's face looked ghastly pale and haggard as we hurried back to rejoin +the teacher, and I have no doubt that he felt terrible anxiety when he +considered the number and ferocity of the savages, and the weakness of +the few arms which were ready indeed to essay, but impotent to effect, +Avatea's deliverance from these ruthless men. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + +An unexpected discovery, and a bold, reckless defiance, with its +consequences--Plans of escape, and heroic resolves. + +When we returned to the shore, and related to our friend what had passed, +he was greatly distressed, and groaned in spirit; but we had not sat long +in conversation, when we were interrupted by the arrival of Tararo on the +beach, accompanied by a number of followers bearing baskets of vegetables +and fruits on their heads. + +We advanced to meet him, and he expressed, through our interpreter, much +pleasure in seeing us. + +"And what is it that my friends wish to say to me?" he inquired. + +The teacher explained that we came to beg that Avatea might be spared. + +"Tell him," said Jack, "that I consider that I have a right to ask this +of him, having not only saved the girl's life, but the lives of his own +people also; and say that I wish her to be allowed to follow her own +wishes, and join the Christians." + +While this was being translated, the chiefs brow lowered, and we could +see plainly that our request met with no favourable reception. He +replied with considerable energy, and at some length. + +"What says he?" inquired Jack. + +"I regret to say that he will not listen to the proposal. He says he has +pledged his word to his friend that the girl shall be sent to him, and a +deputy is even now on this island awaiting the fulfilment of the pledge." + +Jack bit his lip in suppressed anger. "Tell Tararo," he exclaimed with +flashing eye, "that if he does not grant my demand, it will be worse for +him. Say I have a big gun on board my schooner that will blow his +village into the sea, if he does not give up the girl." + +"Nay, my friend," said the teacher, gently, "I will not tell him that; we +must overcome evil with good.'" + +"What does my friend say?" inquired the chief, who seemed nettled by +Jack's looks of defiance. + +"He is displeased," replied the teacher. + +Tararo turned away with a smile of contempt, and walked towards the men +who carried the baskets of vegetables, and who had now emptied the whole +on the beach in an enormous pile. + +"What are they doing there?" I inquired. + +"I think that they are laying out a gift which they intend to present to +some one," said the teacher. + +At this moment a couple of men appeared leading a young girl between +them; and, going towards the heap of fruits and vegetables, placed her on +the top of it. We started with surprise and fear, for in the young +female before us we recognised the Samoan girl, Avatea! + +We stood rooted to the earth with surprise and thick coming fears. + +"Oh! my dear young friend," whispered the teacher, in a voice of deep +emotion, while he seized Jack by the arm, "she is to be made a sacrifice +even now!" + +"Is she?" cried Jack, with a vehement shout, spurning the teacher aside, +and dashing over two natives who stood in his way, while he rushed +towards the heap, sprang up its side, and seized Avatea by the arm. In +another moment he dragged her down, placed her back to a large tree, and, +wrenching a war-club from the hand of a native who seemed powerless and +petrified with surprise, whirled it above his head, and yelled, rather +than shouted, while his face blazed with fury, "Come on, the whole nation +of you, an ye like it, and do your worst!" + +It seemed as though the challenge had been literally accepted; for every +savage on the ground ran precipitately at Jack with club and spear, and, +doubtless, would speedily have poured out his brave blood on the sod, had +not the teacher rushed in between them, and, raising his voice to its +utmost, cried.-- + +"Stay your hands, warriors! It is not your part to judge in this matter. +It is for Tararo, the chief, to say whether or not the young man shall +live or die." + +The natives were arrested; and I know not whether it was the gratifying +acknowledgment of his superiority thus made by the teacher, or some +lingering feeling of gratitude for Jack's former aid in time of need, +that influenced Tararo, but he stepped forward, and, waving his hand, +said to his people,--"Desist. The young man's life is mine." Then, +turning to Jack, he said, "You have forfeited your liberty and life to +me. Submit yourself, for we are more numerous than the sand upon the +shore. You are but one; why should you die?" + +"Villain!" exclaimed Jack, passionately, "I may die, but, assuredly, I +shall not perish alone. I will not submit until you promise that this +girl shall not be injured." + +"You are very bold," replied the chief, haughtily, "but very foolish. Yet +I will say that Avatea shall not be sent away, at least for three days." + +"You had better accept these terms," whispered the teacher, entreatingly. +"If you persist in this mad defiance, you will be slain, and Avatea will +be lost. Three days are worth having." + +Jack hesitated a moment, then lowered his club, and, throwing it moodily +to the ground, crossed his arms on his breast, and hung down his head in +silence. + +Tararo seemed pleased by his submission, and told the teacher to say that +he did not forget his former services, and, therefore, would leave him +free as to his person, but that the schooner would be detained till he +had further considered the matter. + +While the teacher translated this, he approached as near to where Avatea +was standing as possible, without creating suspicion, and whispered to +her a few words in the native language. Avatea, who, during the whole of +the foregoing scene, had stood leaning against the tree perfectly +passive, and seemingly quite uninterested in all that was going on, +replied by a single rapid glance of her dark eye, which was instantly +cast down again on the ground at her feet. + +Tararo now advanced, and taking the girl by the hand, led her +unresistingly away, while Jack, Peterkin, and I returned with the teacher +on board the schooner. + +On reaching the deck, we went down to the cabin, where Jack threw +himself, in a state of great dejection, on a couch; but the teacher +seated himself by his side, and, laying his hand upon his shoulder, +said,-- + +"Do not give way to anger, my young friend. God has given us three days, +and we must use the means that are in our power to free this poor girl +from slavery. We must not sit in idle disappointment, we must act"-- + +"Act!" cried Jack, raising himself, and tossing back his hair wildly; "it +is mockery to balk of acting when one is bound hand and foot. How can I +act? I cannot fight a whole nation of savages single-handed. Yes," he +said, with a bitter smile, "I can fight them, but I cannot conquer them, +or save Avatea." + +"Patience, my friend; your spirit is not a good one just now. You cannot +expect that blessing which alone can insure success, unless you are more +submissive. I will tell you my plans if you will listen." + +"Listen!" cried Jack, eagerly, "of course I will, my good fellow; I did +not know you had any plans. Out with them. I only hope you will show me +how I can get the girl on board of this schooner, and I'd up anchor and +away in no time. But proceed with your plans." + +The teacher smiled sadly: "Ah! my friend, if one fathom of your anchor +chain were to rattle, as you drew it in, a thousand warriors would be +standing on your deck. No, no, that could not be done. Even now, your +ship would be taken from you were it not that Tararo has some feeling of +gratitude toward you. But I know Tararo well. He is a man of falsehood, +as all the unconverted savages are. The chief to whom he has promised +this girl is very powerful, and Tararo _must_ fulfil his promise. He has +told you that he would do nothing to the girl for three days; but that is +because the party who are to take her away will not be ready to start for +three days. Still, as he might have made you a prisoner during those +three days, I say that God has given them to us." + +"Well, but what do you propose to do?" said Jack, impatiently. + +"My plan involves much danger, but I see no other, and I think you have +courage to brave it. It is this: There is an island about fifty miles to +the south of this, the natives of which are Christians, and have been so +for two years or more, and the principal chief is Avatea's lover. Once +there, Avatea would be safe. Now, I suggest that you should abandon your +schooner. Do you think that you can make so great a sacrifice?" + +"Friend," replied Jack, "when I make up my mind to go through with a +thing of importance, I can make any sacrifice." + +The teacher smiled. "Well, then, the savages could not conceive it +possible that, for the sake of a girl, you would voluntarily lose your +fine vessel; therefore as long as she lies here they think they have you +all safe: so I suggest that we get a quantity of stores conveyed to a +sequestered part of the shore, provide a small canoe, put Avatea on +board, and you three would paddle to the Christian island." + +"Bravo!" cried Peterkin, springing up and seizing the teacher's hand. +"Missionary, you're a regular brick. I didn't think you had so much in +you." + +"As for me," continued the teacher, "I will remain on board till they +discover that you are gone. Then they will ask me where you are gone to, +and I will refuse to tell." + +"And what'll be the result of that?" inquired Jack. + +"I know not. Perhaps they will kill me; but," he added, looking at Jack +with a peculiar smile, "I too am not afraid to die in a good cause!" + +"But how are we to get hold of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +"I have arranged with her to meet us at a particular spot, to which I +will guide you to-night. We shall then arrange about it. She will +easily manage to elude her keepers, who are not very strict in watching +her, thinking it impossible that she could escape from the island. +Indeed, I am sure that such an idea will never enter their heads. But, +as I have said, you run great danger. Fifty miles in a small canoe, on +the open sea, is a great voyage to make. You may miss the island, too, +in which case there is no other in that direction for a hundred miles or +more; and if you lose your way and fall among other heathens, you know +the law of Feejee--a cast-away who gains the shore is doomed to die. You +must count the cost, my young friend." + +"I have counted it," replied Jack. "If Avatea consents to run the risk, +most certainly I will; and so will my comrades also. Besides," added +Jack, looking seriously into the teacher's face, "your Bible,--_our_ +Bible, tells of ONE who delivers those who call on Him in the time of +trouble; who holds the winds in his fists and the waters in the hollow of +his hand." + +We now set about active preparations for the intended voyage; collected +together such things as we should require, and laid out on the deck +provisions sufficient to maintain us for several weeks, purposing to load +the canoe with as much as she could hold consistently with speed and +safety. These we covered with a tarpaulin, intending to convey them to +the canoe only a few hours before starting. When night spread her sable +curtain over the scene, we prepared to land; but, first, kneeling along +with the natives and the teacher, the latter implored a blessing on our +enterprise. Then we rowed quietly to the shore and followed our sable +guide, who led us by a long detour, in order to avoid the village, to the +place of rendezvous. We had not stood more than five minutes under the +gloomy shade of the thick foliage when a dark figure glided noiselessly +up to us. + +"Ah! here you are," said Jack, as Avatea approached. "Now, then, tell +her what we've come about, and don't waste time." + +"I understan' leetl English," said Avatea, in a low voice. + +"Why, where did you pick up English?" exclaimed Jack, in amazement; "you +were dumb as a stone when I saw you last." + +"She has learned all she knows of it from me," said the teacher, "since +she came to the island." + +We now gave Avatea a full explanation of our plans, entering into all the +details, and concealing none of the danger, so that she might be fully +aware of the risk she ran. As we had anticipated, she was too glad of +the opportunity thus afforded her to escape from her persecutors to think +of the danger or risk. + +"Then you're willing to go with us, are you?" said Jack. + +"Yis, I am willing to go." + +"And you're not afraid to trust yourself out on the deep sea so far?" + +"No, I not 'fraid to go. Safe with Christian." + +After some further consultation, the teacher suggested that it was time +to return, so we bade Avatea good night, and having appointed to meet at +the cliff where the canoe lay, on the following night, just after dark, +we hastened away--we to row on board the schooner with muffled +oars--Avatea to glide back to her prison-hut among the Mango savages. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + + +The flight--The pursuit--Despair and its results--The lion bearded in his +den again--Awful danger threatened and wonderfully averted--A terrific +storm. + +As the time for our meditated flight drew near, we became naturally very +fearful lest our purpose should be discovered, and we spent the whole of +the following day in a state of nervous anxiety. We resolved to go a- +shore and ramble about the village, as if to observe the habits and +dwellings of the people, as we thought that an air of affected +indifference to the events of the previous day would be more likely than +any other course of conduct to avert suspicion as to our intentions. +While we were thus occupied, the teacher remained on board with the +Christian natives, whose powerful voices reached us ever and anon as they +engaged in singing hymns or in prayer. + +At last the long and tedious day came to a close, the sank into the sea, +and the short-lived twilight of those regions, to which I have already +referred, ended abruptly in a dark night. Hastily throwing a few +blankets into our little boat, we stepped into it, and, whispering +farewell to the natives in the schooner, rowed gently over the lagoon, +taking care to keep as near to the beach as possible. We rowed in the +utmost silence and with muffled oars, so that had any one observed us at +the distance of a few yards, he might have almost taken us for a phantom- +boat or a shadow on the dark water. Not a breath of air was stirring; +but fortunately the gentle ripple of the sea upon the shore, mingled with +the soft roar of the breaker on the distant reef, effectually drowned the +slight plash that we unavoidably made in the water by the dipping of our +oars. + +Quarter of an hour sufficed to bring us to the over-hanging cliff under +whose black shadow our little canoe lay, with her bow in the water ready +to be launched, and most of her cargo already stowed away. As the keel +of our little boat grated on the sand, a hand was laid upon the bow, and +a dim form was seen. + +"Ha!" said Peterkin in a whisper, as he stepped upon the beach, "is that +you, Avatea?" + +"Yis, it am me," was the reply. + +"All right! Now, then, gently. Help me to shove off the canoe," +whispered Jack to the teacher; "and Peterkin, do you shove these blankets +aboard, we may want them before long. Avatea, step into the +middle;--that's right." + +"Is all ready?" whispered the teacher. + +"Not quite," replied Peterkin. "Here, Ralph, lay hold o' this pair of +oars, and stow them away if you can. I don't like paddles. After we're +safe away I'll try to rig up rollicks for them." + +"Now, then, in with you and shove off." + +One more earnest squeeze of the kind teacher's hand, and, with his +whispered blessing yet sounding in our ears, we shot like an arrow from +the shore, sped over the still waters of the lagoon, and paddled as +swiftly as strong arms and willing hearts could urge us over the long +swell of the open sea. + +All that night and the whole of the following day we plied our paddles in +almost total silence and without halt, save twice to recruit our failing +energies with a mouthful of food and a draught of water. Jack had taken +the bearing of the island just after starting, and laying a small pocket- +compass before him, kept the head of the canoe due south, for our chance +of hitting the island depended very much on the faithfulness of our +steersman in keeping our tiny bark exactly and constantly on its proper +course. Peterkin and I paddled in the bow, and Avatea worked untiringly +in the middle. + +As the sun's lower limb dipped on the gilded edge of the sea Jack ceased +working, threw down his paddle, and called a halt. + +"There," he cried, heaving a deep, long-drawn sigh, "we've put a +considerable breadth of water between us and these black rascals, so now +we'll have a hearty supper and a sound sleep." + +"Hear, hear," cried Peterkin. "Nobly spoken, Jack. Hand me a drop +water, Ralph. Why, girl what's wrong with you? You look just like a +black owl blinking in the sunshine." + +Avatea smiled. "I sleepy," she said; and as if to prove the truth of +this, she laid her head on the edge of the canoe and fell fast asleep. + +"That's uncommon sharp practice," said Peterkin, with a broad grin. +"Don't you think we should awake her to make her eat something first? or, +perhaps," he added, with a grave, meditative look, "perhaps we might put +some food in her mouth, which is so elegantly open at the present moment, +and see if she'd swallow it while asleep. If so, Ralph, you might come +round to the front here and feed her quietly, while Jack and I are +tucking into the victuals. It would be a monstrous economy of time." + +I could not help smiling at Peterkin's idea, which, indeed, when I +pondered it, seemed remarkably good in theory; nevertheless I declined to +put it in practice, being fearful of the result should the victual chance +to go down the wrong throat. But, on suggesting this to Peterkin, he +exclaimed-- + +"Down the wrong throat, man! why, a fellow with half an eye might see +that if it went down Avatea's throat it could not go down the wrong +throat!--unless, indeed, you have all of a sudden become inordinately +selfish, and think that all the throats in the world are wrong ones +except your own. However, don't talk so much, and hand me the pork +before Jack finishes it. I feel myself entitled to at least one minute +morsel." + +"Peterkin, you're a villain. A paltry little villain," said Jack, +quietly, as he tossed the hind legs (including the tail) of a cold roast +pig to his comrade; "and I must again express my regret that unavoidable +circumstances have thrust your society upon me, and that necessity has +compelled me to cultivate your acquaintance. Were it not that you are +incapable of walking upon the water, I would order you, sir, out of the +canoe." + +"There! you've wakened Avatea with your long tongue," retorted Peterkin, +with a frown, as the girl gave vent to a deep sigh. "No," he continued, +"it was only a snore. Perchance she dreameth of her black Apollo. I +say, Ralph, do leave just one little slice of that yam. Between you and +Jack I run a chance of being put on short allowance, if not--yei--a--a--ow!" + +Peterkin's concluding remark was a yawn of so great energy that Jack +recommended him to postpone the conclusion of his meal till next +morning,--a piece of advice which he followed so quickly, that I was +forcibly reminded of his remark, a few minutes before, in regard to the +sharp practice of Avatea. + +My readers will have observed, probably, by this time, that I am much +given to meditation; they will not, therefore, be surprised to learn that +I fell into a deep reverie on the subject of sleep, which was continued +without intermission into the night, and prolonged without interruption +into the following morning. But I cannot feel assured that I actually +slept during that time, although I am tolerably certain that I was not +awake. + +Thus we lay like a shadow on the still bosom of the ocean, while the +night closed in, and all around was calm, dark, and silent. + +A thrilling cry of alarm from Peterkin startled us in the morning, just +as the gray dawn began to glimmer in the east. + +"What's wrong?" cried Jack, starting up. + +Peterkin replied by pointing with a look of anxious dread towards the +horizon; and a glance sufficed to show us that one of the largest sized +war-canoes was approaching us! + +With a groan of mingled despair and anger Jack seized his paddle, glanced +at the compass, and, in a suppressed voice, commanded us to "give way." + +But we did not require to be urged. Already our four paddles were +glancing in the water, and the canoe bounded over the glassy sea like a +dolphin, while a shout from our pursuers told that they had observed our +motions. + +"I see something like land ahead," said Jack, in a hopeful tone. "It +seems impossible that we could have made the island yet; still, if it is +so, we may reach it before these fellows can catch us, for our canoe is +light and our muscles are fresh." + +No one replied; for, to say truth, we felt that, in a long chase, we had +no chance whatever with a canoe which held nearly a hundred warriors. +Nevertheless, we resolved to do our utmost to escape, and paddled with a +degree of vigour that kept us well in advance of our pursuers. The war- +canoe was so far behind us that it seemed but a little speck on the sea, +and the shouts, to which the crew occasionally gave vent, came faintly +towards us on the morning breeze. We therefore hoped that we should be +able to keep in advance for an hour or two, when we might, perhaps, reach +the land ahead. But this hope was suddenly crushed by the supposed land, +not long after, rising up into the sky; thus proving itself to be a fog- +bank! + +A bitter feeling of disappointment filled each heart, and was expressed +on each countenance, as we beheld this termination to our hopes. But we +had little time to think of regret. Our danger was too great and +imminent to permit of a moment's relaxation from our exertions. No hope +now animated our bosoms; but a feeling of despair, strange to say, lent +us power to work, and nerved our arms with such energy, that it was +several hours ere the savages overtook us. When we saw that there was +indeed no chance of escape, and that paddling any longer would only serve +to exhaust our strength, without doing any good, we turned the side of +our canoe towards the approaching enemy, and laid down our paddles. + +Silently, and with a look of bitter determination on his face, Jack +lifted one of the light boat-oars that we had brought with us, and, +resting it on his shoulder, stood up in an attitude of bold defiance. +Peterkin took the other oar and also stood up, but there was no anger +visible on his countenance. When not sparkling with fun, it usually wore +a mild, sad expression, which was deepened on the present occasion, as he +glanced at Avatea, who sat with her face resting in her hands upon her +knees. Without knowing very well what I intended to do, I also arose and +grasped my paddle with both hands. + +On came the large canoe like a war-horse of the deep, with the foam +curling from its sharp bow, and the spear-heads of the savages glancing +the beams of the rising sun. Perfect silence was maintained on both +sides, and we could hear the hissing water, and see the frowning eyes of +the warriors, as they came rushing on. When about twenty yards distant, +five or six of the savages in the bow rose, and, laying aside their +paddles, took up their spears. Jack and Peterkin raised their oars, +while, with a feeling of madness whirling in my brain, I grasped my +paddle and prepared for the onset. But, before any of us could strike a +blow, the sharp prow of the war-canoe struck us like a thunderbolt on the +side, and hurled us into the sea! + +What occurred after this I cannot tell, for I was nearly drowned; but +when I recovered from the state of insensibility into which I had been +thrown, I found myself stretched on my back, bound hand and foot between +Jack and Peterkin, in the bottom of the large canoe. + +In this condition we lay the whole day, during which time the savages +only rested one hour. When night came, they rested again for another +hour, and appeared to sleep just as they sat. But we were neither +unbound nor allowed to speak to each other during the voyage, nor was a +morsel of food or a draught of water given to us. For food, however, we +cared little; but we would have given much for a drop of water to cool +our parched lips, and we would have been glad, too, had they loosened the +cords that bound us, for they were tightly fastened and occasioned us +much pain. The air, also, was unusually hot, so much so that I felt +convinced that a storm was brewing. This also added to our sufferings. +However, these were at length relieved by our arrival at the island from +which we had fled. + +While we were being led ashore, we caught a glimpse of Avatea, who was +seated in the hinder part of the canoe. She was not fettered in any way. +Our captors now drove us before them towards the hut of Tararo, at which +we speedily arrived, and found the chief seated with an expression on his +face that boded us no good. Our friend the teacher stood beside him, +with a look of anxiety on his mild features. + +"How comes it," said Tararo, turning to the teacher, "that these youths +have abused our hospitality?" + +"Tell him," replied Jack, "that we have not abused his hospitality, for +his hospitality has not been extended to us. I came to the island to +deliver Avatea, and my only regret is that I have failed to do so. If I +get another chance, I will try to save her yet." + +The teacher shook his head. "Nay, my young friend, I had better not tell +him that. It will only incense him." + +"Fear not," replied Jack. "If you don't tell him that, you'll tell him +nothing, for I won't say anything softer." + +On hearing Jack's speech, Tararo frowned and his eye flashed with anger. + +"Go," he said, "presumptuous boy. My debt to you is cancelled. You and +your companions shall die." + +As he spoke he rose and signed to several of his attendants, who seized +Jack, and Peterkin, and me, violently by the collars, and, dragging us +from the hut of the chief, led us through the wood to the outskirts of +the village. Here they thrust us into a species of natural cave in a +cliff, and, having barricaded the entrance, left us in total darkness. + +After feeling about for some time--for our legs were unshackled, although +our wrists were still bound with thongs--we found a low ledge of rock +running along one side of the cavern. On this we seated ourselves, and +for a long time maintained unbroken silence. + +At last I could restrain my feelings no longer. "Alas! dear Jack and +Peterkin," said I, "what is to become of us? I fear that we are doomed +to die." + +"I know not," replied Jack, in a tremulous voice, "I know not; Ralph, I +regret deeply the hastiness of my violent temper, which, I must confess, +has been the chief cause of our being brought to this sad condition. +Perhaps the teacher may do something for us. But I have little hope." + +"Ah! no," said Peterkin, with a heavy sigh; "I am sure he can't help us. +Tararo doesn't care more for him than for one of his dogs." + +"Truly," said I, "there seems no chance of deliverance, unless the +Almighty puts forth his arm to save us. Yet I must say that I have great +hope, my comrades, for we have come to this dark place by no fault of +ours--unless it be a fault to try to succour a woman in distress." + +I was interrupted in my remarks by a noise at the entrance to the cavern, +which was caused by the removal of the barricade. Immediately after, +three men entered, and, taking us by the collars of our coats, led us +away through the forest. As we advanced, we heard much shouting and +beating of native drums in the village, and at first we thought that our +guards were conducting us to the hut of Tararo again. But in this we +were mistaken. The beating of drums gradually increased, and soon after +we observed a procession of the natives coming towards us. At the head +of this procession we were placed, and then we all advanced together +towards the temple where human victims were wont to be sacrificed! + +A thrill of horror ran through my heart as I recalled to mind the awful +scenes that I had before witnessed at that dreadful spot. But +deliverance came suddenly from a quarter whence we little expected it. +During the whole of that day there had been an unusual degree of heat in +the atmosphere, and the sky assumed that lurid aspect which portends a +thunder-storm. Just as we were approaching the horrid temple, a growl of +thunder burst overhead and heavy drops of rain began to fall. + +Those who have not witnessed gales and storms in tropical regions can +form but a faint conception of the fearful hurricane that burst upon the +island of Mango at this time. Before we reached the temple, the storm +burst upon us with a deafening roar, and the natives, who knew too well +the devastation that was to follow, fled right and left through the woods +in order to save their property, leaving us alone in the midst of the +howling storm. The trees around us bent before the blast like willows, +and we were about to flee in order to seek shelter, when the teacher ran +toward us with a knife in his hand. + +"Thank the Lord," he said, cutting our bonds, "I am in time! Now, seek +the shelter of the nearest rock." + +This we did without a moment's hesitation, for the whistling wind burst, +ever and anon, like thunder-claps among the trees, and, tearing them from +their roots, hurled them with violence to the ground. Rain cut across +the land in sheets, and lightning played like forked serpents in the air; +while, high above the roar of the hissing tempest, the thunder crashed, +and burst, and rolled in awful majesty. + +In the village the scene was absolutely appalling. Roofs were blown +completely off the houses in many cases; and in others, the houses +themselves were levelled with the ground. In the midst of this, the +natives were darting to and fro, in some instances saving their goods, +but in many others seeking to save themselves from the storm of +destruction that whirled around them. But, terrific although the tempest +was on land, it was still more tremendous on the mighty ocean. Billows +sprang, as it were, from the great deep, and while their crests were +absolutely scattered into white mist, they fell upon the beach with a +crash that seemed to shake the solid land. But they did not end there. +Each successive wave swept higher and higher on the beach, until the +ocean lashed its angry waters among the trees and bushes, and at length, +in a sheet of white curdled foam, swept into the village and upset and +carried off, or dashed into wreck, whole rows of the native dwellings! It +was a sublime, an awful scene, calculated, in some degree at least, to +impress the mind of beholders with the might and the majesty of God. + +We found shelter in a cave that night and all the next day, during which +time the storm raged in fury; but on the night following it abated +somewhat, and in the morning we went to the village to seek for food, +being so famished with hunger that we lost all feeling of danger and all +wish to escape in our desire to satisfy the cravings of nature. But no +sooner had we obtained food than we began to wish that we had rather +endeavoured to make our escape into the mountains. This we attempted to +do soon afterwards, but the natives were now able to look after us, and +on our showing a disposition to avoid observation and make towards the +mountains, we were seized by three warriors, who once more bound our +wrists and thrust us into our former prison. + +It is true Jack made a vigorous resistance, and knocked down the first +savage who seized him, with a well-directed blow of his fist, but he was +speedily overpowered by others. Thus we were again prisoners, with the +prospect of torture and a violent death before us. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + +Imprisonment--Sinking hopes--Unexpected freedom to more than one, and in +more senses than one. + +For a long long month we remained in our dark and dreary prison, during +which dismal time we did not see the face of a human being, except that +of the silent savage who brought us our daily food. + +There have been one or two seasons in my life during which I have felt as +if the darkness of sorrow and desolation that crushed my inmost heart +could never pass away, until death should make me cease to feel the +present was such a season. + +During the first part of our confinement we felt a cold chill at our +hearts every time we heard a foot-fall near the cave--dreading lest it +should prove to be that of our executioner. But as time dragged heavily +on, we ceased to feel this alarm, and began to experience such a deep, +irrepressible longing for freedom, that we chafed and fretted in our +confinement like tigers. Then a feeling of despair came over us, and we +actually longed for the time when the savages would take us forth to die! +But these changes took place very gradually, and were mingled sometimes +with brighter thoughts; for there were times when we sat in that dark +cavern on our ledge of rock and conversed almost pleasantly about the +past, until we well-nigh forgot the dreary present. But we seldom +ventured to touch upon the future. + +A few decayed leaves and boughs formed our bed; and a scanty supply of +yams and taro, brought to us once a-day, constituted our food. + +"Well, Ralph, how have you slept?" said Jack, in a listless tone, on +rising one morning from his humble couch. "Were you much disturbed by +the wind last night?" + +"No," said I; "I dreamed of home all night, and I thought that my mother +smiled upon me, and beckoned me to go to her; but I could not, for I was +chained." + +"And I dreamed, too," said Peterkin; "but it was of our happy home on the +Coral Island. I thought we were swimming in the Water Garden; then the +savages gave a yell, and we were immediately in the cave at Spouting +Cliff, which, somehow or other, changed into this gloomy cavern; and I +awoke to find it true." + +Peterkin's tone was so much altered by the depressing influence of his +long imprisonment, that, had I not known it was he who spoke, I should +scarcely have recognised it, so sad was it, and so unlike to the merry, +cheerful voice we had been accustomed to hear. I pondered this much, and +thought of the terrible decline of happiness that may come on human +beings in so short a time; how bright the sunshine in the sky at one +time, and, in a short space, how dark the overshadowing cloud! I had no +doubt that the Bible would have given me much light and comfort on this +subject, if I had possessed one, and I once more had occasion to regret +deeply having neglected to store my memory with its consoling truths. + +While I meditated thus, Peterkin again broke the silence of the cave, by +saying, in a melancholy tone, "Oh, I wonder if we shall ever see our dear +island more." + +His voice trembled, and, covering his face with both hands, he bent down +his head and wept. It was an unusual sight for me to see our once joyous +companion in tears, and I felt a burning desire to comfort him; but, +alas! what could I say? I could hold out no hope; and although I essayed +twice to speak, the words refused to pass my lips. While I hesitated, +Jack sat down beside him, and whispered a few words in his ear, while +Peterkin threw himself on his friend's breast, and rested his head on his +shoulder. + +Thus we sat for some time in deep silence. Soon after, we heard +footsteps at the entrance of the cave, and immediately our jailer +entered. We were so much accustomed to his regular visits, however, that +we paid little attention to him, expecting that he would set down our +meagre fare, as usual, and depart. But, to our surprise, instead of +doing so, he advanced towards us with a knife in his hand, and, going up +to Jack, he cut the thongs that bound his wrists, then he did the same to +Peterkin and me! For fully five minutes we stood in speechless +amazement, with our freed hands hanging idly by our sides. The first +thought that rushed into my mind was, that the time had come to put us to +death; and although, as I have said before, we actually wished for death +in the strength of our despair, now that we thought it drew really near I +felt all the natural love of life revive in my heart, mingled with a +chill of horror at the suddenness of our call. + +But I was mistaken. After cutting our bonds, the savage pointed to the +cave's mouth, and we marched, almost mechanically, into the open air. +Here, to our surprise, we found the teacher standing under a tree, with +his hands clasped before him, and the tears trickling down his dark +cheeks. On seeing Jack, who came out first, he sprang towards him, and +clasping him in his arms, exclaimed,-- + +"Oh! my dear young friend, through the great goodness of God you are +free!" + +"Free!" cried Jack. + +"Ay, free," repeated the teacher, shaking us warmly by the hands again +and again; "free to go and come as you will. The Lord has unloosed the +bands of the captive and set the prisoners free. A missionary has been +sent to us, and Tararo has embraced the Christian religion! The people +are even now burning their gods of wood! Come, my dear friends, and see +the glorious sight." + +We could scarcely credit our senses. So long had we been accustomed in +our cavern to dream of deliverance, that we imagined for a moment this +must surely be nothing more than another vivid dream. Our eyes and minds +were dazzled, too, by the brilliant sunshine, which almost blinded us +after our long confinement to the gloom of our prison, so that we felt +giddy with the variety of conflicting emotions that filled our throbbing +bosoms; but as we followed the footsteps of our sable friend, and beheld +the bright foliage of the trees, and heard the cries of the paroquets, +and smelt the rich perfume of the flowering shrubs, the truth, that we +were really delivered from prison and from death, rushed with +overwhelming power into our souls, and, with one accord, while tears +sprang to our eyes, we uttered a loud long cheer of joy. + +It was replied to by a shout from a number of the natives who chanced to +be near. Running towards us, they shook us by the hand with every +demonstration of kindly feeling. They then fell behind, and, forming a +sort of procession, conducted us to the dwelling of Tararo. + +The scene that met our eyes here was one that I shall never forget. On a +rude bench in front of his house sat the chief. A native stood on his +left hand, who, from his dress, seemed to be a teacher. On his right +stood an English gentleman, who, I at once and rightly concluded, was a +missionary. He was tall, thin, and apparently past forty, with a bald +forehead, and thin gray hair. The expression of his countenance was the +most winning I ever saw, and his clear gray eye beamed with a look that +was frank, fearless, loving, and truthful. In front of the chief was an +open space, in the centre of which lay a pile of wooden idols, ready to +be set on fire; and around these were assembled thousands of natives, who +had come to join in or to witness the unusual sight. A bright smile +overspread the missionary's face as he advanced quickly to meet us, and +he shook us warmly by the hands. + +"I am overjoyed to meet you, my dear young friends," he said. "My +friend, and your friend, the teacher, has told me your history; and I +thank our Father in heaven, with all my heart, that he has guided me to +this island, and made me the instrument of saving you." + +We thanked the missionary most heartily, and asked him in some surprise +how he had succeeded in turning the heart of Tararo in our favour. + +"I will tell you that at a more convenient time," he answered, "meanwhile +we must not forget the respect due to the chief. He waits to receive +you." + +In the conversation that immediately followed between us and Tararo, the +latter said that the light of the gospel of Jesus Christ had been sent to +the island, and that to it we were indebted for our freedom. Moreover, +he told us that we were at liberty to depart in our schooner whenever we +pleased, and that we should be supplied with as much provision as we +required. He concluded by shaking hands with us warmly, and performing +the ceremony of rubbing noses. + +This was indeed good news to us, and we could hardly find words to +express our gratitude to the chief and to the missionary. + +"And what of Avatea?" inquired Jack. + +The missionary replied by pointing to a group of natives in the midst of +whom the girl stood. Beside her was a tall, strapping fellow, whose +noble mien and air of superiority bespoke him a chief of no ordinary +kind. + +"That youth is her lover. He came this very morning in his war-canoe to +treat with Tararo for Avatea. He is to be married in a few days, and +afterwards returns to his island home with his bride!" + +"That's capital," said Jack, as he stepped up to the savage and gave him +a hearty shake of the hand. "I wish you joy, my lad;--and you too, +Avatea." + +As Jack spoke, Avatea's lover took him by the hand and led him to the +spot where Tararo and the missionary stood, surrounded by most of the +chief men of the tribe. The girl herself followed, and stood on his left +hand while her lover stood on his right, and, commanding silence, made +the following speech, which was translated by the missionary:-- + +"Young friend, you have seen few years, but your head is old. Your heart +also is large and very brave. I and Avatea are your debtors, and we +wish, in the midst of this assembly, to acknowledge our debt, and to say +that it is one which we can never repay. You have risked your life for +one who was known to you only for a few days. But she was a woman in +distress, and that was enough to secure to her the aid of a Christian +man. We, who live in these islands of the sea, know that the true +Christians always act thus. Their religion is one of love and kindness. +We thank God that so many Christians have been sent here--we hope many +more will come. Remember that I and Avatea will think of you and pray +for you and your brave comrades when you are far away." + +To this kind speech Jack returned a short sailor-like reply, in which he +insisted that he had only done for Avatea what he would have done for any +woman under the sun. But Jack's forte did not lie in speech-making, so +he terminated rather abruptly by seizing the chief's hand and shaking it +violently, after which he made a hasty retreat. + +"Now, then, Ralph and Peterkin," said Jack, as we mingled with the crowd, +"it seems to me that the object we came here for having been +satisfactorily accomplished, we have nothing more to do but get ready for +sea as fast as we can, and hurrah for dear old England!" + +"That's my idea precisely," said Peterkin, endeavouring to wink, but he +had wept so much of late, poor fellow, that he found it difficult; +"however, I'm not going away till I see these fellows burn their gods." + +Peterkin had his wish, for, in a few minutes afterwards, fire was put to +the pile, the roaring flames ascended, and, amid the acclamations of the +assembled thousands, the false gods of Mango were reduced to ashes! + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + +Conclusion. + +To part is the lot of all mankind. The world is a scene of constant +leave-taking, and the hands that grasp in cordial greeting to-day, are +doomed ere long to unite for the last time, when the quivering lips +pronounce the word--"Farewell." It is a sad thought, but should we on +that account exclude it from our minds? May not a lesson worth learning +be gathered in the contemplation of it? May it not, perchance, teach us +to devote our thoughts more frequently and attentively to that land where +we meet, but part no more? + +How many do we part from in this world with a light "Good-bye," whom we +never see again! Often do I think, in my meditations on this subject, +that if we realized more fully the shortness of the fleeting intercourse +that we have in this world with many of our fellow-men, we would try more +earnestly to do them good, to give them a friendly smile, as it were, in +passing (for the longest intercourse on earth is little more than a +passing word and glance), and show that we have sympathy with them in the +short quick struggle of life, by our kindly words and looks and action. + +The time soon drew near when we were to quit the islands of the South +Seas; and, strange though it may appear, we felt deep regret at parting +with the natives of the island of Mango; for, after they embraced the +Christian faith, they sought, by showing us the utmost kindness, to +compensate for the harsh treatment we had experienced at their hands; and +we felt a growing affection for the native teachers and the missionary, +and especially for Avatea and her husband. + +Before leaving, we had many long and interesting conversations with the +missionary, in one of which he told us that he had been making for the +island of Raratonga when his native-built sloop was blown out of its +course, during a violent gale, and driven to this island. At first the +natives refused to listen to what he had to say; but, after a week's +residence among them, Tararo came to him and said that he wished to +become a Christian, and would burn his idols. He proved himself to be +sincere, for, as we have seen, he persuaded all his people to do +likewise. I use the word persuaded advisedly; for, like all the other +Feejee chiefs, Tararo was a despot and might have commanded obedience to +his wishes; but he entered so readily into the spirit of the new faith +that he perceived at once the impropriety of using constraint in the +propagation of it. He set the example, therefore; and that example was +followed by almost every man of the tribe. + +During the short time that we remained at the island, repairing our +vessel and getting her ready for sea, the natives had commenced building +a large and commodious church, under the superintendence of the +missionary, and several rows of new cottages were marked out; so that the +place bid fair to become, in a few months, as prosperous and beautiful as +the Christian village at the other end of the island. + +After Avatea was married, she and her husband were sent away, loaded with +presents, chiefly of an edible nature. One of the native teachers went +with them, for the purpose of visiting still more distant islands of the +sea, and spreading, if possible, the light of the glorious gospel there. + +As the missionary intended to remain for several weeks longer, in order +to encourage and confirm his new converts, Jack and Peterkin and I held a +consultation in the cabin of our schooner,--which we found just as we had +left her, for everything that had been taken out of her was restored. We +now resolved to delay our departure no longer. The desire to see our +beloved native land was strong upon us, and we could not wait. + +Three natives volunteered to go with us to Tahiti, where we thought it +likely that we should be able to procure a sufficient crew of sailors to +man our vessel; so we accepted their offer gladly. + +It was a bright clear morning when we hoisted the snow-white sails of the +pirate schooner and left the shores of Mango. The missionary, and +thousands of the natives, came down to bid us God-speed, and to see us +sail away. As the vessel bent before a light fair wind, we glided +quickly over the lagoon under a cloud of canvass. + +Just as we passed through the channel in the reef the natives gave us a +loud cheer; and as the missionary waved his hat, while he stood on a +coral rock with his gray hairs floating in the wind, we heard the single +word "Farewell" borne faintly over the sea. + +That night, as we sat on the taffrail, gazing out upon the wide sea and +up into the starry firmament, a thrill of joy, strangely mixed with +sadness, passed through our hearts,--for we were at length "homeward +bound," and were gradually leaving far behind us the beautiful, bright, +green, coral islands of the Pacific Ocean. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND *** + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will +be renamed. + +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the +United States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. + +START: FULL LICENSE + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the +person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph +1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the +Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when +you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work +on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: + + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and + most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no + restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it + under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this + eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the + United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where + you are located before using this eBook. + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format +other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain +Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +provided that: + +* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation." + +* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm + works. + +* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + +* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at +www.gutenberg.org + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without +widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular +state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. + +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: www.gutenberg.org + +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + |